GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description V2.6 (20091009)

Doc.
code
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description
Issue Date
V2.6 2009-10-09
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any fo rm o r by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, informat ion, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, exp ress or implied.
Contents
1 Basic Features............................................................................................................................... 12
1.1 Frequency Bands............................................................................................................................................................. 12 1.1.1 GBFD-0101 850 M Hz Frequency Band........................................................................................................... 12 1.1.2 GBFD-0102 900 M Hz Frequency Band........................................................................................................... 13 1.1.3 GBFD-0103 1800 M Hz Frequency Band ........................................................................................................ 14 1.1.4 GBFD-0104 1900 M Hz Frequency Band ........................................................................................................ 15 1.2 Services............................................................................................................................................................................. 16 1.2.1 GBFD-0201 Telephone Service (TS11)............................................................................................................ 16 1.2.2 GBFD-0202 Emergency Call Serv ice (TS12) ................................................................................................. 17 1.2.3 GBFD-0203 Po int To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22) ............................................................. 19 1.2.4 GBFD-0204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62) ................................................................................................................... 20 1.2.5 GBFD-0205 Bearer Service (CSD) ................................................................................................................... 21 1.3 Mobility Management .................................................................................................................................................... 23 1.3.1 GBFD-0301 Location Updating......................................................................................................................... 23 1.3.2 GBFD-0302 IM SI Detach ................................................................................................................................... 24 1.3.3 GBFD-0303 Pag ing.............................................................................................................................................. 25 1.3.4 GBFD-0304 Authentication................................................................................................................................ 27 1.4 Cell Selection................................................................................................................................................................... 29 1.4.1 GBFD-0401 Basic Cell Selection ...................................................................................................................... 29 1.4.2 GBFD-0402 Basic Cell Re -selection ................................................................................................................ 30 1.5 Call Control...................................................................................................................................................................... 32 1.5.1 GBFD-0501 Call Control .................................................................................................................................... 32 1.5.2 GBFD-0502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment ................................................................................... 33 1.5.3 GBFD-0503 Call Reestablishment .................................................................................................................... 35 1.6 Handover .......................................................................................................................................................................... 36 1.6.1 GBFD-0601 Basic Handover ............................................................................................................................. 36 1.6.2 GBFD-0602 PBGT Handover ............................................................................................................................ 38 1.6.3 GBFD-0603 Signal Level Rapid Fall Handover ............................................................................................. 39 1.6.4 GBFD-0604 Load Handover .............................................................................................................................. 40 1.6.5 GBFD-0605 Layered and Hierarchical Handover .......................................................................................... 41 1.6.6 GBFD-0606 Speed-sensitive Handover ........................................................................................................... 43 1.6.7 GBFD-0607 Directed Retry ................................................................................................................................ 44 1.6.8 GBFD-0608 SDCCH Handover......................................................................................................................... 45
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Page 3 of 368

1.7 Po wer Control.................................................................................................................................................................. 46 1.7.1 GBFD-0703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm .......................................................................................... 46 1.8 Measurement Report ...................................................................................................................................................... 48 1.8.1 GBFD-0801 Processing of Measurement Report ........................................................................................... 48 1.8.2 GBFD-0802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report .................................................................................... 49 1.9 Adjustment of the Timing Advance Value .................................................................................................................. 50 1.9.1 GBFD-0901 Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance ................................................................................. 50 1.10 Radio Resource Management ..................................................................................................................................... 52 1.10.1 GBFD-1001 TRX Management....................................................................................................................... 52 1.10.2 GBFD-1002 Radio Link Management ........................................................................................................... 53 1.10.3 GBFD-1003 Radio Co mmon Channel Management ................................................................................... 54 1.10.4 GBFD-1004 Radio Dedicated Channel Management .................................................................................. 56 1.10.5 GBFD-1005 Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorith m............................................................................. 58 1.11 System Information ...................................................................................................................................................... 60 1.11.1 GBFD-1101 System Informat ion Sending ..................................................................................................... 60 1.11.2 GBFD-1102 Forced System Information Sending by OM C....................................................................... 62 1.12 O&M ............................................................................................................................................................................... 63 1.12.1 GBFD-1201 Performance Management......................................................................................................... 63 1.12.2 GBFD-1202 O&M of BTS ............................................................................................................................... 65 1.12.3 GBFD-1203 O&M of BSC............................................................................................................................... 67 1.12.4 GBFD-1204 Clock Control Setting ................................................................................................................. 69 1.12.5 GBFD-1205 BSC Alarm ................................................................................................................................... 70 1.12.6 GBFD-1206 BTS Alarm ................................................................................................................................... 72 1.12.7 GBFD-1207 BTS Test Function ...................................................................................................................... 73 1.12.8 GBFD-1208 Dynamic Data Configuration .................................................................................................... 76 1.12.9 GBFD-1209 GUI Graphic Interface................................................................................................................ 77 1.12.10 GBFD-1210 Integrated Network Management Interface .......................................................................... 78 1.12.11 GBFD-1211 Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equip ment Room ......................................... 79 1.12.12 GBFD-1212 Reporting the BTS Resource Informat ion ............................................................................ 80 1.12.13 GBFD-1213 Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Soft ware ...................................................................... 83 1.12.14 GBFD-1214 Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery ..................................................... 84 1.13 LAPD Multip lexing at Abis Interface ....................................................................................................................... 85 1.13.1 GBFD-1301 LAPD Mult iplexing at Abis Interface ..................................................................................... 85 1.14 Net working Modes ....................................................................................................................................................... 87 1.14.1 GBFD-1401 Star Networking Mode ............................................................................................................... 87 1.14.2 GBFD-1402 Link Networking Mode.............................................................................................................. 88 1.14.3 GBFD-1403 Tree Net working Mode .............................................................................................................. 89 1.15 BTS Co mb ined Cab inet............................................................................................................................................... 90 1.15.1 GBFD-1501 BTS Co mb ined Cab inet ............................................................................................................. 90 1.15.2 GBFD-1502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group ...................................................................................................... 91 1.16 Cabinet/Subrack Sharing ............................................................................................................................................. 92 1.16.1 GBFD-8801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing.................................................................................................. 92
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 4 of 368

1.17 BTS Power Management ............................................................................................................................................ 94 1.17.1 GBFD-1601 BTS Power Management ........................................................................................................... 94 1.18 Reliability and Maintainability................................................................................................................................... 95 1.18.1 GBFD-1701 Board Switchover........................................................................................................................ 95 1.18.2 GBFD-1702 TC Resources Pool...................................................................................................................... 96 1.18.3 GBFD-1703 Resources Check ......................................................................................................................... 97 1.18.4 GBFD-1704 Soft ware Patch............................................................................................................................. 99 1.18.5 GBFD-1705 Flow Control .............................................................................................................................. 100 1.19 A Interface Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 102 1.19.1 GBFD-1801 Ater Interface 4:1 Mult iplexing .............................................................................................. 102 1.19.2 GBFD-1802 14-Digit Signaling Po int Code................................................................................................ 103 1.19.3 GBFD-1803 Circuit Management ................................................................................................................. 104 1.19.4 GBFD-1804 A Interface Protocol Process ................................................................................................... 106 1.19.5 GBFD-1805 A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring .............................................................................. 108 1.19.6 GBFD-1806 STP (Signaling Transport Point) ............................................................................................ 109 1.20 Supporting Three-Digit M NC .................................................................................................................................. 110 1.20.1 GBFD-1901 Supporting Three-Digit M NC................................................................................................. 110 1.21 Base Energy Saving ................................................................................................................................................... 111 1.21.1 GBFD-4802 Discontinuous Reception (DRX) ........................................................................................... 111 1.22 STM -1 Optical Transmission Interface................................................................................................................... 112 1.22.1 GBFD-2001 STM -1 Optical Transmission Interface ................................................................................. 112 1.23 Message Tracing ......................................................................................................................................................... 113 1.23.1 GBFD-2201 Interface Message Tracing....................................................................................................... 113 1.23.2 GBFD-2202 User Signaling Tracing............................................................................................................. 115 1.23.3 GBFD-2203 Cell Tracing................................................................................................................................ 116 1.24 Remote EAC Maintenance........................................................................................................................................ 117 1.24.1 GBFD-2301 Remote EAC Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 117 1.25 Cell Frequency Scan .................................................................................................................................................. 118 1.25.1 GBFD-2401 Cell Frequency Scan................................................................................................................. 118 1.26 TCH Re -assignment ................................................................................................................................................... 119 1.26.1 GBFD-2501 TCH Re -assignment ................................................................................................................. 119 1.27 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.................................................................................................................................. 120 1.27.1 GBFD-3001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment ................................................................................................ 120 1.28 Support of Day light Saving Time ............................................................................................................................ 122 1.28.1 GBFD-6101Support of Daylight Saving Time ............................................................................................ 122 1.29 MM L............................................................................................................................................................................. 123 1.29.1 GBFD-6501 Man Machine Language (MML)............................................................................................ 123 1.30 Built-in PCU Function ............................................................................................................................................... 124 1.30.1 GBFD-9001 Gb Interface Function .............................................................................................................. 124 1.30.2 GBFD-9118 Resource Pool of the Packet Service Board ......................................................................... 125 1.30.3 GBFD-9101 Packet Channel Co mb ination Type........................................................................................ 126 1.30.4 GBFD-9102 Packet System Informat ion ..................................................................................................... 128
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 5 of 368

1.30.5 GBFD-9103 MS Types.................................................................................................................................... 130 1.30.6 GBFD-9104 MAC Mode ................................................................................................................................ 131 1.30.7 GBFD-9105 RLC Mode.................................................................................................................................. 132 1.30.8 GBFD-9106 Coding Scheme ......................................................................................................................... 133 1.30.9 GBFD-9107 Net working Control Mode ...................................................................................................... 134 1.30.10 GBFD-9108 Network Operation Mode Support ...................................................................................... 135 1.30.11 GBFD-9109 QoS (Best Effort ) .................................................................................................................... 137 1.30.12 GBFD-9110 Access ....................................................................................................................................... 138 1.30.13 GBFD-9111 Assignment ............................................................................................................................... 139 1.30.14 GBFD-9112 Pag ing ....................................................................................................................................... 140 1.30.15 GBFD-9113 Timing Advance Update ........................................................................................................ 142 1.30.16 GBFD-9115 Po wer Control.......................................................................................................................... 143 1.30.17 GBFD-9116 Packet Up link Flo w Control ................................................................................................. 144 1.30.18 GBFD-9117 Flow Control on Gb Interface ............................................................................................... 145 1.31 Security of Operating System................................................................................................................................... 147 1.31.1 GBFD-1251 SetSuSE Security Customizing Operating System ............................................................. 147 1.32 Inter-BSC Connection................................................................................................................................................ 148 1.32.1 GBFD-8621 Connection Inter BSC over IP ................................................................................................ 148 1.33 2G and 3G Co -transmission...................................................................................................................................... 149 1.33.1 MRFD-210001 2G and 3G Data Share CPRI Interface ............................................................................ 149
2 Optional Feature........................................................................................................................ 152

2.1 Coverage Enhancement ............................................................................................................................................... 152 2.1.1 GBFD-5901 PBT(Po wer Boost Technology) ................................................................................................ 152 2.1.2 GBFD-5902 Transmit Diversity....................................................................................................................... 153 2.1.3 GBFD-5903 4-Way Receiver Diversity.......................................................................................................... 154 2.1.4 GBFD-8101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity ..................................................................................................... 155 2.1.5 GBFD-8102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology).............................................................................. 157 2.2 Wide Coverage .............................................................................................................................................................. 158 2.2.1 GBFD-4001 Extended Cell............................................................................................................................... 158 2.3 V o ice Capacity Imp rovement...................................................................................................................................... 159 2.3.1 GBFD-3201 Concentric Cell ............................................................................................................................ 159 2.3.2 GBFD-4501 Co-BCCH Cell............................................................................................................................. 161 2.3.3 GBFD-4401 Mult i-band Sharing One BSC ................................................................................................... 162 2.3.4 GBFD-4402 Enhanced Dual-band Net work .................................................................................................. 163 2.3.5 GBFD-7001 Flex MAIO ................................................................................................................................... 165 2.3.6 GBFD-5801 ICC................................................................................................................................................. 166 2.3.7 GBFD-5821 EICC .............................................................................................................................................. 167 2.4 Frequency Usage Improvement.................................................................................................................................. 168 2.4.1 GBFD-3701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) ......................................................... 168 2.4.2 GBFD-3702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping.......................................................................................... 169 2.4.3 GBFD-3703 Antenna Frequency Hopping..................................................................................................... 170
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 6 of 368

2.4.4 GBFD-8001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing ................................................................................... 172 2.4.5 GBFD-4901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM Frequency Band................................................................ 173 2.4.6 GBFD-7002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation)..................................................................... 175 2.5 Network Synchronization ............................................................................................................................................ 176 2.5.1 GBFD-10401 BTS GPS Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 176 2.5.2 GBFD-8201 So ft-Synchronized Network................................................................................................... 178 2.6 Energy Saving ............................................................................................................................................................... 179 2.6.1 GBFD-7601 HUAW EI III Po wer Control Algorithm .................................................................................. 179 2.6.2 GBFD-4801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Do wnlink ..................................................................... 181 2.6.3 GBFD-4803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Up lin k .......................................................................... 182 2.6.4 GBFD-1602 TRX Po wer A mplifier Intelligent Shutdown.......................................................................... 183 2.6.5 GBFD-1603 TRX Po wer A mplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level ........................................ 184 2.6.6 GBFD-1604 Intelligent Co mb iner Bypass ..................................................................................................... 185 2.6.7 GBFD-1605 Active Backup Power Control................................................................................................... 187 2.6.8 GBFD-1606 Po wer Optimizat ion Based on Channel Type......................................................................... 188 2.6.9 GBFD-1608 PSU Smart Control ..................................................................................................................... 189 2.6.10 GBFD-1609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization ......................................................... 190 2.6.11 GBFD-1611 TRX Working Voltage A djustment ................................................................................... 191 2.6.12 GBFD-1612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent V oltage Regulation ....................................................................... 192 2.7 Abis Transmission Saving ........................................................................................................................................... 194 2.7.1 GBFD-6701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface ............................................................................... 194 2.7.2 GBFD-7301 Flex Abis ....................................................................................................................................... 195 2.7.3 GBFD-7702 BTS Local Switch ....................................................................................................................... 196 2.7.4 GBFD-8401 Abis Transmission Optimization .............................................................................................. 197 2.7.5 GBFD-2013 Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution .............................................................................. 199 2.8 A Trans mission Saving................................................................................................................................................. 201 2.8.1 GBFD-6901 Flex Ater ....................................................................................................................................... 201 2.8.2 GBFD-7701 BSC Local Switch ....................................................................................................................... 203 2.9 Hardware Sav ing........................................................................................................................................................... 205 2.9.1 GBFD-5702 TrFO .............................................................................................................................................. 205 2.10 Static Networking ....................................................................................................................................................... 207 2.10.1 GBFD-4601 Multi-Cell Function .................................................................................................................. 207 2.11 Network Reliab ility .................................................................................................................................................... 208 2.11.1 GBFD-7801 Ring Topology ........................................................................................................................... 208 2.11.2 GBFD-3801 TRX Cooperation ...................................................................................................................... 210 2.11.3 GBFD-7401 M SC Pool ................................................................................................................................... 211 2.11.4 GBFD-9701 SGSN Pool ................................................................................................................................. 213 2.11.5 GBFD-6601 Ab is Bypass................................................................................................................................ 215 2.11.6 GBFD-7802 Fast Ring Network Switch....................................................................................................... 216 2.11.7 GBFD-3721 Robust Air Interface Signalling .............................................................................................. 217 2.11.8 GBFD-7803 Ab is Transmission Backup ...................................................................................................... 219 2.12 High Speed Coverage ................................................................................................................................................ 220
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 7 of 368

2.12.1 GBFD-10101 Automatic Frequency Correct ion (AFC) ............................................................................ 220 2.12.2 GBFD-10102 Fast Move Handover.............................................................................................................. 221 2.12.3 GBFD-10103 Chain Cell Handover.............................................................................................................. 222 2.12.4 GBFD-10104 Mu lti-site Cell ......................................................................................................................... 223 2.13 2G/3G Seamless Coverage........................................................................................................................................ 225 2.13.1 GBFD-4301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability ............................................................................................. 225 2.13.2 GBFD-4302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability ....................................................................................... 226 2.13.3 GBFD-4321 GSM/WCDMA Serv ice Based Handover............................................................................. 228 2.13.4 GBFD-4322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover................................................................................. 229 2.13.5 GBFD-4323 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State ........................................................................ 230 2.14 BTS Satellite Transmission....................................................................................................................................... 231 2.14.1 GBFD-3901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface ........................................................................... 231 2.15 BSC Satellite Transmission....................................................................................................................................... 232 2.15.1 GBFD-3902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface................................................................................. 232 2.15.2 GBFD-3903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface............................................................................ 233 2.15.3 GBFD-3904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface............................................................................... 234 2.15.4 GBFD-3905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface .............................................................................. 235 2.16 Big Capacity BSC....................................................................................................................................................... 236 2.16.1 GBFD-5201 High Speed Signaling ............................................................................................................... 236 2.16.2 GBFD-5301 Local Mu ltiple Signaling Points ............................................................................................. 237 2.17 Maintainability ............................................................................................................................................................ 239 2.17.1 GBFD-4701 Semi-Permanent Connection................................................................................................... 239 2.17.2 GBFD-6401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing......................................................................................... 241 2.17.3 GBFD-6402 Maintenance Mode Alarm ....................................................................................................... 243 2.18 Power Control A lgorith m .......................................................................................................................................... 244 2.18.1 GBFD-7602 Active Po wer Control ............................................................................................................... 244 2.19 Net work Security ........................................................................................................................................................ 245 2.19.1 GBFD-3501 A5/ 1 and A5/ 2 Ciphering Algorithm...................................................................................... 245 2.19.2 GBFD-3503 A5/ 3 Ciphering Algorith m....................................................................................................... 246 2.19.3 GBFD-3521 A5/ 1 Encryption Flow Optimization ..................................................................................... 247 2.19.4 GBFD-3522 Encrypted Network Management .......................................................................................... 248 2.19.5 GBFD-3523 NAT Beside OM ........................................................................................................................ 250 2.20 Enhanced V o ice Service ............................................................................................................................................ 252 2.20.1 GBFD-3301 Enhanced Full Rate ................................................................................................................... 252 2.20.2 GBFD-3401 Half Rate Speech....................................................................................................................... 253 2.20.3 GBFD-3402 Dynamic HR/ FR Adaptation ................................................................................................... 255 2.21 Cell Broadcast ............................................................................................................................................................. 256 2.21.1 GBFD-3601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) .................................................................... 256 2.21.2 GBFD-3602 Simp lified Cell Broadcast........................................................................................................ 257 2.22 CS General Enhancement.......................................................................................................................................... 258 2.22.1 GBFD-5601 Automatic Level Control (A LC) ............................................................................................ 258 2.22.2 GBFD-5602 Acoustic Echo Cancellat ion (AEC) ....................................................................................... 259
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 8 of 368

2.22.3 GBFD-5603 Automatic No ise Restraint (ANR) ......................................................................................... 260 2.22.4 GBFD-5701 TFO ............................................................................................................................................. 261 2.22.5 GBFD-6801 Vo ice Quality Index (VQI) ...................................................................................................... 263 2.22.6 GBFD-7501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EM R) ................................................................................ 264 2.22.7 GBFD-7101 BTS Power Lift for Handover ................................................................................................ 265 2.22.8 GBFD-5522 Dyna mic HR/ FR Adaptation ................................................................................................... 266 2.23 AMR Package.............................................................................................................................................................. 267 2.23.1 GBFD-5501 AMR FR ..................................................................................................................................... 267 2.23.2 GBFD-5502 AMR HR..................................................................................................................................... 269 2.23.3 GBFD-5503 AMR Power Control................................................................................................................. 271 2.23.4 GBFD-5504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment ....................................................................................... 272 2.23.5 GBFD-5505 AMR Radio Link Timer ........................................................................................................... 273 2.23.6 GBFD-5506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment........................................................... 274 2.24 PS QOS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 275 2.24.1 GBFD-9901 Streaming QoS(GBR) .............................................................................................................. 275 2.24.2 GBFD-9902 QoS A RP&THP ........................................................................................................................ 276 2.24.3 GBFD-9904 PS Active Package Management ............................................................................................ 278 2.24.4 GBFD-9905 Po C QoS ..................................................................................................................................... 279 2.25 Cell Reselection of PS Do main ................................................................................................................................ 281 2.25.1 GBFD-6201 Net work-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) ....................................................................... 281 2.25.2 GBFD-6301 Intra BSC Net work Assisted Cell Change (NA CC) ............................................................ 282 2.25.3 GBFD-9801 Packet SI Status (PSI) .............................................................................................................. 283 2.26 GPRS/ EGPRS Serv ice ............................................................................................................................................... 284 2.26.1 GBFD-4101 GPRS........................................................................................................................................... 284 2.26.2 GBFD-10001 Network Operation Mode I ................................................................................................... 286 2.26.3 GBFD-8901 CS-3/ CS-4 .................................................................................................................................. 287 2.26.4 GBFD-4201 EGPRS ........................................................................................................................................ 288 2.26.5 GBFD-3101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment ................................................................................................... 291 2.26.6 GBFD-10002 Gb Over FR.............................................................................................................................. 292 2.27 EGPRS Serv ice Enhancement .................................................................................................................................. 294 2.27.1 GBFD-9201 11-Bit EGPRS Access .............................................................................................................. 294 2.27.2 GBFD-9202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS ......................................................................... 295 2.27.3 GBFD-9203 Extended Uplink TBF .............................................................................................................. 296 2.27.4 GBFD-9204 Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink M CS Coding................................................................ 297 2.27.5 GBFD-9205 Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency...................................................................... 298 2.27.6 GBFD-9302 Packet Channel Dispatching ................................................................................................... 300 2.27.7 GBFD-9303 Load Sharing.............................................................................................................................. 301 2.27.8 GBFD-9501 Adaptive Adjustment of Up lin k and Down link Channels .................................................. 303 2.27.9 GBFD-9305 BSS Pag ing Coordination ........................................................................................................ 304 2.28 High-Speed Data Service .......................................................................................................................................... 305 2.28.1 GBFD-9401 EDA (Extended Dynamic A llocation) ................................................................................... 305 2.28.2 GBFD-9402 MS High Multislot Classes ..................................................................................................... 306
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 9 of 368

2.28.3 GBFD-4151 DTM ............................................................................................................................................ 307 2.28.4 GBFD-9403 Class11 DTM ............................................................................................................................. 310 2.28.5 GBFD-9404 HM C DTM ................................................................................................................................. 311 2.28.6 GBFD-9405 14.4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data ........................................................................................... 313 2.29 VIP Service Support ................................................................................................................................................... 314 2.29.1 GBFD-6001 Resource Reservation ............................................................................................................... 314 2.29.2 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EM LPP) ................................................................ 315 2.29.3 GBFD-0521 Guaranteed Emergency Call ................................................................................................... 316 2.30 Terminal Package........................................................................................................................................................ 317 2.30.1 GBFD-8103 Net work Support SAIC............................................................................................................ 317 2.31 LCS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 319 2.31.1 GBFD-5401 NSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA) ............................................................................................. 319 2.31.2 GBFD-5402 BSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA) ............................................................................................. 320 2.31.3 GBFD-5403 Simp le Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA) ......................................................................................... 320 2.32 Abis IP .......................................................................................................................................................................... 321 2.32.1 GBFD-8601 Abis over IP................................................................................................................................ 321 2.33 A IP................................................................................................................................................................................ 323 2.33.1 GBFD-8602 A over IP ..................................................................................................................................... 323 2.34 Gb IP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 325 2.34.1 GBFD-8603 Gb over IP .................................................................................................................................. 325 2.35 IP Enhancement .......................................................................................................................................................... 327 2.35.1 GBFD-8604 Abis MUX .................................................................................................................................. 327 2.35.2 GBFD-8605 IP QoS ......................................................................................................................................... 328 2.35.3 GBFD-8606 Clock Over IP ............................................................................................................................ 331 2.35.4 GBFD-8607 IP Performance Monitor .......................................................................................................... 333 2.36 PICO Solution Package ............................................................................................................................................. 334 2.36.1 GBFD-10601 PICO Automat ic Configurat ion and Planning ................................................................... 334 2.36.2 GBFD-10602 PICO Synchronization ........................................................................................................... 336 2.37 Easy GSM Solution Package .................................................................................................................................... 337 2.37.1 GBFD-10701 Co mpact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning .................................................... 337 2.37.2 GBFD-10702 Co mpact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning ..................................................................... 338 2.38 2G and 3G Co -transmission...................................................................................................................................... 339 2.38.1 MRFD-260001 2G and 3G Co-transmission by TDM Switching ........................................................... 339 2.39 Public V o ice Group Call Service .............................................................................................................................. 341 2.39.1 GBFD-10301 Public V o ice Group Call Service .......................................................................................... 341 2.39.2 GBFD-10303 Late Group Channel Assignment ......................................................................................... 342 2.39.3 GBFD-10305 Single Channel Group Call Orig inating.............................................................................. 343 2.39.4 GBFD-10306 Talker Identification ............................................................................................................... 344 2.39.5 GBFD-10307 Group Call EM LPP ................................................................................................................ 345 2.39.6 GBFD-10308 Fast Group Call Setup ............................................................................................................ 346 2.39.7 GBFD-10309 Group Call Reliability Enhancing........................................................................................ 347 2.40 Public V o ice Broadcast Service................................................................................................................................ 348
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 10 of 368

2.40.1 GBFD-10302 Public V o ice Broadcast Service ............................................................................................ 348 2.40.2 GBFD-10304 Late Broadcast Channel Assignment................................................................................... 349 2.41 Handover ...................................................................................................................................................................... 350 2.41.1 GBFD-10501 HUAWEI II Handover ........................................................................................................... 350 2.41.2 GBFD-10502 Handover Re -establishment .................................................................................................. 352 2.42 RAN Sharing ............................................................................................................................................................... 353 2.42.1 GBFD-8701 RAN Sharing ............................................................................................................................. 353
3 Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................. 355
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 11 o f 368
1
1.1 Frequency Bands
1.1.1 GBFD-0101 850 MHz Frequency Band
Availability
This feature is available from GBSS6.1.
Basic Features
This feature description is about the BSC6000V900R008C12.
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the GSM850 frequency band.
Benefits
The GSM frequency resources are limited and are shared by an increasing number of operators, and thus the frequencies assigned to each operator are decreasing. The GSM900 and DCS1800 cannot meet the increasing service requirements posed by the subscribers. Therefore, the GSM850 frequency band is introduced on the basis of GSM900, DCS1800, and PCS1900. This feature provides the following benefits:

Related government organizations can make profit by selling this frequency band. The operators can be assigned more radio resources and provide better service to MSs, thereby achieving more profit.
GSM850 is mainly used by operators of America, South American countries, and certain countries in Asia. The GSM systems in America mainly use GSM850 and rarely use GSM900. Huawei BSC supports co-BSC of up to three frequency bands. The following combination of frequency bands can be supported by one Huawei BSC: GSM850/GSM900/DCS1800 or GSM850/GSM900/PCS1900.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 12 of 368
Description
The operating frequencies of GSM850 are as follows: Uplink: 824849 MHz Downlink: 869894 MHz ARFCN: 128251
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The BTS must be configured with the TRX module that supports GSM850. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the P-GSM900 frequency band.
Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:

Related government organizations can make profit by selling this frequency band. The P-GSM900 is the commonly used frequency band except for America, where GSM850 is used as the basic frequency band. The P-GSM900 features wide coverage and in comparison with DCS1800, the coverage range of frequencies in P-GSM900 is wider. Hence, P-GSM900 provides greater coverage distance and better call quality. The P-GSM900 is widely used by a great number of operators. In addition, the P-GSM900 equipment is less expensive compared with the equipment used for other frequency bands.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 13 of 368
Description
GSM900 is the most widely used frequency band in the GSM network. To be distinguished from E-GSM900 and R-GSM900, the standard GSM900 is also referred to as P-GSM900 in GSM specifications. The operating frequencies of P-GSM900 are as follows: Uplink: 890915 MHz Downlink: 935960 MHz ARFCN: 1124
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The BTS must be configured with the TRX module that supports P-GSM900. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the DCS1800 frequency band.
Benefits
The GSM network is developing rapidly worldwide. The GSM frequency resources, however, are limited and are shared by an increasing number of operators, and thus the frequencies assigned to each operator are decreasing. The available frequencies of DCS1800 are triple the available frequencies of P-GSM900. The use of DCS1800 provides the following benefits :

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 14 of 368
Description
GSM1800 is also referred to as DCS1800. Dual-band networking of DCS1800 and GSM900 is supported. The operating frequencies of DCS1800 are as follows: Uplink: 17101785 MHz Downlink: 18051880 MHz ARFCN: 512885 Certain frequencies of DCS1800 overlap with the frequencies PCS1900. After the corresponding functions are purchased, Huawei GBSS supports co-BSC of up to three frequency bands. For example, the following combination of frequency bands can be supported by one BSC: GSM850/GSM900/DCS1800 or GSM850/GSM900/PCS1900.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The BTS must be configured with the TRX module that supports DCS1800. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the PCS1900 frequency band.
Benefits
The GSM network is developing rapidly worldwide. The GSM frequency resources, however, are limited and are shared by an increasing number of operators, and thus the frequencies assigned to each operator are decreasing. With the introduction of PSC1900 on the basis of GSM900 and DCS1800, the GSM frequency resources increases, thus bringing more benefits to governments and operators. This feature provides the following benefits:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 15 of 368

Description
GSM1900 is also referred to as PCS1900. The operating frequencies of PCS1900 are as follows: Uplink: 18501910 MHz Downlink: 19301990 MHz ARFCN: 512810 Certain frequencies of DCS1800 overlap with the frequencies PCS1900. After the corresponding functions are purchased, Huawei GBSS supports co-BSC of up to three frequency bands. For example, the following combination of frequency bands can be supported by one BSC: GSM850/GSM900/DCS1800 or GSM850/GSM900/PCS1900.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The BTS must be configured with the TRX module that supports PCS1900. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.
1.2 Services
1.2.1 GBFD-0201 Telephone Service (TS11)
Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the TS11 service specified in GSM specifications, that is, the telephone service.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 16 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The telephone service can be classified into mobile-originated calls (MOC) and mobile-terminated calls (MTC). The full rate (FR) speech coding is adopted by default. The speech calls can be made between MSs within a GSM PLMN, also between a PLMN MS and a subscriber of PSTN or other communication networks.
Benefits
Telephone service is a basic speech service specified in GSM specifications. It is also one of the basic speech service functions provided by the operators. The excellent speech service provided by Huawei BSS provides the following benef its:

Telephone services with high quality, hence better user experience for the subscribers Better brand reputation, hence improvement of the operators' profit
Description
Telephone service (TS11) specified in GSM specifications is a basic function of the GSM equipment. It is also a basic service provided by Huawei GBSS. In terms of called party, the telephone services are classified into MOCs and MTCs. The telephone service supports the speech calls between MSs within a GSM PLMN, also between a PLMN MS and a subscriber of PSTN or other communication networks. In the BSS, the transcoder & rate adaptation unit (TRAU) is responsible for the speech conversion between the GSM speech codings and the 64 kbit/s PCM coding. If the speech coding schemes specified in optional features are not activated for a common call, the full rate speech coding is adopted by default.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.2.2 GBFD-0202 Emergency Call Service (TS12)

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 17 of 368
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the emergency call service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications and provides higher priority for the emergency call service.
Benefits
Emergency call service allows a subscriber to contact local emergency services for assistance in case of emergency. To subscribers in emergencies, the emergency call service is of special importance.
During an emergency, the subscriber can dial the specified emergency service number free of charge for assistance even if the MS is suspended or the subscriber is a defaulting subscriber. The emergency call service takes precedence over other services in accessing the network. Even in congested cells, the subscriber can contact the aid agencies by dialing the emergency service number.
Description
Emergency call service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications is a basic function of the GSM equipment. It is also a basic service provided by Huawei GBSS. The emergency call takes precedence over common calls. Compared with common calls, the procedure of the emergency call is simplified to accelerate the call establishment and to ensure a higher call establishment success rate. For example, during the immediate assignment procedure, a traffic channel (TCH) can be assigned directly so that an emergency call can be quickly and easily allocated with the radio resources.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and the core network (CN).
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 18 of 368
1.2.3 GBFD-0203 Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22)

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the TS21 and TS22 services specified in GSM specifications, that is, the sending and receiving of short messages.
Benefits
The point-to-point short message service is more and more widely used in daily life and work. As a value-added service, the short message service is a complement to the non-diversified mobile speech services of the GSM. The MS can exchange information with other MSs by using the point-to-point short message services. This feature provides the following benefits:

The point-to-point short message service meets the subscribers' increasingly diversified data service requirements. The point-to-point short message service has become an increasingly important source of operators' revenue and makes the operators' profit more diversified. The point-to-point short message service can be provided as the SP services to enrich the operating methods of the operators.
Description
Mobile-terminated (MT) point-to-point short message service (TS11) and mobile-originated (MO) point-to-point short message service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications are basic functions of the GSM equipment. They are also basic services provided by Huawei GBSS. The point-to-point short message service can be used to exchange information in plain text. With this service, the subscribers can exchange simple information with each other and the operators can send service promotion information and sale information. Both the short message center (SMC) and the MS can initiate the point-to-point short message service. The BSS supports the sending and receiving of the short messages. On receiving the signaling of a short message from the MSC, the BSS forwards the short message to the MS. In turn, on receiving a short message from the MS, the BSS forwards the short message to the MSC. The short message here refers to the short message whose transmission is implemented through SS7 signaling. The short message implemented in the PS domain is not included. The PS short message is a function mainly implemented by the SGSN. The PS short message is treated as a common data service on the BSC.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 19 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs The feature should be supported by the CN, SMC, and MS.
1.2.4 GBFD-0204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62)

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the TS61 and TS62 services specified in GSM specifications. TS61 refers to the G3 alternate voice and fax service and TS62 refers to the G3 automatic voice and fax service. The TS61 and TS62 enables the MS to receive and send the fax.
Benefits
The G3 fax feature is a value-added mobile data service that allows MSs to send and receive the voice fax. The G3 fax feature complements the non-diversified mobile speech service of the GSM and enables MSs to carry out fax services. This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature allows the MS to receive and send the fax any time any where and meets the diversified requirements of the subscribers. This feature allows operators to provide mobile fax service to extend the service range and the source of revenue.
Description
TS61 fax and TS62 fax services specified in GSM specifications are basic functions of the GSM equipment. They are also basic services provided by Huawei GBSS. With the TS61 fax and TS62 fax services, the MS can send and receive the voice fax. The fax service is realized through other upper-layer protocols. Therefore, the BSS provides the lower-layer connection but does not handle the upper-layer services. The main device required by this feature is deployed in the CN.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 20 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the CN and the MS.
1.2.5 GBFD-0205 Bearer Service (CSD)

Availability
Summary
Huawei BSS supports the traditional CSD services and the data services of multiple rates.
Benefits
Both CSD and GPRS are the standard 2G data services. Data services are more and more widely used in daily life and work. As a value-added mobile data service, CSD complements the non-diversified GSM mobile speech services to some extent. With the CSD service, the MS can connect to the operators' data network or even to the Internet. This feature provides the follows benefits:

The CSD service meets the subscribers' increasingly diversified data service requirements. The CSD service also enables data transfer between networks. The CSD service has become an increasingly important source of operators' revenue and makes the operators' profit more diversified. Operators can provide diversified services on the data platform of CSD to attract more subscribers, thereby achieving more profit. Unlike GPRS, CSD does not require the change of the existing BSS hardware. Instead, CSD can be implemented directly in the existing system without adding the PCU device or hardware and software. This reduces the space required in the equipment room and facilitates the management of the equipment room. Moreover, the CSD increases the choices of data services.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports various bearer services specified in GSM specifications. The GBSS provides the lower-layer connection but does not handle the upper-layer services. The bearer service can be used in low-rate data service applications. Huawei GBSS supports the following bearer services:

BS21 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 300 bps BS22 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200 bps
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 21 of 368

BS23 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200/75 bps (Remark 1) BS24 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 2400 bps BS25 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 4800 bps BS26 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 9600 bps BS31 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200 bps BS32 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 2400 bps BS33 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 4800 bps BS34 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 9600 bps BS41 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 300 bps BS42 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 1200 bps BS43 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 1200/75 bps (Remark 1) BS44 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 2400 bps BS45 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 4800 bps BS46 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 9600 bps BS51 packet access service, 2.4 kbps, synchronous, UDI, nontransparent BS52 packet access service, 4.8 kbps, synchronous, UDI, nontransparent BS53 packet access service, 9.6 kbps, synchronous, UDI, nontransparent BS61 alternate speech/data service, transparent/nontransparent BS81 speech followed by data service
Remark 1: Bearer services BS23 and BS43 are applicable to the MOC only. In BS23 and BS43 services, 75 bit/s is applicable to the uplink and 1200 bit/s is applicable to the downlink.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0 The service of 14.4 kbit/s is realized as an optional feature of GBSS8.0. That is, GBFD-9405 14.4Kbps Circuit Switched Data.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the CN and the MS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 22 of 368
1.3 Mobility Management

1.3.1 GBFD-0301 Location Updating
Availability
Summary
To ensure that services such as the paging can be processed normally, the network needs to know the information about the location of the MS. The MS registers to the network through the location updating procedure. In this way, the VLR and HLR keep track of the location information about the MS, thus ensuring the normal communication of MSs.
Benefits
Location updating is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.
Description
The location updating procedure is the signaling procedure for the MS to update the location information on the network. This ensures that the location information about the MS stored in the HLR and VLR is consistent with the actual location information about the MS. The general location updating procedure is as follows: The MS initiates the access request with the location updating as the access cause; the network side allocates a signaling channel for the MS; the MS sends a location updating request on this signaling channel; the NSS side determines whether to accept the location updating request based on the identity of the MS. In different scenarios, three types of specific location updating procedures are initiated: normal location updating, periodic location updating, and IMSI attach location updating.
Normal location updating When the location area of the MS changes, the MS initiates the normal location updating procedure. During the normal location updating procedure, the network side may initiate other supplementary procedures, such as the classmark interrogation, identification request, authentication, and ciphering mode setting. Periodic location updating When timer T3212 expires, the MS initiates the periodic updating procedure. The value of T3212 is provided by the network in the system information type 3 message. The MS resolves this system information message to obtain the value of the T3212 timer. IMIS attach location updating procedure The IMSI attach location updating is a complement to the IMSI detach procedure. The network uses the system information type 3 message to indicate whether the IMSI attach and IMSI detach are allowed. If the network indicates that the IMSI attach and IMSI detach are required, the MS triggers the IMSI attach procedure when the IMSI is activated. When the MS activates the IMSI or the MS has moved from a non-coverage area to a coverage area, the IMSI attach procedure is triggered if the IMSI attach is allowed and the stored location area of the MS is the same as the location area of the current serving cell.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 23 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Location updating ensures smooth communication by updating the information about the location of MSs in the VLR and HLR in real time.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.3.2 GBFD-0302 IMSI Detach

Availability
Summary
After the IMSI is detached, the subscriber is marked as an invalid subscriber by the network. Then, the network does not send any paging message to this subscriber.
Benefits
IMSI detach is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.
Description
IMSI attach and detach are IMSI-specific procedures. When an MS is powered off, it sends the network the last message containing the detach request. On receiving this message, the MSC/VLR sets the subscriber status to invalid. Then, the network does not page this subscriber. During the IMSI detach, the subscriber status is set only on the MSC/VLR but not on the HLR. After the MS powers on again, the MS performs the IMSI attach procedure if the current location area of the MS is the same as the location area registered before the MS is powered off. Otherwise, the MS performs the normal location updating procedure to make the location information stored in the HLR and VLR the same as the actual location area of the MS. The network informs the MS of whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the system information type 3 message.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 24 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.3.3 GBFD-0303 Paging

Availability
Summary
The network instructs the MS to access the network as the called party through the paging procedure to complete the call establishment.
Benefits
Paging is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. The paging algorithm determines the paging efficiency of the GBSS. Excellent pag ing algorithms provide the following benefits:
The paging processing capability is one of the indexes that indicate the system capability. Huawei GBSS paging algorithm guarantees the paging processing capability while maintaining the paging efficiency and reducing the paging load. Prevents the paging from being missed so that the subscriber can receive calls. Thus, complaints decrease and user satisfaction increases.
Description
Paging procedure: To answer the call timely, the MS in idle state listens to the paging channel all the time. If there is a paging message to the MS, the MS responds to the paging and completes the subsequent procedure as a called party. The pagings are classified into PS pagings and CS pagings. When there is downlink data to be transferred to the MS, the SGSN initiates the PS paging procedure. If packet common control channel (PCCCH) is configured, the PS paging message is transmitted on PCCCH. If PCCCH is not configured, the PS message is transmitted on PCH.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 25 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The CS paging message is sent on PCH. When a call arrives at the MSC that serves the MS, the MSC determines the location area of the MS and then sends the paging message to all BSCs in this location area. The BSCs determine the paging cell based on the location area and determine the paging group that the MS belongs to based on the IMSI. Then, the BSC sends the paging message to the corresponding BTS. The BTS then sends the paging message to the MS on the assigned PCH. Huawei GBSS supports the following three standard paging modes:
Common paging mode The paging message is transmitted on only the configured PCH and the IMSI defined channel.
Complete paging mode When an MS group is informed in this mode, the paging message of this group may be transmitted on any PCH of the same timeslot. When dynamic change of PCH configuration occurs, this mode prevents paging message loss.
Spaced paging mode The BSS adds the paging message of a group to another paging channel to avoid temporary overload. That is, the MS receiving common paging messages on channel N can get the paging message on the next paging channel N+2. Huawei GBSS supports paging message queuing, paging retransmission, simultaneous processing of multiple pages, and paging flow control. This can effectively improve and ensure the paging capacity of the BSC.
Paging message queuing The transmission of paging messages on the Um interface is limited on the basis of paging groups. The paging message of one paging group can only be transmitted on the paging block corresponding to the paging group. Therefore, the paging message queuing is implemented on the BTS. That is, during the period when the BTS waits for transmission, the paging messages from the BSC are buffered on the BTS. Upon the transmission, the BTS selects the appropriate paging messages from the queue to transmit on the corresponding block. If many paging messages have the same transmission priority, the BTS processes these messages according to the FIFO principle.
Paging retransmission Generally, both the CN and BSS of the GSM network allows paging retransmission. A two-level retransmission mechanism is provided. One retransmission is initiated by the CN to handle long intermittence during the paging transmission. The retransmission initiated by the CN takes a relatively long time. The other retransmission is implemented on the BTS. The retransmission initiated by the BTS takes a relatively short time. Hence, the two-level retransmission mechanism reduces the signaling load on the Abis interface and A interface. Huawei BSS supports the paging retransmission. That is, when there is no paging message or immediate assignment message to be transmitted on the corresponding sending block, the paging messages that are already transmitted are retransmitted on this sending block. The maximum number of paging retransmissions can be specified by the system parameter.
Simultaneous processing of multiple paging messages Each paging command from the BSC comprises only one paging message sent to one MS, but each paging request on the Um interface may pack a maximum of four paging messages sent to four different MSs. Therefore, to improve the efficiency of the paging processing, the number of paging commands to the MS included in the paging message on the Um interface should be as many as that is specified. In detail, a maximum of four paging messages can be included. When the sending block of a paging group is polled, the BTS searches for the paging messages to be transmitted in the paging queue
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 26 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description corresponding to the paging group. Then, based on the maximum combination principle, the BTS packs these paging messages or several of the paging messages as appropriate type of paging request on the Um interface. The paging request is then sent on the sending block to the MSs. In this way, the paging commands of multiple MSs can be transmitted on the Um interface.
Paging flow control When the paging flow from the MSC exceeds the processing capability of the BSS, the BSS initiate the selective flow control based on the current network situation to ensure the robustness and proper operation of the system, the high efficiency of the paging capacity, and the smoothness and stability of services.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.3.4 GBFD-0304 Authentication

Availability
Summary
Authentication is an identity verification procedure. With the authentication, only legal subscribers can access the network.
Benefits
Authentication is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This feature ensures that only the legal subscriber can access the network, thereby providing guarantee to the security of the network and services.
Description
Authentication is a procedure in which the GSM network verifies the validity of the identity of an MS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 27 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The purpose of authentication is to prevent unauthorized subscribers from accessing the network and to protect the private information of authorized subscribers. The network initiates the authentication procedure in the following situations:

The MS requests to change the information in VLR or HLR. Service access such as MOC, MTC, MS activation or deactivation, or supplementary services is required. Initial network access is required after MSC/VLR reboot The ciphering key Kc sequence is mismatched. The network needs to determine whether the identity provided by the MS is accessible to network. Parameters for the MS to calculate new ciphering key is required.
The authentication procedure is always initiated and controlled by the network. After the RR connection between the MSC and the BSS is established, the network can decide whether to initiate the authentication procedure to verify the subscriber's identity. The BSS is mainly responsible for the RR connection establishment and the transparent transmission between the MSC and the MS. When the network determines to initiate the authentication procedure, the MSC/VLR sends the MS an Authentication Request message to trigger the authentication procedure. The MS responds to this request with an Authentication Response message and reports the calculated result to the CN for approval for the authentication. Authentication strengthens the network identification of subscribers and ensures their security.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the CN.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 28 of 368
1.4 Cell Selection

1.4.1 GBFD-0401 Basic Cell Selection
Availability
Summary
When the MS is powered on or moves from blind spot to coverage area, the MS searches for all frequencies that the PLMN allows and selects a proper cell to camp on. This procedure is called cell selection.
Benefits
This feature facilitates the automatic selection of the network on the MS and avoids the complexity of manual operations.
Description
The cell selection involves two situations:
The MS does not store any information about the BCCH carrier. The MS sets a search frequency band first. When the MS is tuned to the frequency with the highest level, it decides whether this frequency is the BCCH carrier. If it is the BCCH carrier, the MS tries to decode the SCH to synchronize with this frequency and read the BCCH system broadcast messages. The MS camps on this cell if the MS can decode the BCCH data correctly and confirms that this cell belongs to the selected PLMN, parameter C1 exceeds 0, and the access to this cell is not denied. Otherwise, the MS is tuned to the frequency with the second highest level and repeats the decoding and data verification procedures until the MS finds the available cell.
The MS stores the information about the BCCH frequency. The MS searches for the stored BCCH frequency first. If the MS can decode the BCCH data of the cell but cannot camp on this cell, it checks the BA (BCCH) list. If none of the BCCH frequency in the list is suitable, the MS initiates the cell selection procedure without the BCCH message mentioned earlier. Whether an MS can select a cell to camp on is also influenced by the following factors: Two parameters in system information 1 Cell bar access (CBA): It indicates whether a cell allows access of an MS. Cell bar access is a one-bit code: V alue 0 indicates that the access is allowed, and value 1 indicates that the access is not allowed. This parameter does not influence the access of MSs that are handed over to the cell. Access control (AC): It can be graded from level 0 to level 9 and from level 11 to level 15. Usually each GSM subscriber has an access level and each level is represented by one bit: V alue 1 indicates that the current cell does not allow the access of the MS with the corresponding level value. Otherwise, the access is allowed. Subscribers with level 11 to level 15 have higher priority over subscribers with level 0 to level 9 in access, but there is no priority difference within level 11 to level 15 or within level 0 to level 9. The minimum receive level allowed in system information 3:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 29 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: It is the signal level threshold represented by a 6-bit code. The range 0 to 63 corresponds to the level value range 110 dBm to 47 dBm. Access parameter CBQ in system information 4 Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ): It is a one-bit code. CBQ and CBA together indicate the priority status of the cell. For details, see the following table: CBQ 0 0 1 1 CBA 0 1 0 1 Priority Status of Cell Selection Normal Barred Low Low Cell Reselection Status Normal Barred Normal Normal
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.4.2 GBFD-0402 Basic Cell Re-selection

Availability
Summary
The MS in idle mode reselects the cell based on the trigger condition to find a cell that can provide better services. This procedure is called cell reselection.
Benefits
The MS is always bound to a relatively good cell to obtain better service quality.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 30 of 368
Description
The MS in idle mode periodically measures the receive level of the downlink BCCH carrier of the serving cell and that of all downlink BCCH carrier in the BA list indicated by the BCCH system information. Based on the corresponding algorithm, the MS then calculates the C2 value and determines whether to select a new serving cell. The MS periodically reselect cells based on the cell reselection algorithm. In this way, the MS can find a cell that can provide better service. This feature enables the MS to bind to a relatively good cell to obtain better service quality. The cell reselection of the MS is based on the BA list provided in the system broadcast information about the serving cell. The GSM network has two BA lists. One is transmitted in the system information on the BCCH, used for cell selection and reselection of MSs in idle mode. The other is transmitted in the system information on the SACCH, used to inform the MS about which BCCH carrier is used for handover monitoring in dedicate mode. The MS triggers the cell reselection procedure in any one of the following situations (if the C2 algorithm is not activated, C2 = C1):

The C2 value of a cell (belonging to the same location area as the current cell) exceeds the C2 value of the current cell for five consecutive seconds. The C1 value of a cell (belonging to a location area different from that of the current cell) exceeds the sum of the C2 value of the current serving cell and cell selection hysteresis value for five consecutive seconds. The current serving cell is barred. The MS detects a downlink failure. The C1 value of the serving cell is less than 0 for five consecutive seconds. The access attempt fails after the number of retransmissions exceeds the maximum during the random access of the MS.
The following parameter in system information 4 determines whether to activate the C2 calculation: PI (Cell Reselect Parameters Indication) indicates whether the MS uses C2 as cell reselection parameter and whether the parameters related to the C2 formula exist. It is a one-bit code: 0 indicates that the MS uses C1 as the cell reselection parameter instead of C2; 1 indicates that the MS uses C2 retrieved from the system information as the cell reselection parameter.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 31 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None.
1.5 Call Control

1.5.1 GBFD-0501 Call Control
Availability
Summary
Through the call control procedure, the BSS provides required radio resources and terrestrial circuit to the call so that the CN can complete the call connection procedure.
Benefits
Call control is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports MOC, MTC, and emergency call. Through resource management algorithms and control functions, the BSC provides the transmission channel for the call control signaling between the MS and the MSC by establishing the RR connection. In the call control, the BSS handles the call requests by priorities. For example, the emergency call takes precedence over common calls, and thus the BSS preferentially allocate the required resources to the emergency call. For the BSC, the call control mainly involves the radio channel allocation, A interface resource allocation with the coordination of MSC, and TCH release. The following call procedures are supported:

MOC MTC Emergency call MS-originated call release Network-originated call release
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 32 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.5.2 GBFD-0502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment

Availability
Summary
Immediate assignment and assignment are two important procedures during the call setup. Through the immediate assignment procedure, the MS can establish the RR connection with the network. Through the assignment procedure, the network assigns the TCH to the MS. In this way, a stable service connection is established between the network and the MS.
Benefits
Immediate assignment and assignment are basic features for the operators to provide the CS speech services. Excellent immediate assignment and assignment algorithms ensure relatively high KPIs, and thus improves the radio network performance.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports the immediate assignment procedure, immediate assignment combination, and corresponding assignment procedure specified in GSM specifications. The purpose of the immediate assignment is to establish the RR connection between the MS and the network. Through the assignment procedure, the BSS assigns the TCH to the MS. The assignment is classified into early assignment for MOC, late assignment for MOC, very early assignment for MOC, early assignment for MTC, late assignment for MTC, and very early assignment for MTC.
Immediate assignment The immediate assignment procedure is initiated every time the MS responds to the paging request or the MS initiates a service request. The purpose of the immediate assignment is to establish the RR connection between the MS and the network. In the immediate assignment procedure, the MS sends a CHANNEL REQUEST message on the random access channel (RACH). The network then responds with an IMMEDIA TE ASSIGNMENT message to instruct the MS to access the network through the dedicated channel. This channel can be a stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH) or a TCH. Huawei BSC supports cell-level SDCCH immediate assignment and TCH immediate assignment. Immediate assignment combination Each immediate assignment from the BSC on the Abis interface includes the response for only one MS's channel request message. The response messages for channel request on the Um interface, however, are of three types: immediate assignment, immediate assignment extended and immediate assignment reject. One immediate assignment extended may include the responses for two immediate assignment messages and one immediate assignment reject may include the immediate assignment commands (reject
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 33 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description type) for a maximum of four MSs. To improve the processing efficiency on the Um interface, the BTS encapsulates as many immediate assignment commands as possible into one immediate assignment extended message or immediate assignment reject message on the Um interface and sends it to the MS. This type of processing method is called immediate assignment combination.
Early assignment for MOC Early assignment for MOC is a procedure in which the MOC is assigned a TCH before the call is established. After the immediate assignment is complete, the network sends the assignment command to the MS, requesting the calling party to seize the TCH even if the Altering message is not received. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the network.
Late assignment for MOC In terms of signaling, the network sends the assignment command to the MS only after the Alerting message from the called party is received, requesting the calling party to seize the TCH. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the MS because no TCH is available before the connection is established.
Very early assignment for MOC The very early assignment for MOC is a procedure in which the TCH instead of the SDCCH is assigned to the calling party during the immediate assignment phase. This function increases the service access speed. The system performs the authentication, ciphering, other signaling exchanges, and subsequent call connection procedures on the TCH. After receiving the ASS REQ message from the network, the BSS changes the TCH used for signaling exchanges to a real TCH through the Mode Modify command. Early assignment for MTC Early assignment for MTC is a procedure in which the MTC is assigned a TCH before the call is established. In terms of signaling, the MTC establishment is triggered when the Paging Request message from the network is received. After the immediate assignment is complete, the network sends the assignment command to the MS, requesting the called party to seize the TCH even if the Altering message is not received. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the network.
Late assignment for MTC In terms of signaling, the network sends the assignment command to the MS only after the Alerting message is received, requesting the called party to seize the TCH. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the MS because no TCH is available before the connection is established.
Very early assignment for MTC The very early assignment for MTC is a procedure in which the TCH instead of the SDCCH is assigned to the called party during the immediate assignment phase. This function increases the service access speed. The system performs the authentication, ciphering, other signaling exchanges, and subsequent call connection procedures on the TCH. After receiving the ASS REQ message from the network, the BSS modifies the TCH used for signaling exchanges to a real TCH through the Mode Modify command.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 34 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.5.3 GBFD-0503 Call Reestablishment

Availability
Summary
When the MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment procedure can be used to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can proceed.
Benefits
The call is reestablished quickly after a call drop caused by the radio link failure. This mechanism shortens the call intermission, and thus enhances the user experience.
Description
Call reestablishment is a procedure for connection recovery after the MS encounters a radio link failure during the call. Call reestablishment may occur in a new cell or new location area. The initiation of the call reestablishment attempt depends on the call status and whether the cell allows call reestablishment. After detecting a radio link failure, the BTS sends a radio link failure message to the BSC. The BSC then releases the corresponding radio resource and waits for the MS to initiate the call reestablishment. After detecting a radio link failure, the MS sends a Channel Request message (the request cause is call reestablishment) in the selected cell (the original cell or a new cell) to the BSS. The BSS then initiates and completes the immediate assignment procedure. After the immediate assignment is complete, the MS sends a call reestablishment request to the MSC. The MSC initiates the encryption and assignment procedures. The call establishment is almost complete. The MSC sends a status query message to the MS to confirm whether the call status or attached status matches the status information stored on the MSC. The MS sends the MSC a status message to report the call status or attached status. The call reestablishment is complete. During the call reestablishment, the MS cannot return to idle mode. Therefore, when the MS selects a cell in a different location area as the target cell for call reestablishment, the location updating procedure cannot be performed until this call ends.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 35 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The MSC controls the call reestablishment procedure. The BSC is responsible for the channel establishment and layer 3 message forwarding. Other processing is not required.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.6 Handover
1.6.1 GBFD-0601 Basic Handover
Availability
Summary
As a method of radio link control, handover enables the MS in movement to maintain the ongoing call. In addition, the handover can optimize the overall performance of the system through the adjustment of traffic volume of the cells. The basic handover algorithms involve the algorithms for the following handover types: edge handover, timing advance (TA) handover, bad quality (BQ) handover, and interference handover.
Benefits
The GSM system adopts TDMA to use the frequency resources optimally. In addition, the cell coverage area is limited. Therefore, the handover is necessary to ensure the call continuity. In addition, the cell coverage range and electromagnetic property varies with distance, handover becomes an important method to improve the voice quality. Handover is also a key index to evaluate the quality of the operators' network. V arious handovers can improve the network quality and reliability in various aspects.

The edge handover and TA handover ensure the call continuity of the MS in movement. The BQ handover and interference handover help improve the voice quality.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 36 of 368
Description
The GSM network is composed of a number of cells that provide continuous coverage. The handover technique enables the MSs in movement to maintain the ongoing calls in the coverage area. The network elements (NEs) involved in the handover are MS, BSS, MSC, and so on. In the handover, the MS engaged in a call and the BTS in service measure the radio link. The measurement results of the uplink and downlink are packed into measurement reports (MRs), and then sent to the BSC. Based on the MR and the actual radio network situations, the BSC uses the handover decision algorithms to determine whether to initiate the handover and what type of handover should be used. The GSM handover algorithm involves the following phases: measurement and MR reporting, MR processing, handover decision, and handover execution. Based on the cell homing relation before and after the handover, the handover is classified into the following types: intra-BSC handover, inter-BSC intra-MSC handover, and inter-MSC handover. The intra-BSC handover is completed by the BSC. After the intra-BSC handover, the BSC reports the handover complete command to the MSC. The two types of inter-BSC handover require the participation of the MSC. The BSC also supports the forced handover for an MS in a cell through the local maintenance terminal (LMT). Based on the triggering conditions, the handover decision algorithms involve the following handover types: TA handover, edge handover, BQ handover, and interference handover. TA handover: The timing advance to some extent can be used as a standard to limit the cell coverage. The BSC determines whether the TA value of the current MS exceeds the upper timing advance limit (TALIM). If the upper TALIM is exceeded, the BSC initiates an emergency handover with high TA value as the cause. The TA value ranges from 0 to 63. The step length of each bit is 553.5 m. The TA value 63 corresponds to a distance of 35 km. If the serving cell meets the conditions to trigger the TA emergency handover, the cell is punished after the handover is complete to avoid this MS being handed over to this cell again due to other reasons. The TA handover algorithm has been optimized to meet the special needs of the extended cells. Edge handover: Edge handover is a type of rescue handover based on signal level. To trigger an edge handover, the receive level of the target cell should be at least one hysteresis value (hysteresis of inter-cell handover) greater than the receive level of the serving cell. Triggering condition of edge handover: When the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the edge handover threshold and the P/N criterion is satisfied within a period of measurement time, the edge handover is triggered for the MS to maintain proper communication quality. BQ handover: The transmission quality of the link is measured in bit error ratio (BER). The BSC measures the quality of a radio link based on the quality level in the measurement report (MR). There are eight quality levels ranging from 0 to 7. Level 0 is the best and level 7 is the worst. High quality level may be resulted from low signal power or channel interference. When the receive quality is lower than the BQ handover threshold, the network starts the handover algorithm for the MS to maintain proper communication quality. This procedure is called BQ handover. If the serving cell meets the conditions to trigger the BQ handover, the cell is punished after the handover completes to avoid this MS being handed over to this cell again due to other reasons. Interference handover: When the receive level of the serving cell is good, the network initiates the interference handover for the MS to maintain proper communication quality if the receive quality deteriorates to a certain degree. If interference handover is triggered, the quality of the channels in the serving cell is slightly affected. Conversations, however, can be maintained. At the same time, the receive level of the serving cell is relatively high and other channels in the serving cell may be affected slightly. Therefore, the intra-cell handover is recommended.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 37 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.6.2 GBFD-0602 PBGT Handover

Availability
Summary
In a power budget handover (PBGT), the neighboring cell that maintains the lowest path loss within a certain period is selected. This enables the subscriber to accept services in a better cell and thus improves the quality of the network.
Benefits
This feature enables the MS to select and camp on a cell with better signal quality and experience better voice quality. The detailed benefits area as follows:

The cell providing better quality carries more traffic, which facilitates more flexible traffic guiding and control. The MS is always served by a cell with better quality, and thus experiences the best service quality. This feature effectively solves the crossed coverage problem.
Description
PBGT handover is also referred to as better cell handover. The PBGT handover is based on the path loss. In PBGT handover, the system performs searches in real time for a cell with less path loss and in compliance with the system requirements. Then, the system determines whether a handover is required. Compared with other handover algorithms, the greatest difference lies in that the PBGT handover is triggered based on path loss instead of receive level.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 38 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Triggering condition of PBGT handover: The path loss of the adjacent cell is smaller than that of the serving cell by a certain threshold and the P/N criterion is satisfied within a period of measurement time. The P/N criterion is satisfied if the filtered path loss of the target cell within a period of PBGT Valid Time(s) is smaller than the path loss of the serving cell for a period of PBGT Watch Time(s). In Huawei hierarchical handover algorithm, handovers between cells at the same layer but different hierarchies is allowed. To prevent ping-pong handovers between the PBGT handover and the hierarchical handover, the PBGT handover can be performed only between cells of the same layer and same hierarchy. Therefore, the PBGT handover cannot be performed between cells of different layers or different hierarchy.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.6.3 GBFD-0603 Signal Level Rapid Fall Handover

Availability
Summary
Signal level rapid fall handover algorithm is sensitive to the signal level change. This handover can effectively reduce the call drops caused by the rapid change of signal level.
Benefits
In the case of special landforms such as corner of wall and concave ground or special situations such as faulty BTS power amplifier, quick handover is performed to prevent call drop when the level drops rapidly.
Description
Quick responses should be made for rapid drop in the signal level. The mean value filtering and P/N decision methods are used in edge handover and PBGT handover, and therefore the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 39 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description measurement time and decision time is prolonged. Accordingly, these handovers are not sensitive to short-period rapid level drop. Therefore, concerning the rapid level drop, you can perform finite impact response (FIR) filtering on the original receive level signals. This filtering method is responsive to the rapid level drop based on the drop slope of the original receive level signals. When the signal level rapid fall handover is triggered, the selected target cell should have the highest priority based on the ranking in the preprocessing. If the candidate GSM cells do not meet the handover conditions and there are 3G neighboring cells available for use, the inter-RA T handover is performed if allowed. Otherwise, the emergency handover of other types is performed.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.6.4 GBFD-0604 Load Handover

Availability
Summary
Load handover can balance the load of different cells effectively by directing some traffic of a cell with high traffic load to an adjacent cell with relatively low traffic load.
Benefits

Load handover can effectively balance the traffic volume of different cells, thereby reducing the cell congestion. Load handover can effectively solve the congestion problems in hot spot area.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 40 of 368
Description
In the network, the traffic in certain cells is heavy, but the traffic in the overlapped upper-layer cells and the neighboring cells is light. To balance the traffic of these cells, the load handover should be adopted. The purpose of the load handover is to direct part of the traffic in the heavily loaded cell to less loaded cells and prevent the traffic of the neighboring cells from being directed to this cell. To determine whether a cell is of heavy load or light load, compare the traffic load of each cell with a predefined threshold. If the traffic volume of a cell is greater than Load HO Threshold (%) , you can infer that the traffic load of this cell is heavy and the load handover algorithm needs to be enabled. If the traffic volume of a cell is smaller than Load Req. on Candidate Cell (%), you can infer that the traffic load of this cell is light and the cell can receive traffic from the heavily loaded cells. To prevent all the calls in a cell from initiating the load handover after the load of the cell reaches the load handover threshold, the system controls the load handover bandwidth to control the handover. The load handover is allowed only when the receive leve l of the MS in the serving cell falls in the range of the load handover band. The purpose of the algorithm is to prevent too many handovers from being performed simultaneously. The load handover is implemented step by step. That is, the handover band is divided into multiple step lengths. The MSs in each step length are handed over to neighboring cells in the ascending order of the steps. The load handover stops when the traffic load of the serving cell decreases or the traffic load of the neighboring cells increases to a certain degree.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.6.5 GBFD-0605 Layered and Hierarchical Handover

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 41 of 368
Summary
In a layered and hierarchical network, layered and hierarchical handover implemented between layers or hierarchies ensures the proper traffic distribution between different frequency bands.
Benefits

Based on the layered and hierarchical network, this feature can help achieve proper traffic distribution, thus meeting the requirements of various networking modes. Based on the GSM900/DCS1800 dual-band network, this feature helps achieve proper traffic distribution between different frequency bands, thereby solving the problem of insufficient frequency resources.
Description
The radio coverage in an area can be divided into four layers: The highest layer is composed of umbrella GSM900 cells. These cells provide the wide coverage and enable the connection continuity of fast moving MSs. The third layer is composed of GSM900 macro cells. These are the most widely used cells of the current system. Most of the MSs camp on this layer. The next layer is composed of DCS1800 micro cells with smaller coverage. The DCS1800 cell is also the target cell for capacity expansion aiming at solving the problem of insufficient frequency resources. The bottom layer is composed of DCS1800 pico cells, aiming at meeting the requirements of the coverage in the hot spot or the blind spot. The cell at the lower layer has a higher priority over the cell at the higher layer. The inter-layer handover is performed between only the cells at different layers or the same layer but different hierarchies. The inter-layer handover is not performed between cells at the same layer and the same hierarchy. If the following situations occur in a layered and hierarchical network: A cell with higher priority exists. The cell meets the conditions to trigger the layered and hierarchical handover. That is, the signal level of a neighboring cell is higher than the sum of inter-layer handover threshold and hysteresis. The P/N criterion is satisfied. That is, within period P, the conditions to trigger the handover are met for period N. Then, the call is handed over to this cell with higher priority even if the serving cell can provide good services. The purpose of layered and hierarchical handover is to direct the traffic to the cell with higher priority so that the traffic can be distributed more reasonably. During the call, the layered and hierarchical handover flexibly adjusts the traffic distribution between different network layers to suite the needs of various networking modes. This feature should be used together with layered and hierarchical cells.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 42 of 368
Dependency
1.6.6 GBFD-0606 Speed-sensitive Handover

Availability
Summary
In speed-sensitive handover, the fast moving MS in the micro cell is handed over to a macro cell. The speed-sensitive handover is performed to minimize the number of handovers and hence reduce the call drop rate in the network.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the number of handovers of the fast moving MS, reduce the call drop rate, enhance the user experience, and improve the network KPI.
Description
The network determines whether the MS is moving fast based on a certain algorithm. If the MS is moving fast relative to the micro cell, the MS is handed over to the macro cell. After the fast moving MS is handed over from the micro cell to the macro cell, the penalty should be applied to all neighboring micro cells to prevent the ping-pong handover. The selected target cell of the handover should meet the following conditions : The signal level is greater than the sum of Inter-layer HO Threshold and Inter-layer HO Hysteresis; the priority is higher than that of the serving cell. By determining the fast moving MS and handovers, this feature enables the fast moving MS to camp on the macro cell, thus minimizing handovers and call drops, and improving the QoS and the network quality.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 43 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature should be used together with GBFD-0605 Layered and Hierarchical Handover. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.6.7 GBFD-0607 Directed Retry

Availability
Summary
Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the BSC initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is available or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell.
Benefits

This feature helps reduce the call access failure due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, and hence increases the access success rate. This feature can balance the traffic load between different cells, and hence avoids the traffic load imbalance among cells.
Description
When the MS initiates a call, the BSC determines the assignment procedure that is to be used according to the load of the current cell if the BSC receives an ASSIGN REQ message from the MSC. There are three assignment procedures: normal assignment procedure, mode modification procedure, and directed retry procedure. If the load of the cell is so high that the cell does not admit a new service or that a newly admitted service will affect the existing services, the BSC determines to perform a directed retry. The directed retry procedure is as follows: The BSC sends a CHAN ACTIV message to the target cell. After receiving a CHAN ACTIV ACK message, the BSC requests circuit service resources. After the requested resources are allocated successfully, the BSC sends an HO CMD to the MS through the originating cell. The MS sends an HO ACC message in the target cell to attempt to access the network. The BTS sends an HO DETECT message to notify the BSC of the request and sends the PHY INFO message to the MS. The MS accesses the network through the FIRST SABM frame. Then, the BTS sends an EST IND message and a UA frame to the MS for acknowledgment.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 44 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The MS sends an HO CMP message to the BSC through the target cell. Then, the BSC sends an ASS CMP message to the MSC to process signaling in other assignment procedures. The mobile originated procedure is complete. Based on the homing BSC and MSC of the serving cell and target cell, the directed retry can be classified into these types: intra-BSC directed retry, inter-BSC directed retry, and inter-MSC directed retry. The directed retry helps reduce the call access failures due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, increase the access success rate, and improve the network quality.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.6.8 GBFD-0608 SDCCH Handover

Availability
Summary
SDCCH handover refers to the handover from one SDCCH to another SDCCH in the immediate assignment procedure.
Benefits
This feature helps improve the access success rate of MSs on the edge of the network.
Description
The SDCCH handover refers to the handover from one SDCCH to another SDCCH. This feature helps improve the access success rate of MSs on the edge of the network, thus improving the network quality. The handover decision in SDCCH status is the same as that in TCH status. That is, the TA handover, interference handover, BQ handover, signal level rapid fall handover, and edge handover are allowed, and the load handover, PBGT handover, concentric handover, and
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 45 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description AMR handover are not allowed. In addition, the parameter used for handover decision in SDCCH status is the same as that used for handover decision in TCH status. Generally, the seizure time of the SDCCH is short, and thus the SDCCH handover seldom occurs. To prevent unnecessary handover due to inaccurate MR in the initial phase of call setup, the minimum time to start the SDCCH handover can be configured to control the handover rate of the signaling channel.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.7 Power Control

1.7.1 GBFD-0703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
Availability
Summary
Huawei enhanced power control algorithm is designed on the basis of Huawei network optimization experiences. The enhanced power control algorithm has the following characteristics: MR compensation, prediction filtering, dual-threshold power control algorithm, variable step power control, adaptive power control, bad quality signal strength upper threshold adjustment, and separate configuration for the uplink and downlink power control steps. With all these characteristics, this feature improves the accuracy of the power control and also ensures the stability and efficiency of the algorithm.
Benefits

Improves the effectiveness and accuracy of the power control. Reduces the interference in the network.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 46 of 368

Reduces the power consumption of the MS and BTS. Increases the effective capacity of the network. Improves the network operation quality.
Description
Power control is an important method for radio link control. The system decides whether the transmit power of the MS and the BTS should be adjusted, based on the expected values of the system parameters and MRs concerning uplink/downlink receive level and signal quality received from the BTS. Power control on the radio link is aimed at reducing the transmit power without sacrificing the transmit quality. In this way, power control is implemented while the quality of the radio links is maintained. When the transmit power levels of the MS or BTS are minimized, interference to other channels is reduc ed.
Power control procedure The power control procedure involves MR preprocessing, power control decision, and power control implementation. Key technologies MR compensation: The level in the MR is compensated to a level corresponding to the current transmit power. In power control decision, the power control module extracts several receive level values and receive quality values from history MRs. These MRs may be obtained under different transmit power. Therefore, in order to ensure the accuracy of the receive level, the receive level values from the history MRs must be compensated if the transmit power in these MRs changes. Filter these MRs after interpolation and compensation so that the power control decision is more effective. Prediction filtering: There is an interval between power control decision and power adjustment. Thus, the MR on which the power control decision is based does not accurately reflect the radio environment when power adjustment occurs, but misses the latest changes of receive level and receive quality. Therefore, there is a delay for power adjustment. Prediction filtering enables the MR on which the power control decision is based to accurately reflect the radio environment when power adjustment occurs. Thus, the delay for power adjustment can be minimized. The principle of prediction filtering is that the variation of receive level and receive quality maintains continuity in a short period of time. Sample the preceding N MRs, and perform weighted filtering, and then predict the subsequent zero to three MRs. Generally, the interval between power control decision and power adjustment is three MRs (about 1.5s). Thus, prediction filtering can ensure the accuracy of prediction. Power control decision is implemented by filtering the predicted MRs along with the interpolated MRs and compensated history MRs. Dual-threshold power control algorithm: The receive level can be within the scope of the dual-threshold. The effect of both level and quality on power control is considered. This improves the system flexibility and prevents the oscillation. Variable step power control: This technology helps achieve quick and accurate power adjustment. When the level or the quality is far from the expected value, large step of the power is adopted for power adjustment. When the level or the quality is close to the expected value, small step of the power is adopted for power adjustment. Adaptive power control: This technology changes the power control strategy based on the communication environment, making the power control effective and stable. This is reflected in the following aspects: automatically changing the maximum variable step of the power control based on the communication environment and adopting corresponding power control strategy based on the communication environment. Bad quality signal strength upper threshold adjustment: When the receive quality is good, decrease the value of upper threshold of the uplink (downlink) level to reduce the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 47 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description transmit power of the MS (BTS). When the receive quality is poor, increase the value of upper threshold of the uplink (downlink) level to improve the voice quality. Separate configuration for the uplink and downlink power control steps: This method facilitates the flexible and rapid power control based on the actual situation of the network. When the uplink (downlink) signal quality or the receive quality degrades abruptly, the power can be adjusted upward quickly to prevent call drop.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.8 Measurement Report

1.8.1 GBFD-0801 Processing of Measurement Report
Availability
Summary
The measurement result in the MR is an important reference for the power control and handover decision. The MR processing mainly involves decoding the MR to obtain the measurement result.
Benefits
The MR includes information required by various BSS algorithms such as the frequencies, signal strength, and TA value. The MR is the precondition of power control and handover. The network can provide high performance only when the MR is supported.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 48 of 368
Description
The MR processing is used to report the measurement results and parameters to the BSC for handover decision and power control. The MR is classified into uplink MR and downlink MR.
Uplink MR The uplink MR includes mainly the measurement information about the uplink receive level and receive quality measured on the TRX.
Downlink MR The downlink MR includes downlink receive level and downlink receive quality of the serving cell, and downlink receive level of the neighboring cell measured by the MS. The downlink measurement result is reported to the BTS by the MS through the Measurement Report message. The BTS periodically reports the measurement results of the uplink and downlink to the BSC through the Measurement Report message. The interval of MR reporting is consistent with the SACCH multi-frame cycle. In certain situations, the BTS cannot receive the downlink measurement result from the MS. In such cases, the Measurement Report message includes only the uplink measurement result. After receiving the MR, the BSC performs interpolation and filtering on the measurement result of the uplink and downlink. Then, the BSC saves the result after processing for the power control and handover decision.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.8.2 GBFD-0802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 49 of 368
Summary
Pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to perform part of the MR processing work that the BSC is responsible for, such as interpolation and filtering performed for the measurement result of the uplink and downlink. After processing, the BTS sends the processed measurement result to the BSC. This reduces the processing load of the BSC.
Benefits
This feature reduces the signaling flow on the Abis interface, and thus reduces the possibility of transmission congestion on the Abis interface. This feature helps reduce the CPU load of the board for signaling processing of the speech services.
Description
This feature enables the BTS to perform part of the MR pre-processing work that BSC is responsible for, such as interpolation and filtering. After being processed by the BTS, the measurement result is reported to the BSC through the Pre-Processed Measurement Report message. This feature can be enabled or disabled through the configuration of related parameters. In addition, the period to report the preprocessed MR is also configurable. BTS preprocessing of the MR can reduce the signaling flow on the Abis interface and improve the multiplexing efficiency of the signaling channel.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None.
1.9 Adjustment of the Timing Advance Value

1.9.1 GBFD-0901 Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance
Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 50 of 368
Summary
The BTS informs the MS of the timing advance (TA) value by adopting adaptive rules so that the communication between the BTS and the MS is synchronized without being affected by the distance.
Benefits
This feature is the basis for services between the MS and the BTS such as synchronization and calls. The synchronization of the network can be achieved only after this feature is adopted. Without this feature, all services will not be processed normally.
Description
There should be an interval of three timeslots between the sending signals and receiving signals of the MS, because the MS sends and receives signals with one frequency synthesizer. When receiving signals, the MS shifts 45 MHz relative to the receive frequency and transmits on a timeslot of which the timeslot number is three plus the TA value. Therefore, the TA value sent from the BTS to the MS is essential. This ensures that the data from MSs at different distances from the BTS arrives at the BTS in sequence, thus reducing the interference of the entire network. When the MS engaged in a call approaches the BTS or moves away from the BTS, the information that is sent on a timeslot by the MS to the BTS overlaps with the information regarding another call received on the next timeslot. In this case, interference is generated. Therefore, when a call is ongoing, the BTS monitors the arrival of calls and sends commands to the MS in the system information on the downlink SACCH. In the commands, the BTS informs the MS of the time to be advanced so that the data sent by the MS can arrive at the BTS timely. The time is referred to as TA. The TA value ranges from 0 us to 233 us (including 0 us and 233 us). The value affects the coverage range of the cell. With this feature, the MS TA offset maintains an accuracy of +1/-1 symbol periods.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 51 of 368
1.10 Radio Resource Management

1.10.1 GBFD-1001 TRX Management
Availability
Summary
TRX management involves four procedures about the TRX to support the signaling flow on the control plane of layer 3
Benefits
TRX management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This feature enables the management of the error reporting, flow control, and radio resources of the TRX such as SACCH resources. In Huawei GBSS, this feature can be implemented completely on the BSC. Thus, the management operations on the BTS are prevented, operation and maintenance (O&M) is simplified, O&M expenditure is reduced, and thereby O&M efficiency is improved.
Description
To enable the Abis interface to support the signaling flow on the control plane of layer 3 specified by 3GPP TS 44.018/3GPP TS 24.008, a set of TRX-level service management procedures are provided. This set of procedures is referred to as TRX management. Procedures involved in the TRX management are all completed on the BTS or BSC without being directed to the core network elements. The procedures are as follows:
SACCH filling information modification procedure The BSC informs the BTS of the new system information used on all downlink SACCHs so that the BTS can instruct the MS to initiate the system information updating procedure. Radio resource indication procedure The BTS informs the BSC of the interference level on the idle dedicated channels of each TRX. Thus, the BSC is completely informed of the interference level of the current idle channels to facilitate subsequent channel assignment. Flow control procedure The frame unit controller (FUC) on a TRX informs the BSC of the TRX overload due to CCCH overload, AGCH overload, or TRX processor overload.
Error reporting procedure The BTS informs the BSC of the detected downlink errors that cannot be reported by other procedures.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 52 of 368
Dependency
1.10.2 GBFD-1002 Radio Link Management

Availability
Summary
Radio link management involves the establishment and release of the radio links, and also the transfer of the layer 3 messages.
Benefits
Radio link management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This feature involves the establishment and release of the radio links, the transfer of the layer 3 messages, and the real-time monitoring of the radio links, and thus facilitates the basic radio link management.
Description
Radio link management is mainly used for the establishment and release of radio links and the message forwarding. This feature manages the data link layer. Through the procedures in the radio link management, the BTS and the BSC can perform channel state management, initial service establishment and service release. The procedures involved in the radio link management are as follows:
Link establishment and release procedures Link establishment indication: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that the multi-frame link has been established. The BSC establishes an SCCP link to the MSC according to this indication procedure. Link establishment request: Through this procedure, the BSC requests to establish a multi-frame link on the radio path. Link release indication: Through this procedure, The BTS informs the BSC that the radio link release initiated by the MS is complete. Link release request: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to release a radio link.
Transparent transmission of layer 3 messages
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 53 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Transmission of a transparent layer 3 message in acknowledged mode: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to forward a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface in acknowledged mode. Reception of a transparent layer 3 message in acknowledged mode: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface is received in acknowledged mode. Transmission of a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to forward a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode. Reception of a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface is received in unacknowledged mode.
Notification and handling of the link fault Link error indication: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC of the errors on the radio link layer.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.10.3 GBFD-1003 Radio Common Channel Management

Availability
Summary
Radio common channel management involves the management of common control channels such as PCH, RACH, AGCH, NCH, PPCH, PRACH, and PAGCH.
Benefits
Radio common channel management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 54 of 368
Description
Common control channels Common control channels include PCH, RACH, AGCH, NCH, PPCH, PRACH, and PAGCH. Paging Channel (PCH): Downlink channel. The MS listens to the PCH at intervals to determine whether there is a call request from the MSC. RACH: Uplink channel. The MS accesses the network through the RACH and requests the network to assign an SDCCH. Access Grant Channel (AGCH): Downlink channel. The network informs the MS of the assigned dedicated channel (SDCCH or TCH) through the AGCH. Notification Channel (NCH): Downlink channel, used for voice group call service (VGCS) and voice broadcast service (VBS). Packet Paging Channel (PPCH): Downlink channel. The MS listens to the PPCH at intervals to determine whether there is a packet call to the MS from the SGSN. Packet Random Access Channel (PRACH): Uplink channel. The MS requests for network access through the PRACH. Packet Access Grant Channel (PAGCH): Downlink channel. The network informs the MS of the assigned packet data service channel through the PAGCH.
Radio common channel management The radio common channel management procedures involve the signaling procedures of MS access and assignment, and also the resource management of the common channel. The involved procedures are as follows: Channel request by MS: This procedure is triggered when the TRX detects the random access request (channel request message) from the MS. Paging: This procedure is used to page an MS on a paging sub-channel. It is used for the MOC and initiated by the MSC through the BSC. The BSC determines the paging group to be used according to the IMSI of the called MS. The values of this paging group are sent to the BTS along with the identity information of the MS. Immediate assignment: When the MS first accesses the BTS, the BSC assigns a dedicated channel for the MS immediately through this procedure. CCCH load indication: The BTS informs the BSC of the load information on a CCCH timeslot. If this load exceeds the load limit predefined in the system, the BTS sends the CCCH overload indication to the BSC periodically. Delete indication: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that one immediate assignment message is deleted without being put in the AGCH queue due to AGCH overload. To do this, the BTS sends a Delete indication message to the BSC. Broadcast information modification: The BSC informs the BTS of the new information to broadcast on the BCCH. To do this, the BSC sends a BCCH information message to the BTS. Short message cell broadcast: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to send the cell broadcast short message. VGCS establishment notification: On receiving the VGCS ASSIG REQ message from the CN, the BSC establishes a VGCS channel immediately or later based on the strategy information in the VGCS ASSIG REQ message. Then, the BSC sends the Notification information to the BTS. The BTS then sends this information to the MS. On receiving this information, the MS responds to the information accordingly.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 55 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS The NCH management depends on the following features: GBFD-10301 Public V oice Group Call Service or GBFD-10302 Public V oice Broadcast Service The PRACH, PAGCH, and PPCH management depends on the following feature: GBFD-9101 Packet Channel Combination Type Dependency on other NEs None.
1.10.4 GBFD-1004 Radio Dedicated Channel Management

Availability
Summary
Radio dedicated channel management involves the assignment, activation, release, management, and reporting of the dedicated channels such as SDCCH, SACCH, and TCH.
Benefits
Radio dedicated channel management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.
Description
Radio dedicated channel management involves the assignment, activation, release, management, and reporting of the dedicated channels such as SDCCH, SACCH, and TCH. The involved procedures are as follows: Channel activation: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to activate a dedicated channel for an MS. After this channel is activated, the BSC assigns this channel to the MS through the Immediate Assign, Assign Command, Additional Assign or Handover Command message. Channel mode modification: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to change the mode of an activated channel.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 56 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Handover detection: This procedure is used to detect the access of the switched MS between the target BTS and the target BSC. Start of encryption: This procedure is used to initiate the encryption procedure specified by GSM TS 04.08. Measurement reporting: This procedure consists of the mandatory basic measurement reporting procedure and the optional measurement reporting procedure with pre-processing. Through these two procedures, the BTS reports to the BSC all the parameters related to handover decision. SACCH deactivation: Through this procedure, the BSC deactivates the related SACCH of a TRX according to the requirement of the channel release procedure specified by GSM TS 04.08. Radio channel release: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to release a radio channel that is not in use. MS power control: Through this procedure, the BSS controls the transmit power of the MS related to an activated channel. The MS power control decision should be implemented on the BSC or BTS. BTS transmit power control: Through this procedure, the BSS controls the transmit power of the activated channel on the TRX. BSS transmit power control should be implemented on the BSC or BTS. Connection failure: Through this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that an activated dedicated channel is disconnected. SACCH information modification: Through this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to change the filling information (system information) on an SACCH. Talker detection: During a VGCS call, on receiving the Talker uplink access from the MS on the idle uplink VGCS channel, the BTS constructs the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message on the activated dedicated channel and reports to the BSC the detected Access delay received from the MS. Listener detection: When there is no listener in the cell, the dedicated radio downlink channel allocated to the VGCS/VBS should be released timely to improve the resource usage. The BSC periodically broadcasts the Uplink free message in the cell. After all the listeners receive this message, a Talker uplink access message is sent to the BTS on the idle uplink VGCS channel. The BTS constructs the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message on the activated dedicated channel and sends a listener detection message to the BSC. The BTS uses this message to inform the BSC of the Access delay detected on the MS.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 57 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Dependency on other features of the GBSS The talker detection feature depends on the following features: GBFD-10301 Public V oice Group Call Service or GBFD-10302 Public V oice Broadcast Service GBFD-10306 Talker Identification The listener detection feature depends on the following features: GBFD-10301 Public V oice Group Call Service or GBFD-10302 Public V oice Broadcast Service GBFD-10304 Late Group Channel Assignment Dependency on other NEs None.
1.10.5 GBFD-1005 Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorithm

Availability
Summary
Enhanced channel assignment algorithm is adopted to allocate the optimum channel based on various factors.
Benefits
By taking into account of various factors, this feature enables the BSS to allocate the optimum channel to each call, and hence ensures better voice quality for subscribers. This feature enables the BSS to provide as many services as possible by using limited channel resources, thus maximizing the service capacity of the network.
Description
Channel assignment priorities: Enhanced channel assignment algorithm is adopted for the selection of an optimum channel. Each channel is assigned a priority level. The channel of lower priority level is less likely to be allocated than the channel of higher priority level. Enhanced channel assignment algorithm provides four types of priority levels: capacity, quality, PS coordination, and management. The four types of priorities work together and form the overall priority of each radio channel. A higher overall priority value indicates a higher priority level and an earlier assignment of the radio resource accordingly. Four factors are considered in determining the priority level. The factors are capacity, quality, PS coordination, and management. The priority level has the following sub-priorities : frequency band, data rate, concentric cell, AMR, interference, seizure record, number of PDCHs, and TRX.
Channel assignment principles Channel assignment based on interference: The channels with less interference should be assigned first except in the following situations: One situation is that for the high priority
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 58 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description calls or subscribers, the MSC should prevent the assignment of channels whose interference exceeds a predefined interference threshold. Another situation is that to improve the call completion rate and voice quality, the calls with better receive level should be assigned relatively high-interference channels and those with worse receive level should be assigned relatively low-interference channels, taken into account the maximum transmit power of the MS and the path loss in a certain call environment. Channel assignment based on channel configuration: Take into account factors such as whether the channel and BCCH belong to the same TRX. Channel assignment based on channel configuration helps reduce the network interference and hence improve the network quality. Channel assignment based on history record: This algorithm has the memory function. The history record consists of the information on successful and failed channel seizures and on the call drops during the seizures. In addition, the BSC needs to determine whether a failed seizure and a call drop during a seizure are caused by radio channel faults. Such history records provide reliable basis for the current channel assignment. Channel assignment based on load balance: This mechanism facilitates the even distribution of channel seizures on different TRXs. This not only reduc es the co-channel and adjacent-channel interference but also prevents the situation wherein a large number of calls are carried on certain TRXs. Channel assignment based on specific calls: Specific calls such as intra-cell handover and concentric cell handover have special channel assignment strategies. The intra-cell handovers are mainly triggered by factors related to channel quality. Thus, the frequency of the TRX that carries the original channel is likely to be interfered. If the original channel is in frequency hopping mode, certain frequencies in the frequency hopping group are likely to be interfered to a great extent. Therefore, a channel of a different TRX or a different frequency hopping group as the original channel should be allocated for the intra-cell handover.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Preferentially allocating channels on BCCH carrier for non-AMR speech services: Generally, in a tight frequency reuse network, loose frequency reuse pattern, such as 4 x 3 mode, is applied to the BCCH carrier; tight frequency reuse pattern, such as 1 x 3 mode, is applied to the TCH carrier. The non-AMR speech (including FR, EFR, and HR) is more sensitive to interference than the AMR speech. Therefore, if the network supports the AMR speech, adhere to the following principles in channel assignment: For MSs that do not support the AMR speech, preferentially allocate the channels on the carriers in loose frequency reuse pattern, such as the BCCH carrier. For MSs that support the AMR speech, allocate the channels on the carriers in tight frequency reuse pattern to improve the overall speech quality in the network.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 59 of 368
1.11 System Information

1.11.1 GBFD-1101 System Information Sending
Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the setting of cell system information through the BSC and also the periodical sending of the system information by the BTS.
Benefits
The system information is a key index used by the operators to adjust the network and control the behavior of the MS. It is also an important method for network optimization.

Proper system information mechanism is essential to a network of high quality. Better understanding of the system information helps improve the network structure and hence provide proper and high quality network.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports the setting of cell system information through the BSC and also the periodical sending of the system information by the BTS. On receiving the system information, the MS adjusts its settings based on the content in the system information. System information contains the primary radio network parameters of the Um interface. The parameters are as follows: network identification parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and network function parameters. Through the received system information, the MS can access the network and make full use of various services provided by the network. Huawei BSS supports 13 system information types: 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 2quater, 3, 4, 5, 5bis, 5ter, 6, 7, and 13. Among them, types 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 2quater, 3, 4, 7, and 13 are broadcast messages transmitted on the BCCH in idle mode. Types 5, 5bis, 5ter, and 6 are associated messages transmitted on the SACCH in connected mode. Among the 13 system information types, 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 3, 4, 5, 5bis, 5ter, and 6 are basic system information messages. Types 7 and 13 are system information transmitted to support the GPRS. Type 2quater is the system information transmitted to support the inter-RA T handover and inter-RA T reselection. System information messages are sent in two different ways: broadcast message and associated message.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 60 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description When the MS is in idle mode, it communicates with the network through the broadcast system information. Through the broadcast system information received from the network, the MS learns its current location and the available service types. Some parameters in the system information can also help control the cell reselection of the MS. When the MS is engaged in a call, it communicates with the network through the associated system information. The network uses certain content in the associated system information to control the transmission, power, and handover of the MS. The broadcast system information is closely related to the channel-associated message. The content in the broadcast system information can overlap with that in the associated message. The content in the associated message can be inconsistent with that in the broadcast system information, because the associated message affects only one MS, while the broadcast system information affects all MSs in idle mode. System information contains the following key parameters of the network:

Network identity parameter A TT (IMSI attach-detach allowed) CCCH CONF (common control channel configuration) BS AG BLKS RES (number of blocks reserved for access granted) BS PA MFRMS (paging channel multi-frames) T3212 (Periodical location updating timer) Cell Channel Description Neighbor Cells Description MBR (Multiband Report) CELL_BAR_ACCESS This parameter indicates whether a cell allows the access of an MS. It is a one-bit code: Value 0 indicates that the access is allowed, and value 1 indicates that the access is not allowed. This parameter does not influence the access of MSs that are handed over to the cell.
PI (cell re-selection parameter indicator)
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 61 of 368
1.11.2 GBFD-1102 Forced System Information Sending by OMC

Availability
Summary
Huawei BSS supports that the sending of system information can be sent forcibly to a certain cell through the BSC. The system information of certain cells is updated forcibly.
Benefits
The system information is a key index used by the operators to adjust the network and control the behavior of the MS. It is also an important method for network optimization. With this feature, the network quality can be further improved as follows:
Proper system information mechanism is essential to a quality network. This feature enables the network optimization personnel to adjust the parameters and verify the adjustment for specific cells in real time, thus facilitating the network optimization. When problems occur in the network, this feature helps assist the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.
This feature enables the operators to improve the network quality, provide better services to MSs, and thus improve the user satisfaction.
Description
Through the LMT, the system information of a cell can be forcibly updated and sent. During the network optimization, the system information on the Abis interface can be traced for checking certain system information configuration. The parameter configuration of system information can be obtained immediately by sending of system information forcibly. This feature helps network optimization personnel and maintenance personnel to verify network parameters after parameter adjustment.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 62 of 368
1.12 O&M
1.12.1 GBFD-1201 Performance Management
Availability
Summary
Performance management is used to monitor, analyze, and control the network performance. Performance management periodically takes samples of KPIs about the management object, bearer resources, and services. The sampled data is then collected, saved, monitored, and analyzed.
Benefits
Performance management collects the measurable performance data to obtain the network operating status, thus helping the operators promptly locate and solve problems, and obtain the basic data required for network optimization.
Description
Management of performance measurement Huawei BSC performance statistics adopts a two-stage structure. The first stage is data sampling and data storage. The second stage is analysis and monitoring. Data sampling is carried out by the BSC and reported to the M2000. The M2000 then carries out data storage, analysis and monitoring. The M2000 provides the northbound interface to report the performance measurement result to the upper-level network management system (NMS). Huawei BSC supports the traffic statistics of multiple periods. You can create a task with multiple periods through the M2000. Based on the task file, the BSC6000 then generates the traffic statistics automatically. On the M2000, the traffic statistics can be collected on the basis of the following periods: 15 minutes and 60 minutes.
Performance measurement counter The statistical object of the performance measurement can be BSC, cell, TRX, or neighboring cell. Four types of performance measurement are defined in terms of MS status, namely, paging measurement, call measurement, MR measurement, and channel assignment measurement. Performance management can automatically add or delete the related measurement tasks according to the dynamic adjustment of the network configuration. The centralized storage of performance measurement data enables the operator to export customized reports. The routine maintenance measurements that the customers (including maintenance personnel and network optimization personnel) care about are defined by default in predefined measurements. Operators may also customize the measurement result report for related measurements based on the detailed description in the user manuals such as the traffic measurement manual. Huawei GBSS also supports the following enhanced performance measurements:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 63 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Measurement about incoming and outgoing cell handovers: This measurement provides data about the incoming cell and outgoing cell handovers. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization. Undefined adjacent cell measurement: This measurement provides BSIC, BCCH frequency, average signal strength, number of MRs of adjacent cells that are included in the BA list but not included in the adjacent cell relation list. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization. Defined adjacent cell measurement: This measurement provides BSIC, BCCH frequency, average signal strength, number of MRs of the defined adjacent cell. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization. Uplink and downlink balance measurement: This measurement provides the data about the balance between uplink and downlink of TCH. The uplink and downlink balance level is graded according to the receive levels in the uplink and downlink. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization. Call drop measurement: This measurement provides the average level and quality in the uplink and downlink, and also the average TA value of SDCCH drops and TCH drops. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization. BTS out-of-service measurement: The BTS out-of-service measurement is provided by the performance management of the BSC together with the M2000. This measurement provides the start time of BTS out-of-service, end time of BTS out-of-service (or service recovery time), and the duration of BTS out-of-service.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0 Real-time traffic statistics: Generally, the minimum period to report the KPI is 15 minutes. During the network optimization, O&M personnel need to monitor the impact of the system parameter change on the network performance in real time. Considering this special requirement and the system load, certain KPIs can be reported at an interval of one minute. These KPIs are Traffic V olume on TCH, Handover Success Rate, Call Drop Ratio on TCH per cell (Including Handover), Congestion Ratio on TCH (All Channels Busy), Success Rate of Call Establishment, Overload Rate of Paging, and CPU Usage. Select these measurements as required. The measurements related to the built-in PCU are supported. GBSS8.1 Real-time traffic statistics query: The GBSC supports the real-time query of statistics of the following items on the BSC through the MML client: the number of calling MSs, the number of initial accesses, the number of establishment indications, and the number of A interface paging requests. The query of the statistics in real time enables users to learn the system load and resource usage any time. Enhanced IP performance measurement: You can query the BTS IP performance measurements through the MML client on the BSC. The information that can be queried using the MML command consists of the traffic over the FE/GE port, bit error rate (BER) over the FE/GE port, and service type/user specific traffic. Measurement period of 24 hours: The M2000 supports three measurement periods at the same time: 15 minutes, 60 minutes, and 24 hours.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 64 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Huawei GBSS provides group call/group broadcast measurements at both BSC and cell levels. The counters comprehensively measure services such as VGCS/VBS channel assignment, VGCS uplink seizure, and VGCS channel switching.
Dependency
1.12.2 GBFD-1202 O&M of BTS

Availability
Summary
Through the BTS OMC at the local end or the remote end, O&M can be performed for BTS logical objects or BTS boards. The logical objects include site, cell, baseband (BT), channel (CH), radio carrier (RC), and timeslot.
Benefits
The BTS O&M has powerful functions, facilitates and simplifies the O&M, and reduces the O&M expenditure. The latter two characteristics are of special importance to operators. Huawei GBSS BTS O&M system provides the following benefits :

Flexible operations enable the operators to perform the O&M at either the local end or remote end as required by the engineering or O&M. Compared with O&M at separated sites, the O&M system provided by Huawei GBSS reduces the manual operations and the O&M cost because Huawei GBSS supports the centralized O&M for BTSs under one BSC. The remote O&M system helps promptly locate and solve the problem of BTS operation, and hence reduces the operating expenditure.
Description
The BTS O&M involves the following operations: query, loading, and activation of software version; query of site attributes; query of the usage of various resources; transmission performance test; reset in levels; environment monitoring; alarm shielding; query of ring networking parameters.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 65 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description O&M of multiple BTSs This function reduces the work of maintenance personnel and also the possibility of improper operations, particularly in the case of large-scale operation. Huawei GBSS supports the four types of operations for multiple BTSs: query of fault, query of software version, forced loading of software, and software activation. O&M of cell O&M of cell involves the following operations : cell attribute query, cell administrative state change, cell system information sending, and forced cell handover. The forced cell handover provided by the BSC refers to the forced handover with or without an assigned target cell. The BSC selects a target cell based on the MR to ensure that the handover is successful. The forced cell handover is used to switch the subscribers of a cell to another cell before the BTS maintenance to ensure that no call drops occur during BTS maintenance. O&M of BT O&M of BT involves the following operations: query of BT attribute, reset in levels for BT, query and change of BT administrative state, and BT test. O&M of CH O&M of CH involves the following operations: query of CH attribute, query and change of CH administrative state, forced CH handover, and related O&M of CH. O&M of RC O&M of RC involves the following operations: O&M of TRX administrative state, query of TRX attributes, and automatic frequency calibration. O&M of BTS involves also board specific operations such as query, maintenance, and reset of the BTS boards. You can select specific boards on the O&M system to query information such as the software and hardware information, extended power information. In addition, you can reset boards and query board alarms on the O&M system. For certain boards, you can also set the clock. By checking the operation status displayed on the panel of the LMT, you can be fully aware of the general situation of the BTS. All O&M functions can be implemented at either the remote end or local end, making the use and query convenient. The general maintenance or operation of the logical object can be performed at the remote end. In the case of hardware replacement, all O&M can be performed at the local end.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 66 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Dependency on other NEs None.
1.12.3 GBFD-1203 O&M of BSC

Availability
Summary
Users access the NE through the LMT or M2000 to perform routine maintenance operations such as data configurations, alarm management, security management, performance data collection and analysis, and loading and upgrading so that the NE functions properly.
Benefits

Users can add, delete, modify, query the configured data, and perform various maintenance operations for the NE so that the NE can provide services as required. Users can monitor and learn about the operating status of the NE in real time to promptly locate and rectify the fault. Users can upgrade the NE at either the local end or the remote end.
Description
The graphical interface makes the O&M of BSC easy to understand and easy to use. The O&M of BSC mainly provides the following functions:
Configuration management The data configuration of the BSC and the BTS under the control of this BSC is managed. The data configuration for the BSC can be performed on the LMT either online or offline.
Software management As an important function of the O&M system, software management involves operations such as loading, management, and activation. The management objects include software of each board, software patch, license, and BOOTROM. The operations of these four types of software facilitate convenient and proper management of BSC software.
O&M of board O&M of board involves the reset and switchover of boards, the monitoring of CPU and DSP, and the reset of subracks or the system. Users perform different operations to solve the problems or maintain the system in different situations. System monitoring System monitoring involves monitoring and offline browsing of the CPU/DSP usage. A maximum of four objects can be monitored in a task. Multiple monitoring tasks can be performed at the same time. Monitoring of the CPU/DSP usage enables the users to learn about the system load in real time. Query of call resources
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 67 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Based on the IMSI or other information of a subscriber provided by the maintenance personnel, the system queries all the resources the subscriber uses in the GBSS. These resources include the BTS, sector, TRX, circuits on the Abis interface, Ater interface information about the BSC, A interface information, TC resources, and board information. All the information helps maintenance personnel quickly locate problems and faults.
Maintenance of interface and link Maintenance of interface and link involves the management of LAPD link, SS7 link, and the trunk circuit on each interface. For example, query of the status of the LAPD link, SS7 link, and trunk circuit, changing the status of trunk circuit, blocking and unblocking of the LAPD link and SS7 link.
Time synchronization Huawei BSC implements the time synchronization with the upper-level NMS through BAM to complete the synchronization of all NEs managed by a centralized NMS. The BAM distributes the synchronized clock to all the BSC boards to synchronize all the elements of the system. Through powerful maintenance functions, the maintenance personnel can quickly get familiar with the BSC LMT and master the usage of Huawei equipment to maintain Huawei GBSS in a simple and efficient way.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0 E1/T1 transmission BER detection: You can obtain the information on the E1/T1 transmission quality on the maintenance system. The following information can be viewed: BER, errored second (ES), errored second ratio (ESR), severely errored second ratio (SESR), number of frames failed in CRC, and number of synchronization bit check errors. The information provides the maintenance personnel with a visualized view of the transmission quality. E1/T1 transmission BER detection complies with G.821 specifications. Operation log reported to the centralized NMS: The BSC supports the query and export of operation logs by time. The exported logs are saved in .xml format. The BSC compresses the operation logs and uploads them to the centralized NMS by time or by file size. The centralized NMS can translate the operation logs in .xml format. It also supports the query by time. GBSS8.0 The O&M of the built-in PCU is supported.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 68 of 368
1.12.4 GBFD-1204 Clock Control Setting

Availability
Summary
Clock control setting consists of the following functions: management of the clock source, query of the clock status, maintenance of the line clock, and maintenance of the GSCU reference clock.
Benefits
This feature provides various clock input schemes. The clock source backup function avoids the impact of the primary clock faults on services.
Description
Huawei GBSS provides the clock control setting. The involved functions are: management of the clock source, query of the clock status, maintenance of the line clock, and maintenance of the GSCU reference clock. The BSC can use two clock sources: building integrated timing supply ( BITS) clock and line clock. Both clock sources support 1+1 backup. The BSC provides up to four clock source priorities. Only one clock source is required when the BSC is operating. Three working modes are available for the clock source: automatic, manual, and self-oscillation.
Automatic In automatic mode, you need not specify a clock source as the current clock source. The BSC automatically selects a clock source with the highest priority. Manual In manual mode, you need to specify a clock source as the current clock source manually. The BSC does not automatically switch to another clock source even if this clock source is faulty. Self-oscillation The self-oscillation mode is the default clock working mode of the BSC. The BSC clock subsystem is composed of the GGCU and the clock processing unit in each subrack. The external clock reference signals are transmitted to the GGCU. After a phase lock in the GGCU, the clock signals are changed to 8 kHz clock signals. These signals are then transmitted to the GGCU in the GEPS through the Y-shaped clock signal cables. The GGCU then transmits the clock signals to the GSCU in the same subrack as the GGCU through the backplane. These 8 kHz clock signals are then transmitted to the other boards in the subrack through the backplane.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 69 of 368
Dependency
1.12.5 GBFD-1205 BSC Alarm

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the faults concerning various devices and services are detected and reported in form of alarms. It involves grading, classification, location, and recovery suggestion of alarms.
Benefits
This feature helps the operators monitor the equipment operation and services effectively. Hence, network exceptions can be detected promptly and the handling suggestions can be obtained to avoid the influence of the exceptions on the network.
Description
The BSC alarm system provides two types of alarm output devices: alarm console and alarm box. The alarm box provides visual and audible alarms. The alarm console is a part of the LMT. It provides detailed alarm information, recovery suggestion, and alarm box control. The BSC alarm system is composed of the BAM alarm module, centralized network management alarm database, alarm console, and alarm box. Alarm system accurately provides the fault information detected by the BSC system to the maintenance personnel through alarm information. The maintenance personnel can then rectify the fault accordingly.
Alarm levels According to the severity and influence of the alarms, there are four alarm levels: critical, major, minor, and warning. Different levels of alarms are presented in different manner, such as color and sound.
Alarm classification Alarms can be classified into fault alarm and event alarm. Recovery alarms are provided for fault alarms. Event alarm has no corresponding recovery alarm. According to the possible source of alarms, alarms can be classified into inter-module communication alarm, signaling subsystem alarm, clock subsystem alarm, and power
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 70 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description supply subsystem alarm. These alarms help the maintenance personnel locate the faults quickly. This feature also provides alarm about software running, such as CPU overload alarm and GBAM hard disk capacity alarm.
Alarm location and recovery suggestions The alarm console provides detailed alarm information, including the ID of the board for which the alarm is generated, the potential cause and consequence of the alarm, and the recovery suggestion. Alarm box control The alarm box control provides manual control of the alarm box. You can mute the sound or turn off the LED for the alarm box through manual operations on the LMT alarm console. The alarms can be printed in real time. The data can be configured and modified. Based on the data configuration, the BSC can automatically control where the alarms will be sent, such as to alarm box or to LMT alarm console. This enables flexible alarm control. Alarm query The alarms can be queried by various conditions. You can browse the fault alarm, emergent event alarm, or other event alarms in real time on the alarm console. You can also query the history fault alarm, recovery alarm, and event alarm according to conditions such as alarm serial number, alarm ID, date and time of alarm, alarm module number, function number, or alarm level. The queried history alarms can be saved.
Environment monitoring unit Each subrack of the BSC6000 can connect an environment monitoring unit (EMU), which is connected with the BSS through serial ports. The EMU has four types of ports: fixed analog ports (four) used for receiving 48 V voltage, 24 V voltage, temperature, and humidity alarms; extended external analog ports (four); fixed external Boolean ports (four) used for receiving water damage, smoke, infrared, and door status alarms; and extended external Boolean ports (32). Alarm information is stored on the M2000. The BSC has buffer capability. A maximum of 300, 000 history alarm records can be stored on the BSC.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0 This function provides PS-related alarms, including device alarms and service alarms. Device alarm: The OMC provides fault detection, fault isolation, switchover, and alarm reporting for the physical objects introduced for PS. Service alarm: Alarms are reported when exceptions are detected during the PS services. The following alarms can be reported: DSP Resource Overload, PTP BVC Faulty and the corresponding recovery alarm, All PBSLs in the PCU Are Faulty, Cell PS Service Faulty, NSE Faulty and the corresponding recovery alarm, GB BC Faulty, NSVC Faulty and the corresponding recovery alarm, IP-based interface board Port Working Mode Fault, and KPI alarms. GBSS8.1 Suppression of the intermittent and repeated alarms: This version provides a comprehensive scheme for suppression of the intermittent and repeated alarms. The intermittent alarms are delayed and the instable intermittent alarms are counted. When the number of the intermittent alarms or the duration of the intermittent alarm exceeds the threshold, an alarm is generated. For alarms that are generated frequently, oscillation suppression can be performed.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 71 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Alarm correlation: Correlation analysis is carried out in real time for multiple alarms that are generated for the same fault source. The analysis result displayed on the LMT improves the alarm handling efficiency. Enhanced alarm positioning information: Alarm positioning parameters are added to alarms about the TDM and STM transmission on the Abis interface. The site number and site name associated with this transmission are displayed. Cell name is added to alarms related to cells. Site name is added to alarms related to the BTS. These parameters make the monitoring and handling of alarms convenient. Solution to intermittent alarm and repeated alarm reduces the redundant alarms significantly, thus saves manpower and time for operators. The operators can then focus on the fault handling. With the alarm correlation, multiple alarms are correlated for handling. In this way, the fault is located quickly and the efficiency to handle the alarms is improved. Various positioning parameters make the alarm information visualize and user-friendly, thus improving the efficiency to handle the alarms.
Dependency
1.12.6 GBFD-1206 BTS Alarm

Availability
Summary
When hardware fault occurs on the BTS or a function does not work properly, the BTS reports the alarm information to the alarm center through the channel provided by the BSC so that the BTS can provide the alarm feature similar to the BSC. The BTS alarms are classified into the following types: clock alarm, antenna and feeder alarm, TRX alarm, baseband alarm, power amplifier alarm, transmission alarm, and environment alarm.
Benefits
During the operation of the BTS, the system fault of the site is promptly reported. In this way, you can easily learn about the network condition, which is important for operators after the network deployment.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 72 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The OMC at the remote end and local end provided by Huawei GBSS implements the automatic reporting of the BTS alarms and the centralized and remote query of the BTS alarm information. This facilitates the commissioning at the local end during installation and also the centralized management through the NMS and the OMC remotely during the O&M process. Huawei GBSS BTS alarm feature provides the following benefits:

Flexible operations are supported. Operators can perform the O&M at either the local end or remote end as required by the engineering or O&M. In comparison with fault management at separated sites, the BTS O&M system provided by Huawei GBSS reduces the manual operations and the O&M expenditure because Huawei GBSS supports the centralized management for BTSs under one BSC. The BTS alarm feature helps report the fault to the management center in real time, and thus the maintenance personnel can promptly learn about the system fault accurately so that they can take appropriate measures. This avoids economic loss.
Description
BTS alarms can be queried according to the site number, cell number, or TRX number so as to confirm the failure and recovery status. BTS alarms can be queried and displayed on both the alarm console at remote end and the Site Maintenance System at the local end. The BTS alarm supports the input interface of the environment alarm. The environment alarms supported by the BTS are fire, smoke, temperature, humidity, door control, and mains supply alarms. The ranges of alarms can be controlled by alarm threshold setting on the BSC. The BTS also supports the function of clearing environment alarms to provide flexible handling for the alarms.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.12.7 GBFD-1207 BTS Test Function

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 73 of 368
Summary
BTS test involves site test, baseband test, baseband idle timeslot test, TCH loopback test, transmission performance test, cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and BTS antenna fault detection.
Benefits
One of the major problems faced by all operators is quick and easy location of the cause and faulty module of the BTS problems. The OMC at the remote end and local end provided by Huawei GBSS enables the BTS test and also the centralized and remote BTS test. This facilitates the commissioning at the local end during installation and also the centralized management through the NMS and the OMC remotely during the O&M process. Huawei GBSS BTS test feature provides the following benefits:

Flexible operations are supported. Operators can perform the O&M at either the local end or remote end as required by the engineering or O&M. In comparison with fault management at separated sites, the BTS O&M system provided by Huawei GBSS reduces the manual operations and the O&M expenditure because Huawei GBSS supports the centralized management for BTSs under one BSC. Various test functions help the maintenance personnel locate the fault and identify the faulty module without the use of test devices. This enables the automatic problem detection and thus saves the maintenance expenditure.
Description
Site test: In the site test, the board hardware is tested. The boards can be TMU board, TRX, and CDU. The hardware test enables early detection and recovery of hardware failure. Baseband test: Baseband test involves BIU loopback test and TRX self-test. In BIU loopback test, the timeslot transmission of the TRX signaling channel on the BTS DBUS is tested. The TRX sends the signaling channel data to the signaling times lot of the BTS DBUS. After the loopback through the TMU, the TRX receives the data sent by the TRX itself. The TRX compares the data with the original data, and then reports the BER to obtain the link quality of the signaling channel on the BTS DBUS. In TRX self-test, the running status of the TRX is tested. Baseband idle times lot test: During the network optimization, you need to manually set the network to maximum interference mode to obtain the maximum interference of the entire network. The method is to send dummy burst on all idle timeslots of a specific area. In the test start command, set the test time to 1 to 24 hours. The test can be stopped automatically by software or stopped manually on the LMT. TCH loopback test: TCH loopback test involves BIU loopback test and TRX RF self-loop test. In the BIU loopback test, the timeslot transmission of the TRX TCH on the BTS DBUS is tested. The TRX sends the TCH data to the traffic timeslot of the BTS DBUS. After the loopback through the TMU, the TRX receives the data sent by the TRX itself. The TRX compares the data with the original data, and then reports the BER to obtain the link quality of the TCH on the BTS DBUS. In the TRX RF self-loop test, the quality of the receive channel and transmit channel of the TRX is tested. TRX RF self-test is carried out by the digital signal processing unit in the TRX. Through the baseband processing unit and the loopback of the RF unit, the data is transmitted through baseband processing unit again and returned to the digital signal processing unit. The digital signal processing unit compares the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 74 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description data with the original data and reports the BER to obtain the quality information regarding the transmit and receive channels. Transmission performance test: The transmission performance of the E1 port specified by the BTS. The transmission performance information regarding a specified TMU board can be learned quickly through the E1 loopback test. Two types of loopback modes are available: E1 loopback and timeslot loopback. When you select E1 loopback, all the timeslots of a specified E1 port are tested. When you select timeslot loopback, the number of the timeslot should be specified. One timeslot can be tested in one test. CRC: Operators can decide whether to adopt CRC for the transmission between the BTS and the BSC.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0 BTS antenna system connection detection: This feature is performed for the deployment and cutover of the BTS and for the troubleshooting of the BTS antenna system. The feature involves the call test and antenna system intermodulation detection. Call test: You can enable the call of a specified MS to perform traverse handover on the channels in a cell through the Site Maintenance System and the BSC host. Thus, the BTS can test the channels and then report the test result to the Site Maintenance System through the BSC. The test result is saved as a file for the analysis by tools. The following issues can be tested: incorrect connection of the antenna system, main and diversity problems, uplink and downlink balance, one-way audio, and no audio. Antenna system intermodulation detection: Interference on each frequency band is detected through the frequency band scanning. Co-frequency and adjacent frequency check in one BTS: This function is performed during data configuration to provide accurate information to operators. This helps avoid the configuration of the same frequency and adjacent frequencies for one BTS especially for one cell due to improper operation. Such configuration may cause intra-network interference, but if the configuration is confirmed by the operator, it can be issued. GBSS8.1 V oltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) detection: In the early stage of the network deployment, VSWR is a key item in the acceptance test. A specialized test tool is required to measure the VSWR on site and to verify the installation of the antenna system. The VSWR detection function controls the test of the BTS remotely without using any specialized tools, and thus saves cost because the maintenance personnel need not conduct the test on site. The maintenance personnel only need to send a VSWR detection command to the BSC through the M2000 or MML client. The BSC then forwards the command to the BTS. The BTS configures the test mode and then carries out the VSWR test. After that, the BTS restores to the work mode. After the test, the BSC reports the test result to the M2000 or MML client. On the M2000, you can perform VSWR tests in batches and set the VSWR threshold. The precision of the reported VSWR is 0.01 with a deviation more than 0.2 in comparison with the VSWR obtained by using the specialized tool.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 75 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the TRX module. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by both the BTS and the BSC.
1.12.8 GBFD-1208 Dynamic Data Configuration

Availability
Summary
Dynamic data configuration involves the online data configuration in scenarios such as capacity expansion, swapping, and routine optimization and maintenance of the network.
Benefits
Operators can adjust the configuration based on the network condition and planning gradually. In this way, the pressure and complexity of the initial network planning is reduced, the risk of errors in network adjustment is small, thus facilitating the O&M.
Description
The dynamic data configuration is implemented on the LMT. The LMT adopts graphic user interface (GUI) and object-oriented management, which are user-friendly. Operation tasks for dynamic data configuration are categorized according to the on-site demands. Wizards are provided for each task to instruct the user to complete the complicated online system configuration and network parameter adjustment. GBSS supports that the hardware such as subrack and board can be configured using dynamic configuration. After the dynamic configuration, the software and data are automatically loaded onto the hardware for operation. Based on the object, dynamic data configuration involves the dynamic configuration of BSC data, BTS data, and cell data. Dynamic configuration of BSC data is supported. The involved operations are as follows: adding/deleting subrack and board, BSC software parameters, signaling link, and A interface circuit. Dynamic configuration of BTS data is supported. The involved operations are as follows: adding/deleting BTS, adding/deleting/modifying BTS board, modifying site name, modifying site attributes, and site swapping. Dynamic configuration of cell data is supported. The involved operations are as follows: adding/deleting cells and TRXs, modifying cell attribute parameter, RF parameter, power control parameter, system information, frequency hopping parameter, channel type, dynamically adding/deleting BSC external cell, configuring 2G/3G neighboring cell. The data
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 76 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description of network optimization and network planning can be imported and exported, thus facilitating the routine maintenance.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0 The dynamic configuration of the built-in PCU is supported.
Dependency
1.12.9 GBFD-1209 GUI Graphic Interface

Availability
Summary
The GUI enables users to perform various types of O&M such as data configuration, equipment maintenance, performance management, and alarm management.
Benefits
This feature improves the operability and serviceability. The GUI simplifies the O&M.
Description
Huawei GUI O&M client provides powerful O&M functions, and thus facilitates the deployment, upgrade, expansion, swapping, and routine maintenance of the site. The GUI O&M client also provides flexible connection methods. The GUI O&M client can directly connect to the BAM or M2000 through the Ethernet. Powerful online and offline data configuration are provided. The wizard directed user interface facilitates the data configuration in scenarios such as site deployment, expansion, and swapping. The data of network optimization and network planning can be exported and imported. Batch modification is supported. All these functions facilitate the routine O&M. Diversified routine maintenance, tracing, monitoring functions are provided. In addition, the alarm and performance information can be displayed, browsed, and queried in real time.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 77 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Software management operations such as download, upload, activation, and rollback can be performed directly for the version software of the BSC and the BTS. In addition, the batch operation is supported to improve the upgrade efficiency.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.12.10 GBFD-1210 Integrated Network Management Interface

Availability
Summary
GBSS products access Huawei mobile integrated network management system M2000 through the integrated network management interface.
Benefits
The M2000 is located in the element management-layer (EM-layer) of the telecommunication management network (TMN) model. It provides a network management interface for the upper-level network management system (NMS). This feature provides the following benefits:

The integrated operation and maintenance of the GBSS can be implemented on the M2000. The upper-level NMS or the NMS of other vendors can be accessed through the northbound interface provided by the M2000.
Description
The M2000 is an integrated management system on network element level. It supports the integrated operation and maintenance of mobile devices. With flexible access modes, the remote network element devices can access the M2000 through the wide area network (WAN). The LMT can be placed anywhere on the network. In normal communications, the centralized
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 78 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description maintenance is performed; when the communication with the M2000 is interrupted, the local maintenance is initiated. In addition, the M2000 provides the northbound interface to access the upper-level network management system or the network management system of other vendors. The GBSS accesses the M2000 through the integrated network management interface of the LMT. In addition, users can implement functions such as software management, configuration, maintenance, alarm management, performance statistics, and security management through the integrated network management interface.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the M2000.
1.12.11 GBFD-1211 Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equipment Room
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the temperature monitoring switch of the BTS equipment room, real-time query, and downloading of the temperature information log of the BTS equipment room.
Benefits
The temperature of the BTS equipment room affects the ventilation of the BTS equipment room and the power consumption of the air conditioner. In addition, it may cause a fire warning. As the operational expenditure of mobile operators increases, maintaining the functionality and reducing the manpower of the operation and maintenance have become an effective method of reducing the cost. This feature provides the following benefits:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 79 of 368
This feature not only reduces the manpower of the O&M and check, but also helps operators monitor the temperature of the BTS equipment room. In addition, the air conditioner can be remotely adjusted by other ways according to the actual situation. In this way, the energy consumption can be reduced and operators achieve the aim of becoming green operators. This feature not only reduces the manpower, but also finds the safety problems in advance such as the abnormal temperature change, fire, and outside damage.
Description
This feature can start and stop the detection of the temperature information of the BTS equipment room. The detection of the temperature information of the BTS equipment room is started or stopped through the site maintenance terminal or LMT. Users can set the period of reporting the temperature of the BTS equipment room. A message is displayed on the site maintenance terminal or LMT, indicating whether the reporting of the temperature information of the BTS equipment room is started or stopped successfully. On the M2000 client, you can download the files of the temperature of the equipment room from the OMU in FTP mode. In addition, you can also query the files of the temperature information of the equipment room and save the query results on the client.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.12.12 GBFD-1212 Reporting the BTS Resource Information

Availability
Summary
This feature is used to record the identification and attributes of the BTS devices (including the cabinets, subracks, and boards) such as the bar codes of the boards and the information about the software and the hardware versions.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 80 of 368
Benefits
On the networks of operators, the number of BTSs is great. For easy management of the equipment asset, operators need to obtain the information about the physical device and some important logical information. In addition, the information can be collected and exported to facilitate the asset management. You can query the BTS inventory information on the M2000. In addition, you can also export the BTS inventory information on the LMT or M2000 client by executing the MML commands. The exported file can be resolved by the CEAS system or provided to the northbound interface according to the requirements of the northbound interface. This feature helps facilitate the asset management of the users. It provides the following benefits:
In the daily operation and maintenance, with this feature, users can learn the information about the physical devices as well as the information about the software and hardware versions for ease of the management of the equipment asset. When the devices of the on-site BTS become faulty and need to be replaced, with this feature, users can know the specifications of the spare devices. As the network devices are aging during operation, with this feature, users can know the normal service life of the device.
Description
This feature is implemented by the M2000, BSC, and BTS. The BTS inventory management system is deployed in the M2000. The M2000 sends the required inventory information command to the BSC through the interface. Upon reception of this command, the BSC queries the inventory information about all the BTSs, generates a file, and sends it to the M2000. Then, the M2000 resolves the inventory information. Some inventory information can be imported through the manual input or other files. The M2000 supports the query, synchronization, modification, export, and import of the BTS inventory information.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 81 of 368
M2000
Inventory management system: Obtain the inventory file; resolve the inventory information; display on the interface; modify, import, export the inventory file
Synchronization
Uploading file
BSC
Obtain the inventory information of the BTS and generate the BTS inventory file
Query
Sending Result
BTS
Information about the electronic label, and software and hardware versions of the BTS board, manufacturer of the heat exchanger, and the electronic bar code of the BTS cabinet
The BTS supports the reporting of the following inventory information: the information about the electronic label, software and hardware versions of the BTS board, and the manufacturer of the heat exchanger. In addition, the BTS also supports the input and reporting of the bar code of the BTS cabinet. Like an ID, the electronic label is an evidence of the board when the board needs to be replaced. Also, the electronic label is a traceable mark in the service life of the board, which provides the data required for the management, tracing, and maintenance of the board. The information about the electronic label of the BTS board inc ludes: the board model, bar code, BOM code, description, production date, name of the manufacturer, and publishing number. The M2000 provides the import or modification function for the inventory information that is not supported by the BTS. That is, the information can be manually entered. The information includes the information about the BTS antenna, electronic label of the board that does not report the electronic label (purchased parts), and the ultimate service time of the board information zone. This information is not sent to the BTS for storage but is saved in the inventory management system in the M2000. In addition, no storage part is available in the BTS cabinet, and thus the bar code of the cabinet needs to be manually entered on the M2000 or the LMT. The BTS supports the input of this information and saves it in the main control board of the BTS. Then, the BTS sends the information to the BSC through the inventory management interface.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0 This feature supports the reporting of the electronic label of the BTS board according to electronic label standards 3.0. GBSS8.1
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 82 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The reporting of the information about the software and hardware versions of the BTS board, manufacturer of the heat exchanger, electronic labels of the BBU backplane, fan board, and power monitor board, and the input and query of the electronic bar code of the cabinet.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the BTS and the M2000.
1.12.13 GBFD-1213 Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Software

Availability
Summary
Remote upgrade of the BSC&BTS software consists of the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS software.
Benefits
This feature is especially applicable to the system upgrade in the rural area. Multiple network elements can be upgraded simultaneous ly without local operation, thus improving the working efficiency of the maintenance personnel. The upgrade of the GBSS can be remotely implemented on the M2000. As this feature supports batch upgrade of multiple network elements, this can save the time and workload of the maintenance personnel, and reduce the time of the service disruption caused by the system upgrade. You can implement the remote software upgrade through the GUI of the M2000 for ease of operation.
Description
Remote upgrade of the BSC&BTS software consists of the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS software, and the automatic remote upgrade of the LMT.
Remote upgrade of the BSC software Huawei BSS supports remote upgrade of the host software and OMU software of the BSC through the integrated network management system (M2000). The remote upgrade of the BSC software provides downloading, uploading, and activation of the BSC host
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 83 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description software and OMU software. In case of a failed upgrade, this function also provides the rollback of the BSC software version and data configuration. After the software is loaded successfully, the system automatically loads and activates the license file. The remote upgrade also supports the upgrade of the cold patches and hot patches. Remote upgrade of the BTS software The remote upgrade of the BTS software consists of three steps: downloading the BTS software to the BSC from the M2000, loading the BTS software to the BTS boards through the BSC, and activating the BTS software of the BTS boards through the BSC. After the BTS software is downloaded to the BSC through the M2000, both the one-key upgrade and the automatic upgrade are supported. In the case of one-key upgrade, the maintenance personnel load and activate the BTS software through the M2000. In the case of automatic upgrade, the maintenance personnel configure the information about the BTS software version to be upgraded; the BSC then automatically upgrades the BTS software without manual intervention.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.12.14 GBFD-1214 Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the quick recovery of the operating system or the configuration data.
Benefits

Reduces the complexity of the backup and recovery of the operating system or the configuration data of the GOMU or the BAM server. Reduces the time of the service disruption caused by the maintenance.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 84 of 368
Description
The O&M system of Huawei BSS includes the GBAM and GOMU. Both of them adopt the Linux operating system. If the operating system is corrupted, you can execute commands to recover the operating system through connecting a PC that supports the boot from CD-ROM to the GOMU or BAM server. Huawei random CD-ROM contains the initial backup of the system, operators can restore the BSC to the default state. In addition, operators can back up the BSC operating system or configuration data at any time, and restore the system to the status of the backup time.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.13 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface

1.13.1 GBFD-1301 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface
Availability
Summary
Each BTS has one operation and maintenance link (OML) that works at the rate of 64 kbit/s. Each TRX has one radio signaling link (RSL) that works at the rate of 64 kbit/s. This feature allows multiple RSLs and OMLs to be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the Abis link in TDM transmission mode.
Benefits
Except for the timeslot 0 used for synchronization, a total number of 31 timeslots on one E1 link are used for the signaling and service transmission. If the signaling compression technology is not used, one E1 link can only carry the data and signaling of only ten TRXs. In some areas where the transmission resources are limited or expensive, saving transmission
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 85 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description bandwidth is a major concern of operators. This feature allows a maximum of 15 TRXs to be carried on one E1 link. With the rapid development of data services, the transmission resources on the Abis interface become more and more limited. For example, an EGPRS service with the MCS9 coding scheme occupies four 64 kbit/s channels, and EDGE Evolution requires a higher bandwidth. If the signaling and services are not compressed, the new services developed by operators will consume a huge amount of transmission resources. This feature multiplexes the bandwidth on the signaling links and thus saves the transmission resources on the Abis interface. Description In Huawei BSC, the interface board connected to the BTS supports two multiplexing modes: 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot exchange and N:1 multiplexing. These two modes are targeted at the RSL or OML signaling channels. The TCH adopts the exclusive mode. The full-rate speech channel is 16 kbit/s and the half-rate speech channel is 8 kbit/s. If full-rate channels are configured in the TRX, the BSS allows the signaling of four RSLs to be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the E1 link. Then, the calls of multiple TRXs can be carried on one E1 link, thus saving the transmission resources on the Abis interface. If 4:1 multiplexing mode is applied, Huawei BSS allows a maximum of 15 TRXs to be carried on one E1 link. If half-rate channels are configured in the TRX, the N:1 multiplexing mode is applied to the Abis interface, where N can be 2, 3, or 4. The capacity of the speech channel is doubled. Thus, the signaling volume on the RSL of each TRX is doubled. Therefore, the 2:1 multiplexing mode is used by default. That is, the RSLs of a maximum of two TRXs can be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the E1 link. The multiplexing ratio is closely related to the total number of TRXs that one E1 supports. As the traffic volume on the signaling channel in half-rate configuration mode is heavy, the recommended value of N is 2, that is, 2:1 is the recommended multiplexing ratio. In this case, one E1 link supports a maximum of 13 TRXs in half-rate configuration. If the BTSs are cascaded, they can have different multiplexing ratios. For example, three BTSs are cascaded in S1/1/1 cell configuration. Then, the multiplexing ratio of the level 1, level 2, and level 3 BTSs can be set to 4:1, 2:1, and 4:1 respectively.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0 When GBFD-7301 Flex Abis is enabled, N in the N:1 multiplexing mode can be set to 5 or 6 for a higher multiplexing ratio. For details, see the description of GBFD-7301 Flex Abis.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 86 of 368
1.14 Networking Modes

1.14.1 GBFD-1401 Star Networking Mode
Availability
Summary
In star networking mode, every BTS is directly connected to the BSC.
Benefits
Star networking is a traditional networking mode. The network structure of star networking is simple, which reduces maintenance cost.
Description
The star networking mode applies to urban areas, especially densely populated areas. In star networking mode, every BTS is directly connected to the BSC separately and the network structure is simple. Generally, this usually applies to large site configurations. Figure 1-1 Star networking mode
BTS1 BTS2 BSC BTS3
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 87 of 368
1.14.2 GBFD-1402 Link Networking Mode

Availability
Summary
The BTS supports the link networking mode.
Benefits
Link networking is a traditional networking mode. The timeslot switching function of the BTS enables the timeslots on the E1 link to be shared with the lower-level BTSs for transmission in link networking mode. Thus, operators can reduce transmission cost and investment on the timeslot switching device.
Description
The link networking mode is used along the highways or railway tracks and in sparsely populated areas. It can greatly save the transmission resources. In some cases, multiple E1 links can be used for transmission in link networking mode. The levels of BTSs in link networking mode should not exceed five. Figure 1-2 Link topology mode
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 88 of 368
1.14.3 GBFD-1403 Tree Networking Mode

Availability
Summary
The BTS supports the tree networking mode.
Benefits
Tree networking is a traditional networking mode. The timeslot switching function of the BTS enables the timeslots on the E1 link to be shared with the lower-level BTSs for transmission in tree networking mode. Thus, operators can reduce transmission cost and investment on the timeslot switching device.
Description
The tree networking mode is used in the large and sparsely populated areas. The number of levels in tree networking mode should not exceed five. Figure 1-3 Tree networking mode
Huawei GBSS also supports hybrid networking.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 89 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.15 BTS Combined Cabinet

1.15.1 GBFD-1501 BTS Combined Cabinet
Availability
Summary
BTS combined cabinet does not have the limited capacity of a single BTS.
Benefits
The high-capacity sites can reduce the construction cost of the equipment rooms for operators. Thus, the deployment of large sites in urban areas helps reduce the number of sites, increase the network capacity, and save the construction cost.
Description
The number of TRXs available in one BTS cabinet is limited; thus, if the number of TRXs required by the synchronous cells is greater than one BTS cabinet can handle, then the combined cabinets should be used. A maximum of tw o BTS cabinets can be combined into a cabinet group and one cabinet group supports up to 24 TRXs. With the high-capacity sites, operators can reduce the construction cost of the equipment rooms. Thus, the deployment of large sites in urban areas helps reduce the number of sites, increase the network capacity, and save the construction cost. In combined cabinets, the cabinet configured with the main control unit is the main cabinet and the cabinet not configured with the main control unit is the extension cabinet. The main cabinet and extension cabinet share the common board. The clock signals, data, O&M signals are transmitted from the main cabinet to the extension cabinet through certain cabling. The capability of combined cabinets supported by the BTS is as follows: The BTS312 and BTS3012 support the combination of two cabinets while the BTS3006C and BTS3002E support the combination of three cabinets. The BTS3002C, BTS3012II, and BTS3012AE do not support the combination of cabinets. For the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900, one BBU supports the maximum cell configuration of S12/12/12.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 90 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.15.2 GBFD-1502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group

Availability
Summary
BTS hybrid cabinet group does not have the limited capacity of a single BTS.
Benefits
The BTS hybrid cabinet group feature increases the capacity of the current network and thus facilitates the smooth network upgrade for improved network performance and increased functions.
Description
Regardless of the number of cabinets that constitute the cabinet group, one cabinet group supports a maximum of 24 TRXs. If the number of TRXs in a synchronous cell exceeds 24, then multiple cabinet groups should be combined. Generally, this is used for capacity expansion. The cabinets that constitute the cabinet group can be of the same type or of different types. The total number of TRXs in a cabinet group of a synchronous site cannot exceed 72. The cabinet group that provides the clock sources for the cells is called the main cabinet group, which is configured with one or two TMU boards; the other cabinet groups are called extension cabinet groups. The main cabinet in a cabinet group can be configured with one TMU board. The E1 cables connect the TMU boards of the main cabinets. The clock signals and O&M signaling between the cabinet groups are transmitted over the cabling between the main cabinet of the main cabinet group and the main cabinet of an extension cabinet, and then the clock signals and O&M signaling are transmitted from the main cabinet of a cabinet group to the extension cabinet of the cabinet group. The capability of cabinet groups supported by the BTS is as follows: Cabinet group of the same cabinet type: The BTS312 and BTS 3012 support the grouping of three cabinets, enabling an S24/24/24 synchronous site.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 91 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The BTS3012II supports the grouping of three cabinets, enabling an S18/18/18 synchronous site. The BTS3012AE supports the grouping of three cabinets, enabling an S12/12/12 synchronous site. The BTS3006C supports the grouping of two cabinets, enabling an S12/12/12 synchronous site. The BTS3002E supports the grouping of two cabinets, enabling an S4/4/4 synchronous site. The cabinet group is not applicable to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900. Cabinet group of different cabinet types: The BTS3012 can be grouped with the BTS312 and BTS30.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.16 Cabinet/Subrack Sharing

1.16.1 GBFD-8801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing
Availability
Summary
Based on the Platform of Advanced Radio Controller (PARC), BSC cabinet/subrack sharing enables the BSC, TC, PCU, MGW, and RNC to share one cabinet.
Benefits
Currently, operators become more and more concerned about the cost, so the reduction of equipment construction and maintenance costs becomes increasingly important. This feature
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 92 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description enables operators to reduce the cost from the following aspects and to realiz e smooth evolution from 2G network to 3G network.

The shared-cabinet technique helps achieve network integration, save the equipment floor space, and reduce the O&M cost. The 2G and 3G equipment that share one platform and one cabinet can implement smooth evolution from 2G network to 3G network, reduce the investment on the equipment, and optimally utilize the space. Multiple equipment that share one cabinet can unify the maintenance for 2G and 3G networks, the access and core networks. Then, the O&M cost is reduced.
Description
Cabinet sharing among the BSC, TC, and MGW: Huawei BSC allows the BSC, TC, and MGW to share one cabinet for reducing space and cost. Huawei softswitch products include the MSC server (MSS) and MGW. The MSC server is responsible for call control and signaling, and the MGW is responsible for switching and service bearing. The equipment can be deployed in a distributed way: The MSC server is deployed in the center of a big city and the MGW is deployed in a place close to the access network. With this optimized networking configuration, the calling party and called party are controlled by the same MGW and the voice data is only switched in the MGW instead of the MSC server, thus saving transmission resources.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0 Cabinet sharing between the BSC and RNC: Huawei BSC shares PARC platform with the RNC. The BSC and RNC with their own subracks can be placed in one cabinet. The BSC and RNC manage 2G/3G resources and calls independently. GBSS8.0 Subrack sharing among the BSC, TC, and PCU: Huawei BSC allows the BSC, TC, and PCU to share one subrack. One subrack can provide CS services and PS services. Then, one cabinet can provide CS services and PS services for 2,048 TRXs. Thus, the system integration is greatly improved and the required area and O&M cost are reduced.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 93 of 368
1.17 BTS Power Management

1.17.1 GBFD-1601 BTS Power Management
Availability
Summary BTS power management supports hierarchical power-off and voltage abnormal protection. Benefits
This feature enhances power management and self-protection for the BTS, thus improving the reliability of the system, prolonging the lifespan of products, and serving time of the system. With this feature, both the BTS stability and the QoS are improved. In addition, the O&M cost for the BTS is reduced, thus increasing the revenue of operators.
Description
Huawei BTS can flexibly deal with the load of the system according to the actual situation, thus prolonging the serving time of the system. When there is no mains supply, the BTS hierarchical power-off function reduces the power consumption and raises the duration of the storage battery. On one hand, when the mains supply is not available, all the TCH TRXs are shut down except the BCCH TRX. This is called soft shutdown. On the other hand, when the capacity of the storage batteries drops to the preset value, all the TRXs are powered off automatically to protect the storage batteries. This is called hard shutdown. The use of the automatic power-off mode is configurable. This feature mainly applies to the BTS cascading. When the mains of the upper-level BTS is powered off whereas the mains of the lower-level BTS is normal, this feature can prolong the working time of the transmission module of the upper-level BTS to reduce the impact on the lower-level BTS. When the working temperature is high or the temperature regulation unit does not work properly, the TMU shuts down the power amplification of some TRXs if the temperature exceeds the threshold in the cabinet. This prevents any negative impact of the system. If the TRX is faulty or the VSWR exceeds the limit, to minimize the chance of total damage, the TRX is allowed to quit the services and shut down the power including the power of the power amplifier. Whether this function is to be enabled and the parameters to be used can be set. Therefore, the flexibility of the system is improved. In this way, the power management and self-protection for the BTS are enhanced, thus the reliability of the system is improved and the lifespan of products is prolonged.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 94 of 368
Dependency
1.18 Reliability and Maintainability

1.18.1 GBFD-1701 Board Switchover
Availability
Summary
In daily operations, the active board takes charge of the normal operation of the services and the standby one performs real-time backup for the active board. When the active board is faulty, the services are switched to the standby board for continuous operation of the system.
Benefits
The reliability of the BSS and the MTBF of the system is greatly improved, and the service disruptions caused by the faults of a board are reduced.
Description
To guarantee the reliable operation of the system, Huawei GBSS provides redundancy solutions for all the boards (except for the boards designed for the resource pool), that is, the boards are classified into the active board and the standby board. The active board processes services while the standby board performs real-time backup for the active one. When the active board is faulty or needs to be replaced, the services can be switched over to the standby board. In this way, the system can work continuously. There are two kinds of switchovers. One is automatic switchover. That is, the services are automatically switched over from the active board to the standby board. Another one is manual switchover. That is, the maintenance personnel perform the board switchover on the LMT. The maintenance personnel send an immediate switchover command to the system, and a specially designed maintenance module instructs relevant boards to perform switchover.. To perform the active/standby switchover successfully, the following conditions must be met: The standby board must be in position and work normally. No major or critical alarm is reported. When the standby board is switched over to the active one, the original active board
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 95 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description will reset automatically. If this board starts normally, it will be the standby one. In this way, the boards are kept in backup status. The boards that support the board switchover include the GOMU, GGCU, GSCU, GTNU, GXPUM, and all types of interface boards. The service processing boards such as the GDPUX are designed in the resource pool mode.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.18.2 GBFD-1702 TC Resources Pool

Availability
Summary
This feature ensures that all the TC resources are not bound to a specific cell or MS but are combined into a common resource pool within a subrack.
Benefits
The TC resources in the BSS can be shared by different MSs to balance the traffic between the idle TC resources and busy TC resources. In this way, the usage of the TC resources is greatly improved. When a board is faulty, the usage of services is not affected. Through the redundancy configuration in the system design, the reliability of the TC resources is greatly improved, and thus the reliability of the system is ensured.
Description
The TC processing board of the BSC performs voice encoding and decoding function of the MS in the GSM system. This board changes the various rates from the Um interface into 64 kbit/s PCM required for the A interface, or changes 64 kbit/s PCM into various rates required
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 96 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description for the Um interface. All the TC resources of the BSC are not bound to a specific cell or MS but are combined into a common resource pool w ithin a subrack. All the TC resources in the resource pool are allocated based on loading balancing and polling principles. The TC in the BSC supports multiple voice coding schemes such as FR, EFR, HR, AMR-FR, and AMR-HR. Different voice coding schemes can be applied on a common TC resource pool. According to the status and configuration of the MS in the network, the BSC can automatically perform the adaption of multiple coding schemes without manual intervention. In addition, the BSC can automatically perform the statistics of the usage of multiple coding schemes, so that the operators can adjust the operation strategy based on the statistics. The TC resource subrack can be configured on the BSC side or the MSC side through the Ater interface. In this way, the operator can flexibly adjust the configuration of the TC resource subrack. In addition, The BSC provides the circuit multiplexing on the Ater interface, thus reducing the transmission bandwidth of the operators.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature and the following feature are mutually exclusive: GBFD-8602 A over IP Transmission Dependency on other NEs None.
1.18.3 GBFD-1703 Resources Check

Availability
Summary
The BSC actively or passively checks the usage of software system resources to prevent the resource suspension or inconsistent status of the resources. Through the automatic correction of the software errors, this feature ensures proper usage, allocation, and release of the resources. In addition, this feature enables the automatic detection and recovery for the entire system.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 97 of 368
Benefits
This feature provides the following benefit: This feature enables the automatic detection and recovery for the entire system. In this way, the normal operation of the system is ensured, the reliability and robustness of the system are improved, and the maintenance manpower resources are saved.
Description
This feature improves the system stability by providing the automatic detection and recovery for the whole system. Through the automatic correction of the software errors and check of the usage status of the system resources, this feature ensures proper usage, allocation and release of the resources. This feature prevents the deterioration of the system processing capability caused by the errors occur in the operation of the system. It rectifies faults in time to ensure that the system works reliably. Resources check has two purposes: avoiding the resource suspension and inconsistent status of the resources. Resources check is initiated in either of the following ways:
Periodical check initiated by the BSC When the BSC works with the PCU to process PS services, the PCU initiates a periodical check on the resources for PS services. During the idle time (for example, 02:00), the BSC initiates a periodical check. The check mainly involves the following aspects:

Usage of the memory Usage of the circuit resource on the A interface Usage and status consistency of the radio resources Usage of the network board resources Usage and status consistency of the signaling link and consistency of the status BCCH mutual aiding and TRX mutual aiding Others. For example, the consistency of various system control parameters
Periodical check initiated by the PCU During the idle time (for example, 02:00), the PCU initiates a periodical check, which focuses on the status consistency of the resources between the PCU and BSC. The PCU initiates the check and then the BSC corrects the status inconsistency of the resources between the PCU and the BSC. The check mainly involves the following aspects: PDCH type and status

PCIC status Cell status
Through resources check, the system can detect the exception of the software in time and thus ensures the normal operation of the software. In addition, the software enables the self-recovery function, thus improving the software reliability.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 98 of 368
Dependency
1.18.4 GBFD-1704 Software Patch

Availability
Summary
Huawei BSC supports software patch which is used to fix bugs or modify minor features.
Benefits
This feature reduces the number of software upgrades caused by the minor defects or characteristics, thus improving the serving time of the system.
Description
Huawei BSC supports software patch which is used to fix bugs or modify minor features. In terms of the service impact, the patches can be classified into hot patches and cold patches. The BSC supports hot patches and cold patches. Hot patches: For the equipment that needs continuous operation, some new codes are used to replace the old ones to rectify defects or fulfill new requirements without restarting or interrupting the services. These new codes are called hot patches. Cold patches: Some new files are used to overwrite the old ones to rectify defects or fulfill new requirements by restarting the software module. The new file sets are called cold patches. The use of patches can reduce the upgrade cost and avoid upgrade risks. In particular, the hot patches with rollback function that can be operated at remote end at any time. In this way, the upgrade cost can be reduced effectively and the upgrade risk can be avoided. Huawei GBSS supports patch management, loading, activation, and rollback, thus the patches are used in a flexible way. Patch management: The patch management is a subset of the BSS software management function, and the patches are managed together with the main version. This function allows users to query the information of installed patches and the mapping between patches and the main version. The patches must match the specific main version.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 99 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Patch loading: The patches are loaded to the target board and saved in the non-volatile memory. The user decides when to activate the patches. Patch activation: The patches are activated through the LMT to rectify the defec ts or add new features. Patch rollback: When the activated patches are not required or have problems, the patch rollback is used to restore to the previous status, so that the new codes or new features will not function. Through patches, the software is less frequently upgraded for minor defects. Thus, the serving time of the system is prolonged and the software problems can be solved in time and conveniently.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0 Supports patching from the M2000. GBSS8.1 Supports the BTS software patch.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The BTS software patch should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs When the patches are applied on the M2000, this feature should be supported by the M2000.
1.18.5 GBFD-1705 Flow Control

Availability
Summary
When the system is overloaded, the system reduces the traffic of the access system or disables some maintenance functions according to the priorities. In this way, the normal operation of the main services in the system is ensured, and the normal traffic and load can be restored in a relatively short time.
Benefits
This feature ensures the stable and reliable operation of the system.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 100 of 368
Description
When the system load exceeds the processing capability due to excessive traffic volume or other causes, the BSC initiates the flow control and takes measures to the normal provisioning of important services, so that the system robustness is improved. GBSS flow control involves the internal flow control and traffic flow control. The internal flow control prevents load increase caused by O&M or restricts some supporting functions when the traffic is relatively high. This protects the system against breakdown and ensures the successful access of user services. Service flow control restricts some common services to ensure the provisioning of key services when the traffic exceeds certain level. In this way, the system load can be restored to the normal state as soon as possible. When the network side sends many paging messages or many MSs access the network at the same time, the services may not be processed in time. In this case, the system may discard some paging messages or reject some access requests, so that the traffic can be controlled within a defined range. In terms of the service design, the system performs different protections on different levels to maintain the KPIs in the normal state when the traffic is overloaded in some areas caused by the imbalance of the service distribution. In this case, the flow control involves the RSL flow control, flow control of the single BTS, and overload protection of the TRX. Through the flow control algorithms of different levels, the system automatically provides the flow control protection after the services exceed the system specifications, and takes measures to stabilize the system load, thus maintaining the user service within the range allowed by the system and ensuring the robustness of the system to prevent the breakdown caused by the overload. In addition, the system can automatically change the restriction measures according to the decrease in the load. In this way, the system can be restored to the normal state as soon as possible.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 101 of 368
1.19 A Interface Functions

1.19.1 GBFD-1801 Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing
Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSC supports 4:1 multiplexing on the Ater interface. That is, through the TC subrack, the four timeslots on the E1 of the A interface can be multiplexed to a timeslot on the Ater interface. The previous PCM frame of 64 kbit/s can be converted into the TRAU frame of 16 kbit/s to save the transmission bandwidth.
Benefits
In the network deployment, the transmission cost is expensive for the operators. Based on the prerequisite that the network quality is ensured, this feature can reduce the transmission bandwidth in the following ways:
Through the configuration of the TC subrack on the MSC side (BM/TC separated mode), the compression multiplexing is implemented to save the transmission bandwidth and reduce the transmission cost. Through reducing the transmission bandwidth, the operators invest the transmission cost in the more reliable network. Therefore, the network quality can be maintained in an efficient way.
Description
Huawei GBSC supports 4:1 multiplexing on the Ater interface. That is, the four timeslots on the E1 of the A interface can be multiplexed to a timeslot on the Ater interface through the Ater interface processing board. In the telephone exchange network, the voice coding scheme is Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) and the rate is 64 kbit/s. To save the radio channel resources, the GSM system adopts the voice coding scheme RPE-LTP or CELP and the rate is 13 kbit/s (16 kbit/s for transmission). If the PSTN subscriber makes calls with the GSM mobile subscriber, the voice codec should be converted from 13 kbit/s codec to 64 kbit/s codec. The voice codec conversion should be implemented in the TC (TRAU) unit. Before conversion, the voices should be exchanged and transmitted on the channels of 16 kbit/s in the BSC. The Ater interface is an internal interface between the TC processing unit and the service processing module. On the Ater interface, Huawei GBSC supports the multiplexing of four voice channels to an E1 timeslot of 64 kbit/s. When the TC subrack is configured on the MSC side, the remote transmission resource can be saved by 75%. Huawei GBSC supports the configuration of the TC subrack on the BSC side or on the MSC side to provide the flexible networking for the operators.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 102 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Resource pool of the Ater interface: GBSS7.0 introduces the concept of the resource pool of the Ater interface. The links on the Ater interface used as a resource pool can be inconsistent with the CICs on the A interface. This feature supports the Ater timeslot of 8 kbit/s (require the support from GBFD-6901 Flex Ater): the times lots on the Ater interface involves the timeslots of 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s. When a call connection is established, according to the service type, the Ater timeslots of 16 kbit/s are allocated if the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface; the Ater timeslots of 8 kbit/s are allocated if the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface. In this way, the resources on the Ater interface can be fully used and the resources can be saved by over 75%.
Dependency
1.19.2 GBFD-1802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the connection of the SS7 signaling system and the MSC. The SS7 signaling system adopts 14-digit signaling point code. The signaling point code includes three parts: macro cell code, zone code and signaling point code.
Benefits
The signaling point code has different code modes based on different countries and areas. Generally, it is classified into two types: 14-digit (international) and 24-digit (national) signaling code modes. Huawei GBSS supports both code modes. This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature conforms to the requirements of different signaling systems, thus facilitating the use of networking in different countries and areas. The equipment transferred to the area using different code modes can still be used.
Description
This feature supports 14-digit international signaling point.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 103 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The code capacity of 14-digit signaling point code is 16,384 codes. 14-digit signaling point code is classified into three parts: macro cell code, zone code and signaling point code. 24-digit signaling point code is applied in China since 1990. It is also called uniform code or one-layer code. This code specifies that all the signaling points of the SS7 signaling network in China must use 24-digit signaling point code. According to the actual situation, 24-digit signaling point code is classified into three signaling zones in terms of the structure. That is, eight digits for codes of main signaling zone, eight digits for codes of sub-signaling zone, and eight digits for signaling point codes. In the signaling network, a signaling point communicates with other signaling points through the signaling point code. The signaling point code identifies the signaling points that can communicate with the signaling points in a signaling network. To facilitate the management of the signaling network, the CCITT specifies in Rec. Q705 that the international signaling network and other national signaling networks of different countries should be independently deployed. Therefore, the signaling point codes are also independent. In Rec. Q708, the plan of the international signaling point code is specified. In addition, the national signaling point codes of different countries can be determined by the administrative department according to the actual situations of different countries. The countries can adopt 14-digit signaling point code or 24-digit signaling point code as required.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.19.3 GBFD-1803 Circuit Management

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSC supports the remote management of the TC subrack (the local independent O&M of the TC subrack is not supported), and thus implements the circuit management of the A interface.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 104 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The circuit management involves circuit assignment, blocking, unblocking, circuit group blocking, and unblocking of the A interface. This feature is to control the maintenance of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits or the whole PCM circuit group. When the TC subrack is configured on the BSC side, the circuit management of the A interface can be performed directly.
Benefits
On the aspects of the maintenance operation and transmission quality, the remote circuit management enables the operators to provide the value-added service for subscribers and thus enhances the network quality. Huawei GBSS provides all the functions of the circuit management through the LMT, thus facilitating the remote maintenance of the TC subrack such as the debugging and problem locating. Compared with the independent O&M of the TC subrack, this feature improves the efficiency of the O&M and reduces the O&M cost.
Description
Huawei GBSC supports the circuit management of the A interface, which involves the circuit assignment, blocking, circuit group blocking, and unblocking of the A interface. This feature provides the following functions:

Controls the maintenance of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits or the whole PCM circuit group. Provides the blocking or unblocking of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits caused by the intervention of the LMT or equipment fault. Provides the blocking or unblocking of the circuit group of the terrestrial circuits caused by the intervention of the LMT or equipment fault. Provides the message retransmission mechanism when the terrestrial circuit management message (circuit blocking, unblocking, or reset) is sent and no response is received within the predefined period. Supports the uninstalled circuit function.
Circuit assignment of the A interface: During a call or the handover, the circuits of the A interface that are specified in the MSC signaling can be allocated and occupied. After the circuits are allocated and occupied, the BSC sends an Assignment Complete message to the MSC. Circuit blocking: When the circuit on the BSS side is unavailable, the BSC should notify the MSC that the circuit is changed to unavailable. This process uses the circuit blocking function. The message of the A interface blocking contains the circuit identification code (CIC) used by the circuits of the A interface. The statuses of the circuits on both sides of the A interface keeps consistent through the circuit blocking function. Circuit unblocking: When the fault of the BSC is rectified or the circuit status is available, the BSC should notify the MSC of the change in the circuit status. The message of the A interface unblocking contains a circuit of the A interface, which is identified by the CIC. Circuit group blocking:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 105 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description When several circuits of the A interface need to be blocked, the command to block the circuit group is used. The command includes multiple A interface circuits, which are identified by the CICs. Circuit group unblocking: When several circuits of the A interface need to be unblocked, the command to unblock the circuit group is used. The command includes multiple A interface circuits, which are identified by the CICs. Uninstalled circuit: During the circuit blocking, unblocking, reset, assignment, incoming BSC handover, or BSC reset procedure, if the specified circuit does not exist, the BSC will send an uninstalled circuit message to the MSC. Circuit reset: When the local fault occurs on the system, use this function to restore the circuit status information of the BSC or MSC (for example, abnormal SCCP connection release). If a circuit becomes idle after abnormal SCCP connection release, the BSC will notify the MSC of its status.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs The circuit group blocking and unblocking should be supported by the CN.
1.19.4 GBFD-1804 A Interface Protocol Process

Availability
Summary
Huawei BSS supports the A interface-based signaling and protocol processing, which is a basic signaling function specified in the GSM specifications.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 106 of 368
Benefits
Huawei BSS supports the A interface-based signaling and protocol processing, which conform to the international protocol. With this feature, Huawei BSS can be interconnected with the CN of other vendors that complies with the GSM specifications. In addition, operators can perform the evaluation and bidding in an efficient way, thus preventing monopoly and reducing the operation cost.
Description
Huawei BSS implements the A interface-based signaling and protocol process, which supports the following functions:

Connectionless and connection-oriented SCCP services RR layer connection, MM layer connection and message sending Transparent transmission of the DTAP message on the A interface Incoming/outgoing handover Internal handover Handover candidate query Paging procedure Flow control Traffic access control Classmark update Connection release Encryption mode control process MS message initialization Data link control Message check Circuit group Processing of abnormal SCCP connection Queuing
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 107 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The CN should comply with the standard protocols.
1.19.5 GBFD-1805 A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring

Availability
Summary
This feature is to monitor the real-time status and usage of the circuits on the A interface and TC resources through performance measurement.
Benefits
A interface occupation rate monitoring is an important feature for ensuring the network quality. This feature provides the following benefits for the operators:

Learn the usage of the circuit resources of the A interface in time, thus providing a basis for the system capacity expansion. Know about the distribution status of the circuit resources of the A interface in time. Coordinate the configuration of transmission resources among different networks. Add, reduce, and re-allocate the transmission resources on the basis of the usage of resources, thus reducing the network operation cost. Find the defects of the network planning, thus improving the principles and methods of the existing network planning.
Description
This feature is to monitor the usage of the circuits on the A interface and TC resources through performance measurement of the BSC. The reports on the occupation rate of the circuit on the A interface and TC resources make the operators know better about the usage of present resources. When the circuit occupation rate exceeds the preset threshold, the system will automatically report an alarm, reminding the user of expanding the capacity of the A interface according to the actual situation. The operators add or reduce the circuit resources of the A interface based on the usage of the circuit resources of the A interface, thus providing better services for subscribers.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 108 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-1201 Performance Management GBFD-1205 BSC Alarm Dependency on other NEs None.
1.19.6 GBFD-1806 STP (Signaling Transport Point)

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the signaling transfer function based on the SCCP/M3UA, which supports a maximum of 32 signaling transfer points (STP).
Benefits
With the development of mobile communications, the networking modes of the core network, transport network, and access network are more flexible. Huawei GBSS supports this feature to meet the requirements of the operators in terms of the networking mode. Through this feature, more flexible networking mode can be supported. This feature provides the following benefits:

Implements the transfer between the CN and the BSC signaling through the MGW, thus separating the signaling plane from the user plane. Implements different levels of the transmission security, thus ensuring the security of the core service in an efficient way and reducing the transmission cost.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports the signaling transfer function on the A interface based on the SCCP/M3UA. Through this feature, the BSC can be connected to the MGW through the signaling transfer mode, thus providing more transmission networking modes. Currently, the GBSS supports a maximum of 32 STPs. In the case of 24-digit signaling point, the value of STP code ranges from 0x1 to 0xFFFFF1. In the case of 14-digit signaling point, the value of STP code ranges from 0x1 to 0x03FF1. The STP codes should be different from the codes of the existing OSP, STP, or DSP.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 109 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-1201 Performance Management GBFD-1205 BSC Alarm Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the CN.
1.20 Supporting Three-Digit MNC

1.20.1 GBFD-1901 Supporting Three-Digit MNC
Availability
Summary
This feature supports both 3-digit and 2-digit MNCs.
Benefits
This feature meets the networking requirements of the operator whose MNC is 3 digits.
Description
MNC can be configured as 3 digits or 2 digits according to the network planning. For the countries and areas with multiple mobile networks, 2-digit MNC cannot specify all the networks. In this case, 3-digit MNC can be adopted. The number of networks specified by the MNC is increased from 100 to 1000.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 110 of 368
1.21 Base Energy Saving

1.21.1 GBFD-4802 Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
Availability
Summary
Discontinuous Reception (DRX) means that the MS monitors the messages in the specified timeslots according to the parameters configured in the system. This reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time of the MS.
Benefits
This feature greatly reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time of the MS.
Description
If the MS in idle mode selects a cell as its serving cell, it can listen to the paging message in the cell. The DRX is introduced to reduce the power consumption of the MS. That is, each MS (corresponding to an IMSI) corresponds to a dedicated paging group. Each paging group corresponds to a paging sub-channel of the cell. The MS can calculate its paging group according to the last three digits of the IMSI and the configuration of the paging channels of the serving cell, and thus calculates the location of the paging sub-channel of this paging group. In idle mode, the MSs of a paging group listen to the paging messages only on the fixed paging sub-channel (during this period, it can also monitor the receive level of the BCCH TRX of the non-serving cell) and ignore the paging messages on other paging sub-channels or even shut down some hardware devices. This can reduce the power consumption of the MS, provided that the necessary network message measurement task is implemented within a certain period. The number of paging sub-channels of each cell can be calculated according to the CCCH type, BS AG BLKS RES (in 51 multi-frames, some data blocks are used for the AGCH block), and BS PA MFRMS (the number of 51 multi-frames used for a paging on the paging sub-channel). In the GSM system, the CCCH is classified into the AGCH and the PCH. The main function of the CCCH is to send immediate assignment messages and paging messages. The CCCH can be borne by a physical channel or multiple physical channels. The CCCH can share a physical channel with the SDCCH. The combination of the CCCH in the cell is determined by the parameter CCCH CONF. The settings of CCCH CONF must be consistent with the actual configurations. When the cell has only one TRX, it is recommended that the CCCH shares a physical channel with the SDCCH (meanwhile, there are three CCCH message blocks). In some cases, the paging traffic in an LA is excessively high, and one physical channel is insufficient for sending paging messages. Therefore, the GSM specifications specify that the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 111 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description BCCH TRX can be configured with multiple CCCHs, but the CCCHs can only be configured on timeslots 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and the BTS.
1.22 STM-1 Optical Transmission Interface

1.22.1 GBFD-2001 STM-1 Optical Transmission Interface
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the channelized STM-1/OC-3 port on the A/Abis/Pb/Ater interface for the networking.
Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits: This feature simplifies the cabling of the equipment room and reduces the maintenance workload during the network deployment and reconstruction. The A/Ater interface supports the STM-1 port, this improves the system integration and reduces the device cost.
Description
STM-1 is a port defined in the SDH optical transmission standards (In the SONET optical transmission standards, it is defined as OC-3.) It supports data transmission of 155 Mbit/s on the single optical fiber.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 112 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The BSC6000 supports the channelized STM-1/OC-3 port on the A, Abis, Pb, Ater interface for the networking. Each STM-1/OC-3 channel can be divided into 63 E1 links or 83 T1 links. In addition, the BSC6000 supports APS 1+1 protection mode. When the channel becomes faulty, the system can automatically enable the channel protection. In this way, the single point failure of the optical transmission link can be avoided effectively. This feature can greatly simplify the cabling of the equipment room and the maintenance of the devices and cables. In addition, this can improve the system integration and processing capability of the single subrack.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware This feature should be supported by the STM-1 board. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.23 Message Tracing

1.23.1 GBFD-2201 Interface Message Tracing
Availability
Summary
With this feature, you can trace messages on the Um, A, Pb, or BSC-CBC interface in real time, save the tracing messages, and review the tracing result.
Benefits

The system can initiate the call procedure and perform the tracing and maintenance of the related signaling links without test devices. This feature helps the maintenance personnel locate and solve problems, thus improving the efficiency of the maintenance.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 113 of 368
Description
With this feature, the GBSS can trace messages in real time, stop updating, save the tracing messages, review the tracing result, and check the time when the message is sent. In this way, the maintenance personnel can accurately locate and solve problems. In addition, all the interfaces have the condition filtering function. Therefore, the maintenance personnel can reduce the message tracing through condition filtering and thus improve the accuracy of the tracing. The A interface traces messages of the BSSAP, MTP2, MTP3, and SCCP as required. The BSSAP messages can be filtered according to the message types such as the BSSMAP, paging message, and DTAP messages. You can also select and trace messages according to the cell. The Abis interface can trace the RSL, OML, and LAPD messages. You can filter the LAPD messages according to the site and TRX number. The RSL messages can be filtered according to the message type, such as the MR, paging, and channel request. The OML messages can also be filtered according to the message type. The Pb interface can trace the application layer message and the LAPD message. The LAPD message can be selected and traced according to the timeslot number. The application layer message can be traced according to the message type such as paging. In addition, you can also select and filter the application layer message according to the site number. According to the message layer or the logical object, all the interfaces can filter the messages. In this way, the tracing of the maintenance signaling can be greatly reduced, and the accuracy of the tracing can be improved to accelerate the problem locating.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0 Tracing on the Gb interface: SIG messages can be traced on the Gb interface according to the NSEI. In addition, the Gb interface can trace PTP messages according to the site, cell or NSEI+BVCI. PS message tracing on the Um interface: The PS messages can be traced on the Um interface according to the specific TRX or cell. The message types consist of the dummy message, system message, dummy paging message, and data block message. GBSS8.1 VGCS/VBS message tracing: The VGCS or VBS message can be traced on the A, Abis, or Um interface. In this case, all the messages can be resolved.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 114 of 368
1.23.2 GBFD-2202 User Signaling Tracing

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the signaling of an MS can be traced on the BSS side. In a tracing window, the signaling of an MS in the BSS can be traced. In addition, you can manage the tracing task, save the messages, and review the tracing result.
Benefits

The tracing of the test MS provides more accurate test data for the drive test (DT) or other tests. In this way, the test efficiency and accuracy are greatly improved. With the tracing of an MS, the message can be traced accurately, the number of traced and analyzed messages is reduced, and the efficiency of the problem locating is improved. In addition, the tracing of a specific MS can provide more accurate data that serves as a reference for the test process.
Description
The tracing of an MS is performed through entering the characteristic words of the called MS for tracing the signaling of the calling MS. The characteristic words are IMSI, TMSI, MSISDN, and IMEI. The host decodes the signaling of each call, and then the signaling of this call is returned to the LMT for display, provided that the information of the MS is consistent with the characteristic words of the MS to be traced. This feature traces the signaling of an MS on the A or Abis interface, saves the messages, and reviews the tracing result. In this way, a large number of messages traced on the A or Abis interface c an be avoided, thus improving the efficiency of solving the problem and facilitating the problem locating of an MS. The system can trace up to 16 MSs at the same time. The signaling of an MS on the A or Abis interface can be traced individually. When the signaling on the Abis is traced, you can determine whether to trace the MR.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 PS tracing of an MS: You can perform the PS tracing of an MS by entering the characteristic words of the MS to be traced such as IMSI, P-TMSI, and TLLI. The BSC decodes the signaling of each call, and then the signaling of this call is returned to the LMT for display, provided that the information of the MS is consistent with the characteristic words of the MS to be traced. This feature traces the signaling of an MS on the Gb or Abis interface, saves the messages, and reviews the tracing result. In this way, the message tracing on the Gb or Abis interface can be avoided,
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 115 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description thus improving the efficiency of solving the problem and facilitating the problem locating of an MS. The tracing of VGCS/VBS message by group: The VGCS/VBS message can be traced according to the group call reference (5 digits for the group call zone and 3 digits for the group ID). The messages can be filtered according to the type of VGCS or VBS and the interface type of A, Abis, or Um interface.
Dependency
1.23.3 GBFD-2203 Cell Tracing

Availability
Summary
With this feature, you can trace all the signaling of multiple calls in a cell. In this way, the maintenance personnel can locate the problem in an efficient way.
Benefits
When you handle the voice problems, especially the problems related to the signaling procedure and performance, you need to analyze the signaling on the A or Abis interface. The common methods are drive test (DT) or dialing test. Together with the traced data obtained by the signaling unit, the signaling can be analyzed. This process, however, is very complex and the cost is high. The cell tracing log facilitates the network problem location. You can directly trace calls in the existing network, and thus save the cost of the DT and dialing test for locating the problem.
Description
You can issue the cell tracing command on the M2000 to trace the calls of a specific cell. A maximum of 16 calls in the specific cell can be traced at a time. The cell tracing feature applies the first-in first-tracing principle. After a tracing task is started, the first accessed 16 calls in the traced cell are traced. If a call is complete, a newly accessed call is traced.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 116 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description You can choose the cells to be traced on the basis of the CELLID. The GBSC supports saving and review of the tracing log. You can also choose to trace only the signaling on the A or Abis interface. When the message on the Abis interface is traced, you can determine whether to trace the MR.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.24 Remote EAC Maintenance

1.24.1 GBFD-2301 Remote EAC Maintenance
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the remote EAC maintenance.
Benefits

Improves the maintenance efficiency Reduces the O&M cost for the operators
Description
The remote EAC maintenance feature allows the users to query data, set parameters, and run commands on the BTS environment monitor device through the LMT. After the EAC is configured, 32-channel Boolean value input/digital value input, 8-channel digital value output, and 8-channel analog input are supported. In addition, the burglar alarm, temperature alarm, humidity alarm, fire alarm, and other alarms are also supported. This
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 117 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description feature allows the users to query data, set parameters and execute commands on the BTS environment monitor device through the LMT, including reset and clear the burglar alarm, set the thresholds of the temperature and humidity, set the alarm, and query the temperature or humidity. When the environment alarm is generated, it should be reported to the central equipment room, and then notify the maintenance personnel of further processing. The EAC can be maintained remotely, thus improving the maintenance efficiency.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.25 Cell Frequency Scan

1.25.1 GBFD-2401 Cell Frequency Scan
Availability
Summary
With this feature, you can test the uplink interference on the basis of the traffic measurement without the test device.
Benefits
The maintenance personnel can test the uplink interference without the test device. In this way, the accuracy of the frequency configuration is improved and an overview of the uplink interference is provided. Operators can evaluate the electromagnetic environment without the addition of devices, which is an observation method of network planning and optimization. This feature improves the maintenance efficiency and reduces the O&M cost for operators.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 118 of 368
Description
This feature uses the idle TCH to test uplink receive level of all the frequencies of the specified frequency band. Engineers can use this result to select a proper operating frequency. This feature is introduced to Huawei products for testing the interference. Because this feature scans the uplink level, the result indicates the signal strength of the frequency in the cell. Engineers can use the result to select a proper operating frequency. The GBSS implements the cell frequency scanning on the basis of the traffic measurement result. Under the condition that the call is not affected, the feature uses an idle frame in a TCH in the cell (the TCH in the BCCH TRX is assigned preferably) to periodically scan the uplink receive level of specified frequencies. It takes about one minute to scan 50 frequencies. A frequency scan task can register up to 124 frequencies. It takes about three minutes to traverse all the frequencies. The result of the frequency scanning is the average value of the uplink receive levels scanned from the beginning of the scan task to the end of the scan task. The uplink frequency scan feature is to test the interference level that affects the uplink receive quality in the radio environment. It can measure the uplink interference of a specific frequency.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.26 TCH Re-assignment

1.26.1 GBFD-2501 TCH Re-assignment
Availability
Summary
The TCH re-assignment specifies that the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after a TCH assignment fails.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 119 of 368
Benefits

Minimizes the impact on the call continuity caused by the fault of a TRX channel, and thus ensures a successful first dialing. Greatly reduces the assignment failure caused by the frequency interference in a cell, and thus minimize the impact on the call continuity and improve the servic e quality.
Description
During a call, the BSC assigns a TCH to the MS after receiving an assignment request message from the MSC. Then, the assignment command is issued to the MS through the Um interface. If the TCH assignment fails because of various causes such as the co-channel interference, the BSC re-assigns another TCH to the MS instead of sending an assignment failure message to the MSC. If the TCH re-assignment is successful, the BSC sends an assignment complete message to the MSC; otherwise, the BSC sends an assignment failure message to the MSC.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.27 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment

1.27.1 GBFD-3001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment
Availability
Summary
SDCCH dynamic adjustment is to dynamically adjust the number of SDCCHs according to the load of the TCHs and SDCCHs. In this way, the effect of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system is minimized, and radio resources are fully utilized.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 120 of 368
Benefits

Optimizes the usage of the TCHs and SDCCHs and reduces the occurrence of SDCCH congestion. Minimizes the impact of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system, reduces the requirements on the accuracy of the estimation of the SDCCH, and reduces the workload for changing the configuration. Reduces the call access failure caused by the congestion of the SDCCH, improves the call access rate, and increases the operator revenue.
Description
Through the SDCCH dynamic adjustment, the occurrence of SDCCH congestion is reduced, and the impact of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system performance is minimized. In normal cases, the demands on the SDCCH are calculated on the basis of the traffic model. That is, current traffic distribution and related statistics. The increase of the SMS service, however, leads to the more demands on the SDCCH. Thus, the prediction on the demanded SDCCHs becomes very complex. If the number of MSs in a cell increases sharply in a short time, many MSs fail to access the network due to no SDCCH available. In this case, the SDCCH dynamic adjustment feature can convert the TCH into the SDCCH dynamically to make more MSs access the network. The dynamic adjustment of SDCCH takes cell as unit. If the SDCCH dynamic adjustment is allowed, the system automatically converts the TCH into the SDCCH, provided that the following conditions are met:

The number of idle SDCCHs is lower than or equal to the threshold of the idle SDCCH. The number of SDCCHs in a cell is lower than or equal to the maximum number of SDCCHs in a cell. The number of idle TCHs in a cell is higher than four or the number of TRXs configured in a cell. At the same time, the BSC sends the configuration command to the BTS to convert the TCH into the SDCCH, and updates the channel table of the BSC.
When the number of SDCCHs is higher than the defined threshold after the TCH Minimum Recovery Time, the SDCCHs are converted into the TCHs. Forced restoration of SDCCH: If you disable the SDCCH/TCH dynamical adjustment feature, all the SDCCHs converted from TCH are restored to their original form (TCH). This feature can reduce the requirement on the accuracy of the estimation of the demand on SDCCH, and reduce the workload for changing the configuration. In addition, it can increase the system capacity and the call access rate, thus increasing the profits of operators.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 121 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.28 Support of Daylight Saving Time

1.28.1 GBFD-6101Support of Daylight Saving Time
Availability
Summary
The BSS supports the daylight saving time (DST), which can be configured and queried to meet the requirements of the countries where the daylight saving time is applied.
Benefits
In normal cases, the DST is one hour earlier than the standard time. With this feature, the system time can be automatically changed without manual intervention according to the specified rules.
Description
Huawei BSS can set and query the time zone and DST change rules on the M2000 or LMT. With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or hybrid configuration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain date in a certain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day of a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 122 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.29 MML
1.29.1 GBFD-6501 Man Machine Language (MML)
Availability
Summary
The BSS supports NE operation and maintenance through MML commands.
Benefits
MML stands for man machine language. In the daily operation and maintenance, compared with GUI, MML is more effective and supports the scripts. This feature provides the following benefits:

Supports the maintenance of the BSS through MML commands. Maintains one or more NEs through MML scripts.
Description
The BSS supports NE operation and maintenance through entering MML commands on the M2000 or LMT. Compared with GUI, MML is more effective. You can configure and maintain multiple NEs by entering MML scripts or performing multiple operations on one NE. MML improves maintenance efficiency, reduces improper manual operations, and greatly reduces O&M cost of operators.
The MML command supports the following operation modes:

Entering MML commands and parameters directly. Entering MML commands and parameters through the GUI. Providing the MML batch processing function. Many MML commands are written in a file. The LMT reads the MML commands in the file and executes these commands automatically. Instant and timed batch processing. Recording the MML commands and saving the results of the execution of the MML commands automatically. Recording operations in the operation logs. MML pre-activation.
The MML command supports the following operations:

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 123 of 368

Configuring data, including the BTS data using the MML commands. Performing alarm maintenance functions such as browsing, querying, and manually recovering alarms, configuring environment alarms, and shielding alarms using MML commands. Maintaining BSC devices, transmission devices, signaling links, and interfaces. That is, using the MML commands, you can maintain the BSC and transmission devices, such as status query and board switchover. Maintaining BTS boards and TRXs. Collecting data files (including logs, performance files, and alarm files) to the LMT. Performing security management functions such as adding, deleting, and modifying user information, managing rights of the users, and querying operation logs. Performing software management functions such as upgrading the BSC software, BTS software, patches, and maintaining the BIOS and license. Performing other functions such as setting time and DST.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.30 Built-in PCU Function

1.30.1 GBFD-9001 Gb Interface Function
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the processing of PS services in the BSC, that is, the built-in PCU function.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 124 of 368
Benefits
The Gb interface is introduced to Huawei GBSS, which can support the processing of PS services, that is, the built-in PCU function. The external PCU is not required. In this way, the device integration is greatly improved, the occupied space is smaller, and the energy consumption is lower. The processing specifications of the built-in PCU are greater than the processing specifications of the external PCU. This helps operators process PS services in an efficient way. The LMT is shared by the built-in PCU and the BSC. This reduces the O&M cost of operators.
Description
For GBSS8.0 and later versions, PS services can be processed directly in the BSC, that is, the built-in PCU function. As a basic feature, the Gb interface is introduced to support uplink and downlink NS SDU transmission specified in the GSM specifications, load sharing, LLC PDU transmission, packet paging, radio access capability indication, radio access capability update, radio status indication, GPRS service suspension, recovery, Flush LL, flow control, and BVC blocking or reset.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS Dependency on other NEs None.
1.30.2 GBFD-9118 Resource Pool of the Packet Service Board

Availability
Summary
When the BSC6000 is configured with the built-in PCU, the GSM Data Processing Unit for PS service (GDPUP) is used as a resource pool.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 125 of 368
Benefits
This feature implements the load balancing and resource sharing of the PS service processing module. It improves the robustness of the system through the redundancy configuration.
Description
To ensure that Huawei BSC6000 works reliably, the GDPUP supports the resource pool mode so that load balanc ing and resource sharing are achieved. The GDPUP adopts N+1 redundancy backup for the whole system. That is, the whole system is configured with a redundant GDPUP on the basis of configuration of N GDPUPs. N+1 GDPUPs work simultaneously and share the processing of PS services in the entire system. Load balancing and alternate selection are applicable to the allocation of all the GDPUPs of the BSC in the shared resource pool. When one GDPUP is faulty, the availability of services is not affected. Through the redundancy configuration in the system design, the availability of the GDPUPs is greatly improved, and thus the stability of the system is ensured. When a faulty GDPUP is detected or some DSPs on the GDPUP become faulty, the system will automatically attempt to rectify the fault and generate an alarm. In GDPUP resource pool mode, packet cells can be distributed in the BSC. Cells can be distributed in one or different subracks.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS Dependency on other NEs None.
1.30.3 GBFD-9101 Packet Channel Combination Type

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the packet channel combination type specified in the GSM specifications.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 126 of 368
Benefits

This feature supports the packet channel combination type specified in the GSM specifications. According to the actual situation, operators determine whether to activate the PBCCH. Then, adjust the rate of the PDTCH in a flexible way to perform the network planning properly.
Description
According to 3GPP TS 43.064, the packet channel is classified into the following types:
Packet Broadcast Control Channel (PBCCH) The PBCCH is used only on the downlink. It broadcasts specific system information. If the PBCCH is not available, the BCCH takes the roles of system information broadcasting. Packet Common Control Channel (PCCCH) The PCCCH is the logical channel of common control signaling of the packet data. It is classified into the following channel types: PRACH, PPCH, and PAGCH. Packet Random Access Channel (PRACH): It is used only on the uplink. The MS requests to allocate the PDTCH on this channel. Packet Paging Channel (PPCH): It is used only on the downlink. The BSS pages the MS through the PPCH. The paging group functionality is applied to the PPCH, and the DRX is also supported. The PPCH can be used for paging in CS services as well as in PS services. However, the paging in CS services is applicable to only Class A MS and Class B MS. When the MS is operating in packet transmission mode, the PACCH can be used to page the MS that performs the CS services. Packet Access Grant Channel (PAGCH): It is used only on the downlink. Before the MS starts packet transmission, the PAGCH transmits the allocated resources to the MS, thus enabling the packet transmission. In addition, when the MS is operating in packet transmission mode, the PACCCH can be used to transmit the allocated resources to the MS on the downlink.
Packet Data Traffic Channel (PDTCH): It is used for the data transfer in PS mode. In multislot mode, an MS can use multiple PDTCHs to transfer data. Packet Dedicated Control Channel (PDCCH): It is classified into the PTCCH and the PACCH.
Packet Timing Advance Control Channel (PTCCH) It is used to control the timing advance of the MS. Packet Associated Control Channel (PACCH) It is used to transfer the signaling information. The signaling information consis ts of the verification and the power control information. The PACCH also carries the information about resource allocation and re-allocation, thus enabling the capacity allocation of the PDTCHs or the addition of PACCHs in future. A PACCH can be allocated to one or multiple PDTCHs of an MS. This feature supports the following channel combination:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 127 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Combined PDTCH: PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 GBSS8.1 supports the PBCCH or PCCCH. The following channel combinations are supported:

Combined PBCCH: PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH Combined PCCCH: PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. In the multi-band cell, the PBCCH or PCCCH needs to be configured on the TRX in the compatible frequency band of the BCCH. The PBCCH/PCCCH supports packet data transmission. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-9108 Network Operation Mode Support GBFD-10001 Network Operation Mode I This feature and the following feature are mutually exclusive: If the cell is configured in Network Operation Mode II, the CS paging cannot be sent on the PCCCH. Thus, the PBCCH or PCCCH should not be included in this cell. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.30.4 GBFD-9102 Packet System Information

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the message types of the packet system information specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 128 of 368

This feature supports the message types of the packet system information specified in the GSM specifications and provides the packet access service. Operators adjust the configuration parameters related to the packet system information in a flexible way to control the operation of the network and the MS. For example, the network operation mode enabled by the BSC and the access pulse type of the MS.
Description
Packet System Information (PSI) contains the primary radio network parameters of the Um interface such as network identification parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and network function parameters. The reception of the system information enables the MS to select and access the network properly and to fully utilize multiple services provided by the network. The messages of the packet system information are transmitted on the BCCH or the SACCH. The GPRS service support indication is carried in SI3, SI4, SI7 or SI8, and the parameters related to the GPRS services are carried in SI13. The DTM support information is carried in SI6. SI13 is broadcasted on the BCCH provided that the cell supports GPRS services. The configuration of the PBCCH is optional for a cell. SI13 is received by the MS, indicating whether the PBCCH is configured in a cell. The PBCCH mainly broadcasts the messages of the GPRS packet system information. Messages of the packet system information are PSI1, PSI2, PSI3, PSI3bis, and PSI13. PSI1: Mainly contains the information about the cell selection, PRACH control, control channel, and power control parameter. PSI2: Mainly contains the information such as the reference frequency list, cell allocation table, GPRS mobile allocation table, and PCCCH description. PSI3: Mainly contains the information about the BCCH allocation list of the neighboring cell and cell selection parameters of the serving cell and non-serving cell. PSI3bis: Mainly contains the information about the BCCH allocation list of the neighboring cell and cell selection parameters of the non-serving cell. PSI13: Like SI13 broadcasted on the BCCH, this message mainly contains the access -related information associated with the GPRS cells. PSI1PSI3: These messages can be broadcasted on the PBCCH or the PACCH. PSI13 can be broadcasted only on the PACCH. If the PBCCH is available in a cell, then the PSI13 is not broadcasted on the PACCH. In the case of the MS in the transmission state, PSI1 is periodically broadcasted on the PACCH. If the PBCCH is not available in a cell, then only PSI13 is periodically broadcasted on the PACCH. Huawei BSS allows the transmission of all GPRS-related system information, thus enabling the controlling retransmission, high-speed retransmission, and low-speed retransmission of the system information. In addition, Huawei BSS controls the transmission of the system information on the PACCH based on the actual configuration of the PBCCH or the PCCCH in a cell.
Enhancement
In GBSS8.1, the DTM support information is carried in SI6.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 129 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-9101 Packet Channel Combination Type Dependency on other NEs None.
1.30.5 GBFD-9103 MS Types

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the MS types specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports different types of the MSs specified in the GSM specifications to perform PS services.
Description
Huawei BSC supports the following MS types: Class A MS: The class A MS supports simultaneous attach of GPRS and IMSI, and the MS supports simultaneous operation of GPRS and CS services. Class B MS: The class B MS supports simultaneous attach of GPRS and IMSI, but the MS can operate only one service at a time. Class C MS: The class C MS can access only the GSM or GPRS network at a certain time. If the MS supports both PS and CS services, the services can be only switched over manually and cannot be implemented simultaneously.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 130 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-9108 Network Operation Mode Support Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.
1.30.6 GBFD-9104 MAC Mode

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the MAC mode specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports the MAC mode specified in the GSM specifications. After the MS accesses the network, the USF is scheduled to ensure that the PS services of the MS are processed continuously and multiple MSs can be multiplexed on a PDCH.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports two MAC modes: dynamic allocation and extended dynamic allocation. This feature supports dynamic allocation.
Dynamic allocation The MS in the ready state obtains the USF information by decoding RLC/MAC headers, and then determines whether an uplink radio block or a group of uplink radio blocks are used to transmit data on the PDCH during the period of transmitting the next block. In this way, the BSS can control the uplink access of multiple MSs on a timeslot.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 131 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS The extended dynamic allocation depends on GBFD-9401 EDA. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.30.7 GBFD-9105 RLC Mode

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the RLC mode specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature determines the RLC mode and establishes PS services based on the information contained in the uplink packet resource request sent by the MS or LLC PDU sent by the CN.
Description
Two RLC modes are supported: RLC acknowledged mode and RLC unacknowledged mode. The RLC mode of the uplink T BF is dependent on the type of the service requested by the MS; the RLC mode of the downlink TBF, however, is dependent on the RLC mode of the QoS parameters contained in the downlink LLC PDU. RLC acknowledged mode: In this mode, the receiver acknowledges the received RLC data blocks, and each data block transmitted on the TBF should be acknowledged; otherwise, the sender shall resend the lost blocks. Each data block transmitted on the TBF should be acknowledged until the transmission of all the data is complete and acknowledged. In this case, the TBF can be released. This mechanism ensures the transmission reliability of the RLC data blocks.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 132 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description RLC unacknowledged mode: In this mode, the receiving party acknowledges the received RLC data blocks as in RLC acknowledged mode. The data block, however, does not require the acknowledgment from the sending party. The lost data or erroneously transmitted data are replaced by filling bits. After the data transmission is complete, the TBF can be released.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.30.8 GBFD-9106 Coding Scheme

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the GPRS CS coding schemes specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports GPRS CS-1 and CS-2 specified in the GSM specifications.
Description
According to the GSM specifications, the GPRS can use four coding schemes, namely, CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4. CS-1 and CS-2 have a data rate of 9.05 kbit/s and 13.4 kbit/s (containing the header of the RLC block). This ensures 100% and 90% cell coverage, thus meeting the co-channel interference requirement of C/I = 9 dB. The requirements for the radio transmission quality vary with the transmission rate of the coding schemes. The higher the transmission rate, the higher the requirements for the radio transmission quality. The half-rate and 1/3 rate bits in the RLC blocks of CS-1 and CS-2 are used for the forward error correction (FEC). Thus, the C/I requirement is reduced.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 133 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description During the data transmission, the BSC dynamically adjusts the channel coding or decoding mode according to the retransmission rate of the RLC blocks transmitted on the uplink or downlink TBF. This improves the transmission rate on the basis of guaranteed transmission quality, thus fully utilizing the radio resources. This feature supports CS-1, CS-2, and dynamic adjustment between CS-1 and CS-2.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.
1.30.9 GBFD-9107 Networking Control Mode

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the network control mode specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports the network control mode specified in the GSM specifications. Operators can adjust the network control mode according to the different cell reselection policies.
Description
The following describes three network control modes in cell reselection concerning the relations between the MS, network, and MR. NC0: In this mode, the MS performs autonomous cell reselection without sending the MR to the network.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 134 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description NC1: In this mode, the MS performs autonomous cell reselection and sends the MR to the network. NC2: In this mode, the network controls the cell reselection and the MS sends the MR to the network. In this case, the MS does not perform autonomous cell reselection. This feature supports both NC0 and NC1.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.30.10 GBFD-9108 Network Operation Mode Support

Availability
Summary
This feature supports Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III specified in the GSM specifications. In this way, operators can adjust the network operation mode according to different networking modes and paging policies.
Description
The GSM specifications define three network operation modes according to the paging mode adopted for CS and GPRS services: Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II, and Network Operation Mode III.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 135 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Network Operation Mode I: The BSS sends the CS paging message and the PS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS on the PCH of the CCCH or the PPCH of the PCCCH. In this case, the MS listens to only the PCH or the PPCH. If the PDCH is allocated to the MS, then the BSS sends a CS paging message to the MS on this channel provided that the Gs interface is used and the paging coordination function is enabled. Network Operation Mode II: The BSS sends the CS paging message and the PS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS on the PCH of the CCCH. In this case, the MS listens to only the PCH of the CCCH and the paging coordination function is not required. Network Operation Mode III: The BSS sends a CS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS on the PCH of the CCCH. If a PPCH is configured in a cell, the PS paging message is sent on this channel. Otherwise, the PS paging message is sent on the PCH of the CCCH. If a PPCH is configured in a cell, the MS should listen to the CS paging channel and PS paging channel simultaneous ly. In this case, the paging coordination function is not required. Table 1-1 List of network operation modes Network Operation Mode CS Paging Message PPCH PCH PACCH PCH PCH PCH GPRS Paging Message PPCH PCH Not used PCH PPCH PCH Not required Not required Paging Coordination Required
The network operation mode is sent to the MS through the system information. In addition, the network operation modes should be consistent in a routing area (RA).
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 136 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-9101 Packet Channel Combination Type GBFD-9102 Packet System Information GBFD-9103 MS Types Dependency on other NEs None.
1.30.11 GBFD-9109 QoS (Best Effort)

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the quality of service (QoS) (Best Effort) specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature allocates more resources to the MS, and improves the packet throughput of the MS, thus meeting the requirements of the QoS.
Description
The Quality of Service (QoS) of the GPRS network contains the following specifications : priority, delay level, reliability level, peak throughput level, average throughput level, and guaranteed bit rate. Each specification can be further divided into multiple levels. These specifications are end-to-end requirements of the entire packet data transfer. The specifications involve the radio resources, frame relay link resources on the Gb interface or IP transmission resource, transmission bandwidth of the GPRS backbone network, and processing capability of different GPRS devices. Huawei BSC6000 allocates more resources to the MS with best effort QoS. In addition, the BSC6000 adopts the polling scheduling mode to balance the bandwidth for multiple MSs that are multiplexed on a packet channel.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 137 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS Dependency on other NEs None.
1.30.12 GBFD-9110 Access

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the packet access specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports the packet access initiated by the MS that is specified in the GSM specifications.
Description
The RLC/MAC layer of an MS initiates a packet access if the MS needs to transmit data. The packet access of an MS has the following types: short access, one phase access, two phase access, and single block access without TBF establishment.
Access type selection If less than eight RLC blocks are transmitted, the channel request type of the MS is short access. The number of blocks should be calculated on the basis of CS-1. If more than eight RLC blocks are transmitted and the requested RLC mode is the acknowledged mode, the channel request type of the MS should be one phase access or two phase access. If the data to be sent is an MR, then the channel request type of the MS should be single block access without TBF establishment. The following channel request types are also defined: paging response, cell update, and mobility management. These channel request types are generally processed in one phase access or two phase access manner.
Access procedure Short access and one phase access: Radio resources such as TFI and USF are allocated to the MS after the BSS receives a Packet Channel Request message. Two phase access: A radio block is allocated to the MS after the BSS receives a Packet Channel Request message. The MS sends a Packet Resource Request message on the allocated radio block to request resources. Upon reception of this message, the BSS allocates resources such as TFI and USF to the MS. Then, the MS sends data on the allocated resources.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 138 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The Packet Channel Request message is an 8-bit or 11-bit access burst, which carries a small amount of information. The Packet Resource Request message, however, is an RLC/MAC signaling packet in CS-1 coding scheme. Thus, the two phase access can carry relatively more information (including the TLLI, multislot capability of the MS, and radio priority). This helps allocate appropriate resources to the MS.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.30.13 GBFD-9111 Assignment

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the packet assignment procedure specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports the PS services initiated by the network or MS.
Description
The packet assignment is a process for allocating packet radio resources to the MS and establishing TBF. Huawei BSS supports the uplink or downlink assignment on the CCCH or PACCH. Uplink assignment on the CCCH: When the MS in packet idle mode (no TBF available) initiates an uplink access, the BSS allocates resources to the MS to establish an uplink TBF after receiving a Packet Channel
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 139 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Request message (one phase access) or a Packet Resource Request (two phase access) on the CCCH. Uplink assignment on the PACCH: When the MS is in downlink packet transfer mode, it sends a DOWNLINK ACK message containing the uplink channel request to request the establishment of the TBF. Upon reception of this message, the BSS allocates resources to the MS to establish an uplink T BF. Downlink assignment on the CCCH: When the MS is in packet idle mode (no TBF available), the BSS allocates resources to the MS on the CCCH to establish the downlink TBF after receiving an LLC PDU that is sent from the SGSN to the MS. Downlink assignment on the PACCH: When the MS is in uplink packet transfer mode (uplink TBF available), the BSS allocates resources to the MS on the PACCH to establish the downlink TBF after receiving an LLC PDU that is sent from the SGSN to the MS.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS The PCCCH depends on GBFD-9101 Packet Channel Combination Type. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.30.14 GBFD-9112 Paging

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the GPRS PS paging procedure specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 140 of 368

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports the basic GPRS PS paging procedure, which can establish a packet call initiated by the network.
Description
When the downlink data is sent to the MS, the SGSN needs to initiate a PS paging procedure to accurately locate the MS. The SGSN sends a paging request message to the BSC on the Gb interface. Then, the BSC converts this message into the Packet Paging Request message and sends it to the MS. If the PCCCH is available in the BSC, this message is sent on the PPCH; if the PCCCH is not available in the BSC, this message is sent on the PCH. Upon reception of the Packet Paging Request message, the MS initiates the procedure for establishing an uplink TBF. Then, the MS sends the paging response packet in data form to the BSC on the Um interface and the BSC forwards it to the SGSN. After the SGSN receives the paging response packet, the downlink data is transmitted provided that the paging response packet is processed.
PS paging on the CCCH In Network Operation Mode II, the PS paging is sent on the CCCH. In Network Operation Mode III, the PS paging is sent on the CCCH if the PCCCH is not configured in the cell.
CS paging on the CCCH In Network Operation Mode II or Network Operation Mode III, the CS paging is sent on the CCCH.
This feature supports the paging in Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-9108 Network Operation Mode Support Dependency on other NEs None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 141 of 368
1.30.15 GBFD-9113 Timing Advance Update

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the timing advance (TA) update procedure specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports the basic TA update procedure to ensure that the MS can obtain the correct TA and keep the continuity of the packet call. The TA is a basis for the feature of the packet concentric cell handover.
Description
Huawei BSC6000 supports the continual TA update on the packet timing advanced control channel (PTCCH). In the uplink or downlink assignment message, the BSC allocates TAI to the MS to identify the PTCCH. The MS periodically sends a random access burst on the specified uplink PTCCH and the BSS obtains the TA from the burst and sends it to the MS on the downlink PTCCH. During the initial establishment of the TA, the BSS obtains the TA from the Packet Channel Request message sent by the MS, and sends the Packet Uplink/Downlink Assignment message containing the TA to the MS. The MS uses this TA until the continual timing advance update procedure is complete and a new TA is obtained. TA of packet downlink assignment: If no valid TA can be obtained through the downlink assignment, the BSS sends the packet POLLING message and obtains the TA from the random access burst that is used by the MS.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-4101 GPRS
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 142 of 368
1.30.16 GBFD-9115 Power Control

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the uplink open-loop power control procedure specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature supports the uplink open-loop power control procedure specified in the GSM specifications. Based on the adjustment of the parameter configuration, operators can reduce the MS power consumption and interference in an efficient way, and thus improve the system capacity.
Description
This feature improves the usage of frequencies, increases the system capacity, and reduces the power consumption of the MS. Because there is no continuous bi-directional connection during the transmission of packet data, the power control of the GPRS is more complex. Huawei BSC6000 provides the uplink open-loop power control algorithm. The formula of the algorithm complies with 3GPP TS 45.008. The basic principle of the open-loop power control is to assume that the path loss in the uplink is the same as the path loss in the downlink. Therefore, the MS can adjust the output power based on the receive level.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 143 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description GBFD-4101 GPRS Dependency on other NEs None.
1.30.17 GBFD-9116 Packet Uplink Flow Control

Availability
Summary
This feature is to effectively control the random access on the PRACH or the RACH by prolonging the retransmission interval of the random accesses or prohibiting the access of the MSs of a certain access class.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. This feature ensures the capacity of the BSC and the service quality on the basis of the reasonable flow control of the random access on the PRACH or the RACH.
Description
If excessive MSs request GPRS resources within a cell or BSC at the same time, the GPRS resources may be insufficient and the uplink may be congested. The uplink flow control is used to control the service requests (including the response to paging) that are initiated by the MS, and to delay the response to these service requests. The control of uplink service requests is implemented through the control of the number of random access requests on the PRACH/RACH. The delay of the response to the service requests initiated by the MS is implemented through the queue indication procedure. Decreasing the number of random access requests on the PRACH/RACH is implemented through prolonging the random access retransmission interval or prohibiting the access of the MSs of a certain class. Prolonging the retransmission interval of the random access may affect the response speed and service quality of the system but it helps improve the capacity of the system. Therefore, it is applicable to some suitable situations. Prohibiting the MSs of a certain access class may affect the service quality of the system. In addition, Huawei BSC6000 handles the overload in a policy from the service perspective and the operation perspective. For different types of overloads, there are different handling policies. For example, for the overload of radio resources, the system reduces the load to be processed on the basis of priorities by performing the following steps until the overload problem is solved:

Delay the response to the access request with low QoS or reject the access request with low QoS. Release the TBF of the MS with low QoS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 144 of 368
Take turns to block the MSs of a certain class from accessing the network.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
1.30.18 GBFD-9117 Flow Control on Gb Interface

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the procedure for the flow control on the Gb interface.
Benefits

This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS services. On the basis of the flow control policy of the Gb interface and the parameter configuration, this feature prevents frequent data loss caused by the congestion on the Gb interface or the transmission interruption caused by insufficient flow. This feature enhances the user experience and ensures the packet throughput of the BSS.
Description
Because the physical media and transmission protocols on the Gb interfac e are different from those on the Um interface, the two interfaces have different data transmission rates. The data rate on the Gb interface is greater than that on the Um interface. In addition, the data transmission rate on the downlink on the Um interface is subject to various factors such as the multislot capability of the MS, radio quality, and radio channels available in the cell. In addition, the data transmission rate is unstable. Therefore, the flow control of downlink data is required.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 145 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description When the cell status is normal, the BSC initiates the flow control procedure. The BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the cell according to the radio packet channels in the cell. In addition, the BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the MS according to the res ource occupation of the MS. Based on the reported parameters, the SGSN adjusts the downlink data rates of the cell and of each MS to implement the flow control. The bucket of a cell refers to the maximum packet data storage space that is reserved for the cell. The bucket varies according to the number of packet channels in the cell. The bucket of an MS refers to the maximum packet data storage space that is reserved for the MS. The bucket varies according to the number of channels that are allocated to the MS. When the cell status is normal, the BSC initiates the flow control procedure. The BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the cell according to the radio packet channels in the cell. In addition, the BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the MS according to the resource occupation of the MS. Based on the reported parameters, the SGSN adjusts the downlink data rate of the cell and of each MS to implement the flow control. The bucket rate refers to the data transmission rate. The BSC can perform data flow control in the downlink. It periodically reports the bucket sizes and rates of the current cell and of an MS to the SGSN and adjusts the reported parameters based on the changes in cell packet resources and in the resource occupation of the MS. Downlink flow control involves downlink BVC flow control and downlink MS flow control:
Downlink BVC flow control: The BSC reports the flow control parameters such as the maximum bucket size and the leak rate of the BVC to the SGSN.
Downlink MS flow control: The SGSN reports flow control parameters such as the maximum bucket size and the leak rate of the MS to the SGSN.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 146 of 368
1.31 Security of Operating System

1.31.1 GBFD-1251 SetSuSE Security Customizing Operating System
Availability
Summary
SetSuSE is a system enhancement tool used to avoid security threats and vulnerabilities of the SUSE Linux operating system.
Benefits
The network attack frequently occurs on the Linux operating system and poses a security problem for the Linux operating system. Because of usage of Linux operating systems, the security and stability of the GOMU/GBAM operation are affected. The SetSuSE is to customize the operating system to enhance the security of the system. This feature provides the following benefits:
Based on the implementation of the security solution, the anti-virus and anti-attack capabilities of the system can be improved effectively, and the possibility of the failure-free operation of the system can be enhanced, and thus the service quality of the customers is improved. Based on the system security construction, the workload of maintenance personnel can be reduced, and thus the maintenance efficiency is improved.
Description
SetSuSE is developed to enhance the security of Novell SUSE Linux enterprise server. The security of the system is increased by setting the parameters. It also checks and reports the security risks. The following are the list of policy groups that can be customized by the tool to enhance the security of the operating system.

Reinforce System Services File Permission Kernel Parameter System Authentication Account and Password Logging and Auditing
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 147 of 368
Dependency
1.32 Inter-BSC Connection

1.32.1 GBFD-8621 Connection Inter BSC over IP
Availability
Summary
This feature provides an IP-based connection between BSCs for information exchange.
Benefits

Provides a direct transmission path between BSCs. Provides a direct channel to exchange information between BSCs and enable the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network and IBCA functions.
Description
The IP-based inter-BSC connection enables operators to use IP networks to interconnect the BSCs so that the BSCs can communicate with each other directly. This feature is applicable to the scenarios of inter-BSC information exchange. For example, when the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network or the IBCA is enabled, this feature is required. The inter-BSC connection supports only the inter-BSC signaling switching. The CS or PS is not supported. The BSC must be configured with the IP interface board. Huawei IP interface boards support FE and GE interfaces, which support the IPv4 protocol. The BSCs in the same equipment room may be connected through layer 2 switches. The BSCs in different equipment rooms may be connected through layer 3 switches. The interconnection method depends on the local network planning of the BSC.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 148 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware If Abis over IP or A over IP is adopted, the IP interface boards of two BSCs can be connected through the switches. If Abis over IP or A over IP is not adopted, a pair of IP interface boards need to be added to each BSC. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
1.33 2G and 3G Co-transmission

1.33.1 MRFD-210001 2G and 3G Data Share CPRI Interface
Availability
Summary
2G/3G co-transmission specifies that a cable is shared to transmit GSM/UMTS data between the GTMU or the WBBP and the RFU.
Benefits
For traditional GSM/UMTS dual mode solution, the GSM BTS is co-sited with the UMTS BTS. The RFUs supporting different modes are required, and thus the corresponding cables for different RFUs are also required. In this case, the entire network requires more cables. With this feature, the number of cables required by the CPRI interface is reduced by half in the GSM/UMTS BTS. Therefore, the corresponding installation and maintenance costs of the cables can be saved, and the number of ports on the CPRI interface is reduced. The saved ports can be cascaded to more RF modules, thus saving the optical transmission resources on the CPRI interface.
Description
The CPRI interface is a transmission interface between the GTMU or WBBP and the RFU. The transmission medium is multi-mode or single-mode optical cable.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 149 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description For traditional GSM/UMTS dual mode solution, the GSM BTS is co-sited with the UMTS BTS. The RFUs supporting different modes are required, and thus the corresponding cables for different RFUs are also required. In this case, the entire network requires more cables. As shown in the following figure, the WBBP is a baseband processing unit of the UMTS BTS and there are three CPRI interfaces. The GTMU is a GSM timing and main control unit of the GSM BTS and there are six CPRI interfaces. If the 2G/3G co-transmission is disabled, the CPRI interface on the WBBP should be connected to the CPRI interface on the GTMU through a CPRI cable. In this case, more cables are required. The RF module (multi-mode TRX) adopting the SDR technology can support the co-existence of GSM and UMTS networks. With this feature, only a cable is used for the GSM/UMTS BTS. Therefore, the installation and maintenance costs of the cables are reduced. For details, see the following figure.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 150 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The RFUs of the BTS should support the SDR technology and the current model is RRU3908 or MRFU. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 151 of 368
2
2.1 Coverage Enhancement
Availability
Optional Feature
2.1.1 GBFD-5901 PBT(Power Boost Technology)
Summary
The Power Boost Technology (PBT) enables the DTRU to transmit the combined signals with high gain and to achieve extended network coverage.
Benefits

This feature can realize the mutual transformation between the network coverage and the network capacity. In the initial network deployment stage, the operators can use the PBT to extend the network coverage, thus reducing the number of BTSs. When the subscriber number increases and the network capacity needs to be expanded, operator can transform the PBT-enabled single TRX into two common-mode TRXs, thus protesting the hardware investment.
Description
In the DTRU, two TRXs are integrated into a TRX module that is configured with a combiner. The combiner combines the radio signals of the same frequency and same phrase from two TRXs, and then transmits the combined signals. In this way, the downlink transmit power is higher than the transmit power of the original signals, and the transmit power with high gain is achieved and the downlink coverage is extended.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Page 152 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware With this feature, the two TRXs in the DTRU are used as one TRX. The following BTSs support the PBT: BTS3012, BTS3012AE (DTRU available), BTS3900 or BTS3900A (DRFU available), and DBS3900 (RRU3004 available). Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.1.2 GBFD-5902 Transmit Diversity

Availability
Summary
To enable this feature, the two TRXs in the DTRU are connected to the two separated antenna feeders respectively, and the two antennas transmit the same downlink signal on the same frequency. Through the introduction of the controllable delay and changeable phase between two signals of the two TRXs, the diversity gain in terms of time and space can be obtained, thus enhancing the RX signals and reducing the signal attenuation. This in turn, extends the network coverage.
Benefits

This feature can realize the mutual transformation between the network coverage and the network capacity. This feature can effectively extend the downlink coverage, thus reducing the number of required BTSs. When the requirement for the network coverage decreases and the requirement for the capacity increases, operator can transform the transmit diversity-enabled single TRX into common-mode TRXs.
Description
In the DTRU, two TRXs are integrated into one TRX module. With this feature, the two TRXs on the DTRU transmit the correlated signals of the same carrier. This provides two independent multi-path signals for the downlink. Then, the two independent multi-path signals are processed by the equalizer of the MS. In this way, the diversity gain is obtained, and the quality of the receive signal is improved. Therefore, the downlink coverage is
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 153 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description improved. When the DTRU works in single TRX mode, the BTS can enable this feature through data configuration.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The two TRXs enabling the transmit diversity work as only a TRX. In addition, at least a pair of dual-polarized antenna feeders or two pairs of single-polarized antenna feeders are required. The following BTSs support the transmit diversity: BTS3012, BTS3012AE (DTRU available), BTS3006C or BTS3002E (DDRM available), BTS3900 or BTS3900A (DRFU available), and DBS3900 (RRU3004 or RRU3008 available). Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.1.3 GBFD-5903 4-Way Receiver Diversity

Availability
Summary
The 4-way receiver diversity technology allows four antennas (four uni-polarized antennas or two dual-polarized antennas) to receive the muti-path uplink signals from one cell. Then the received signals are combined. Compared with two-way receiver diversity, four-way receiver diversity can improve the receive sensitivity, thus extending the uplink coverage.
Benefits
The 4-way receiver diversity technology can enhance the uplink RX signal strength by increasing the receive gain of the BTS antennas without increasing the transmit power of the MS. In this way, the cell coverage is extended and the improved QoS can be achieved.
Description
The coverage of a cell is determined by the transmit power of the BTS and MS, and the receive gain of the BTS antenna. Because the transmit power of an MS is much lower than that of a BTS, in most cases, the actual coverage is lower than the designed value and the voice quality deteriorates.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 154 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description With appropriate design, the 4-way receiver diversity technology allows one TRX module to receive the uplink signals from four RX channels and then combine the uplink signals to achieve better signal quality and demodulation performance. Thus, the receive sensitivity is improved, and the receive effect is much better than that of none receiver diversity and that of two-way receiver diversity.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The cell to which 4-way receiver diversity is applied must be configured with two dual-polarized antennas or four uni-polarized antennas. Currently, this feature is supported by the following types of BTSs: BTS3012/BTS3012AE configured with the DTRU, BTS3006C/BTS3002E configured with the DDRM, and BTS3900/BTS3900A configured with the DRFU. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.1.4 GBFD-8101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity

Availability
Summary
Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity.
Benefits
Currently, the TRX-based transmit diversity is applied. In this case, a double-transceiver unit is used as a single-transceiver unit. However, timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage. Dynamic transmit diversity makes fully use of idle timeslots and expands the coverage in the areas with weak signals, such as at cell borders, indoors, or in cars. This feature helps save network resources and capacity. Based on actual network conditions, the application on some timeslots helps expand the coverage and improve the downlink output capacity, thus balancing the traffic volume and coverage.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 155 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Dynamic transmit diversity can increase the handover success rate of the MSs at the border of a cell. This is mainly used to improve the concentric performance when the co-BCCH function is enabled.
Description
Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity. One MS occupies one TCH during a call, and the voice quality is monitored by the MR.
If the voice quality of an MS is lower than the preset threshold, the network enables dynamic transmit diversity to assign the same timeslots on two adjacent TRXs to the MS. The signals transmitted on the two timeslots are the same, and the phases are also identical. The signals are sent out through different transmit ports and then enhanced through signal combination. Thus, the receive quality of the signals is improved. If the channel of the same timeslot of the adjacent TRX is occupied by an MS, the intra-cell handover is performed to switch the MS to an idle channel so that the adjacent channel can be used for dynamic transmit diversity. The receive quality of the MS that is switched to an idle channel is good. Therefore, no call drop occurs during the handover. If the voice quality is higher than the preset threshold, the network disables dynamic transmit diversity and then releases the adjacent channel.
Compared with common transmit diversity, dynamic transmit diversity does not decrease the capacity by half. It can achieve a balance between capacity and coverage and realize flexible conversion.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The cell to which dynamic transmit diversity is applied must be configured with a minimum of one dual-polarized antenna or two uni-polarized antennas. Currently, this feature is supported by the following types of BTSs:

BTS3012/BTS3012AE configured with the DTRU BTS3006C/BTS3002E configured with the DDRM BTS3900/BTS3900A configured with the DRFU DBS3900 configured with the RRU3004 or RRU3008
Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 156 of 368
2.1.5 GBFD-8102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)

Availability
Summary
Dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) is a timeslot-based PBT.
Benefits
Currently, the TRX-based PBT is applied. In this case, a double-transceiver unit is used as a single-transceiver unit. However, the timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage. Dynamic PBT makes fully use of idle timeslots and expands the coverage in the areas with weak signals, such as at cell borders, indoors, or in cars. This feature helps save network resources and capacity. Based on actual network conditions, this feature helps achieve the balance between traffic volume and coverage. Dynamic PBT can increase the handover success rate of the MSs at the border of a cell. This is mainly used to improve the concentric performance when the co-BCCH function is enabled.
Description
Dynamic PBT is timeslot-based PBT. One MS occupies one TCH during a call, and the voice quality is monitored by the MR.
If the signal strength of an MS is lower than the preset threshold, the network enables dynamic PBT. In this case, the channels corresponding to the same timeslot of two TRXs in one TRX module cannot be assigned to the MSs; whereas the RF channels serving as backup channels can provide PBT service. The signals and the phases of the traffic timeslot in the RF channel are the same as those of the same timeslot in the same TRX module of the backup channel. The signals are strengthened after the combination, and thus the signal strength of MSs is enhanced. If the channel of the same timeslot of the adjacent TRX is occupied by an MS, the intra-cell handover is performed to switch the MS to an idle c hannel so that the adjacent channel can be used for dynamic PBT. The receive quality of the MS that is switched to an idle channel is good. Therefore, no call drop occurs during the handover. If the signal strength of an MS is higher than the preset threshold, the network disables dynamic PBT. Then, the borrowed channel is restored to the idle state and provides access services.
Compared with common PBT, dynamic PBT does not decrease the capacity by half. It can achieve a balance between capacity and coverage and realize flexible conversion.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 157 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware Currently, dynamic PBT is supported by the following types of BTSs:

BTS3012/BTS3012AE configured with the DTRU BTS3900/BTS3900A configured with the DRFU DBS3900 configured with the RRU3004
Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.2 Wide Coverage

2.2.1 GBFD-4001 Extended Cell
Availability
Summary
The application of extended cell breaks the coverage limit of 35 km of a GSM cell. This helps operators to provide wider coverage in special areas.
Benefits
The extended cell extends the coverage of the BTS and enables MSs to perform services in long-distance areas, such as in vast plains and seas. In this way, the scope of network services is extended and the network quality is improved.
Description
According to the GSM specifications, the maximum TA of a cell on the radio interface is 63 bits. Hence, the coverage radius of a cell cannot exceed 35 km. In the vast and sparsely populated areas where the traffic is low and the transmission and power supply facilities are unavailable, the cells with a coverage radius greater than 35 km are required. The extended cell crosses the limit of 35 km of normal cells. With the support of the BTS hardware, extended cell can even implement the coverage radius of 120 km. With extended cells, operators can deploy the GSM network rapidly in a cost-effective way in remote areas, thus improving the gain. If the coverage radius of a cell exceeds 35 km, the signal delay exceeds the maximum TA of 63 bits. If an MS moves to the border of the coverage radius, the MS transmits signals with
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 158 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description the maximum TA value allowed by the system. However, if the MS keeps moving outwards, the system cannot implement adaptive adjustment on TA value because the TA has reached the maximum value. Some signals transmitted by the MS are sent to the BTS receiver on the next timeslot. According to the principle, the extended cell realizes cell extension. That is, two continuous timeslots are assigned for each MS call and receiver window of the BTS receiver is also extended to the width of two timeslots. Thus, the cell coverage radius is extended to more than 35 km. To enable the MSs in the extended range to initiate calls at any time, the BCCH, CCCH, and SDCCH should be assigned with two timeslots. In the double-timeslot extension cell, the GPRS/EGPRS services are supported.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 The downlink throughput is enhanced in the double-timeslot extended cell. In the cells with a coverage radius of more than 35 km, such as coast coverage, island coverage, or wide coverage on land, the MS supporting multislot capability can be assigned PDCHs for four downlink times lots and one uplink timeslot. The extended cell can provide a data throughput that is four times higher than that in a common cell with a single downlink times lot for service establishment. This accelerates the download speed, enhances user experience, and improves the data service profitability of operators.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on GBFD-3201 Concentric Cell. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.3 Voice Capacity Improvement

2.3.1 GBFD-3201 Concentric Cell
Availability
Summary
A concentric cell is divided into an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. Different frequency reuse patterns can be applied to the overlaid and underlaid subcells.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 159 of 368
Benefits
The tight frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. Therefore, the system capacity is expanded without affecting the voice quality.
Description
With the development of radio networks and the increase in the number of subscribers, the contradiction between insufficient frequency resources and growing capacity demand becomes serious. Thus, tight frequency reuse must be applied to increase frequency usage and network capacity. Tight frequency reuse, however, may greatly increase interference and even result in deterioration of the QoS. Therefore, avoiding or reducing interference and ensuring voice quality in a tight frequency reuse pattern has become a critical issue. The concentric cell technology divides an ordinary cell into two service layers: overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell.

For an MS in the underlaid subcell but not in the overlaid subcell, a TRX, such as the BCCH TRX, in the loose frequency reuse pattern should be assigned. For an MS in the overlaid subcell, a TRX, such as a non-BCCH TRX, in the tight frequency reuse pattern should be assigned, .
The system capacity can be increased by applying a tight frequency reuse pattern in the overlaid subcell. Compared with the MSs in the underlaid subcell, the MSs in the overlaid subcell are far away from the interference sources, and therefore the voice quality is guaranteed even if the tight frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. The voice quality of the MSs in the underlaid subcell is also guaranteed because the loose frequency reuse pattern is applied. Once the capacity of the coverage area changes, the channels in the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell should be adjusted. For example, the traffic volume increases because of a large gathering within a short period in the overlaid subcell. Adjusting the TRX from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell can expand the capacity of the overlaid subcell and thus solve the problem of burst traffic increase. When the traffic volume becomes light after the large gathering, restore the original settings. The BSS provides the power control, channel assignment, and handover algorithms regarding the concentric cell to achieve the balance of the traffic distribution in the concentric cell.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0 Support for Main BCCH Configured in Overlaid Subcell: The BCCH can be configured either in the underlaid subcell or in the overlaid subcell. However, the BCCH configured in the overlaid subcell can increase the capacity of the network because the tight frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. When the BCCH is configured in the overlaid subcell, the coverage area of the overlaid subcell must be equivalent to that of the underlaid subcell. This can reduce the failed handovers from the overlaid subcell to the underlaid subcell and reduce the failed overlaid subcell assignments, thus improving the KPI. Support for PDCH configured in Overlaid Subcell: The number of PDCHs increases with the growth of PS services. This aggravates the TCH congestion in the underlaid subcell. Configuring the PDCH in the overlaid subcell can absorb the PS services into the overlaid subcell, and thus minimizes the congestion in the underlaid subcell and increases the traffic volume in the concentric cell.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 160 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The parameters of concentric handover should be set for CS services and PS services respectively. This can implement timely handovers in CS domain and PS domain and reduce call drops.
Dependency
2.3.2 GBFD-4501 Co-BCCH Cell

Availability
Summary
The co-BCCH cell refers to a cell where the TRXs on the GSM900M/DCS1800M (or GSM850/DCS1800, or GSM850/PCS1900) coexist. The TRXs on two bands are distributed in the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell that share one BCCH TRX. The co-BCCH cell can expand the network capacity and reduce the interference between cells.
Benefits
With this feature, the capacity of the cell is expanded and the occurrences of cell reselection for the MS and inter-cell handovers are reduced. In co-BCCH cell, the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell share one BCCH TRX, thus reducing the number of BCCH TRXs, and minimizing the interference between BCCH TRXs.
Description
Co-BCCH cell is realized on the basis of the principles of the concentric cell. The TRXs on the GSM900M (or GSM850M) are configured in the underlaid subcell, which is used to expand the coverage area; and the TRXs on the DCS1800M (or PCS1900M) are configured in the overlaid subcell, which is used to absorb the traffic. Co-BCCH cell: Before the channel assignment, the system determines the frequency bands supported by the MS. If the MS supports the bands in the underlaid and overlaid subcells, the channel assignment strategy of the concentric cell is applied. Otherwise, only the channel in the underlaid subcell can be assigned to the MS. The system assigns channels on different frequency bands to the MS based on the receive level, receive quality, and TA value. The underlaid subcell is used for cell coverage and the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 161 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description overlaid subcell is used for absorbing the traffic. Thus, the cell coverage is maximized and the capacity balance between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell is maintained. In a co-BCCH cell, the TRXs on different bands belong to one cell, and one BCCH is shared by both the underlaid subcell and overlaid subcell. Compared w ith common dual-band network, one BCCH is saved and used as a TCH, and thus the system capacity is enhanced. In addition, the TCHs on the two bands are integrated into one cell instead of two cells so that the channels can be shared. Therefore, the system capacity is enhanced.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Support for different frequency hopping (FH) type used by TRXs in overlaid/underlaid subcells: The FH type is not a cell-level parameter. In a cell, different TRXs may use different FH types. Generally, the baseband FH is applied to the underlaid subcell because of insufficient frequencies; whereas the RF FH is applied to the overlaid subcell because of sufficient frequencies. This helps obtain a high FH gain.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-3201 Concentric Cell This feature and the following feature are mutually exclusive: GBFD-4001 Extended Cell Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and BTS.
2.3.3 GBFD-4401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC

Availability
Summary
Multi-band sharing one BSC enables operators to form a multi-band network, that is, multiple bands coexist in one BSC. This provides the capacity of frequency band expansion for operators, and thus alleviates the problem of insufficient frequency resources.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 162 of 368
Benefits
Multi-band sharing one BSC enables multiple frequency bands to form one network and provides the capacity of frequency band expansion for operators.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900, and GSM850. Huawei GBSS supports multi-band network sharing one BSC. Most of the frequencies are the same on the DCS1800 and PCS1900. Hence, these two frequency bands cannot build a multi-band network. Huawei GBSS supports the following types of multi-band networks:

GSM850+GSM900+DCS1800 GSM850+GSM900+PCS1900
In a multi-band network, the parameters associated with the cell selection and handover can be set according to the specific frequency band so that the strategies of cell selection, cell reselection, and handover between different bands can be implemented. The dual-band network is the most common multi-band network. The dual-band network consists of two types: GSM900+DCS1800 and GSM850+PCS1900.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs The multi-band network should be supported by the MS, BTS, and MSC.
2.3.4 GBFD-4402 Enhanced Dual-band Network

Availability
Summary
The enhanced dual-band network is an improvement on the existing dual-band network. In the enhanced dual-band network, two co-sited cells with different coverage areas are logically formed into a cell group. One is an overlaid subcell, and the other is an underlaid subcell. The
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 163 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description enhanced dual-band network algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the two cells in a cell group.
Benefits
The enhanced dual-band network enables multiple frequency bands to form one network and provides the capacity of frequency band expansion for operators. On condition that the KPIs are acceptable, the resource sharing of the overlaid and underlaid subcells expands the system capacity. This feature supports the tight frequency reuse pattern. The tight frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell and the loose frequency reuse pattern is applied to the underlaid subcell.
Description
Based on the multi-band network, the enhanced dual-band network enhances the channel sharing of the overlaid and underlaid subcells. The enhanced dual-band network logically forms two co-sited cells with different coverage areas into a cell group, and the two cells are configured with the BCCH and the SDCCH. One is an overlaid subcell and the other is an underlaid subcell. The enhanced dual-band network algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the two cells in a cell group. The overlaid and underlaid subcells can obtain the information, such as level, channel, and load about each other, so the KPIs (for example, handover success rate and assignment success rate) can be kept at proper values when the channels in the overlaid and underlaid subcells are shared.
Tight frequency reuse In terms of functions, tight frequency reuse is similar to the concentric cell. In a cell group of an enhanced dual-band network, the loose frequency reuse can be applied to the underlaid subcell, and the tight frequency reuse is applied to the overlaid subcell. If an MS accesses the network from the overlaid subcell and the load in the underlaid subcell is low, the channel assignment is preferably performed in the underlaid subcell to minimize the interference to the entire network. If an MS accesses the network from the underlaid subcell and the load in the underlaid subcell is high, the channel assignment is preferably performed in the overlaid subcell to achieve the traffic balance in the cell group. In addition, the enhanced dual-band network supports dynamic distribution of the MSs that are having calls according to the load and coverage.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 164 of 368
2.3.5 GBFD-7001 Flex MAIO

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the channels with less interference are preferentially selected during channel assignment. If there is interference in the selected channel, the MAIO with the minimum interference is assigned to the channel.
Benefits

Reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system. Achieves the tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and thus improves the system capacity.
Description
Under the BTSs with large capacity, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference are likely to occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and the tight frequency reuse is adopted. For example, when some frequencies in the MA list are adjacent, adjacent-channel interference occurs if the channels with the same timeslot number but on different TRXs use adjacent MAIOs and are occupied at the same time. With the dynamic MAIO, when an MAIO is assigned to a channel under activation, the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according to the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to the channel. Thus, the call has the minimum interference from the perspective of the entire network. Huawei BSS equipment records the interference in each timeslot and updates the record during each channel activation or channel release.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 165 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-3701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) GBFD-3702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping This feature and the following feature are mutually exclusive: GBFD-7002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation) Dependency on other NEs None.
2.3.6 GBFD-5801 ICC

Availability
Summary
When combining the signals from multiple antennas, the interference counteract combine (ICC) makes use of interference correlation of different antennas to eliminate some interference.
Benefits
Improves the speech quality and data throughput in the scenarios with severe interference, for example, where tight frequency reuse is applied, thus improving user experience. Improves the anti-interference capability of equipment and increases the system capacity.
Description
ICC is a technology that suppresses the interference by combining signals of multiple antennas. Generally, the interference on different antennas is generated by the same interference source. Therefore, the interfering signals received by different antennas have a certain correlation. The ICC uses this correlation when combing signals to eliminate some interference. Therefore, the ICC improves the anti-interference capability of equipment and increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity. ICC can suppress the interference within the GSM system and from other systems only if the interference on different antennas has a correlation. Huawei BSS supports the dual-antenna ICC and four-antenna ICC.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 166 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.3.7 GBFD-5821 EICC

Availability
Summary
The interference on the signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation and temporal correlation: co-channel interference (CCI) and inter-symbol interference (ISI). After considering the correlation of these two types of interference, the EICC combines the signals received by multiple antennas to provide better signal quality on the uplink.
Benefits
The EICC feature improves the uplink signal quality to meet the requirements for radio communication in certain cases and to improve the uplink performanc e in scenarios with wide coverage. With the uplink anti-interference capability improved, the tight frequency reuse pattern can be achieved and thus the system capacity is increased.
Description
Similar to the ICC, the EICC mainly applies to the network where the tight frequency reuse pattern is adopted and the traffic volume is high. The interference on the signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation and temporal correlation: CCI and ISI. Considering the spatial correlation and temporal correlation of the interference, the ICC eliminates these two types of interference independently. The EICC, however, considers the correlation of these two types of interference and constructs the multidimensional combining coefficient matrix to combine the signals according to the maximum signal noise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, the EICC obtains the optimized uplink signals. The EICC requires the matrix of interference, which is calculated on the basis of the training sequence of wanted signals. For each RX signal, the network estimates a channel model based on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the wanted signal, and subtracts the wanted signal from the RX signal to obtain the interfering signal. The network then estimates the matrix of each interfering signal and analyzes the statistical dependency of these interfering signals. Based on the statistical dependency, some interference is counteracted during the combination of RX signals to maximize the combination gain.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 167 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS The soft-synchronized network feature is recommended. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the BTS.
2.4 Frequency Usage Improvement

2.4.1 GBFD-3701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)
Availability
Summary
With this feature, wanted signals are transmitted by switching a carrier among many frequencies according to the specified sequences. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping and baseband hopping.
Benefits

This feature reduces the co-channel and adjacent-channel interference and thus improves the speech quality of the network. With this feature, the tight frequency reuse can be adopted to increase the system capacity. This feature improves the information security.
Description
With this feature, a traffic carrier frequency hops along the time according to the specified sequence. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping and baseband hopping in terms of implementation of the TRX. The frequency hoping enables the operators to adopt the tight frequency reuse pattern, thus increasing the system capacity while maintaining the good
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 168 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description speech quality. The frequency hopping feature minimizes the interference on a channel from the same interference source. Thus, it is widely used in the communication system because it helps improve the anti-attenuation capability, anti-interference capability, and information security. With RF hopping, the frequencies for both transmitter and receiver of the TRX participate in frequency hopping. The number of frequencies participating in the FH can exceed the number of TRXs in the cell. The RF hopping is implemented through the real-time switchover between two frequency synthesizers. This implementation has the following advantages: Lower the speed requirements on the frequency synthesizer; when there is no FH, the two frequency synthesizers work in backup mode, thus enhancing the system reliability. In addition, RF hopping solves the problem wherein the fast frequency conversion may affect the signal quality, and thus realizes the FH of all frequencies on the supported frequency band. With baseband hopping, each transmitter works on a fixed frequency, and the TX does not participate in FH. The TX frequency hopping is achieved though the switching of baseband signals. The RX of the TRX, however, must participate in FH. Therefore, the number of frequencies participating in FH in a cell must be less than or equal to the number of TRXs assigned for the cell. When a TRX is faulty, the system enables the baseband FH TRX cooperation to ensure that the speech quality in the cell is not affected by the faulty TRX.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. The RF hopping is not supported when the cavity combiner is used. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.4.2 GBFD-3702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

Availability
Summary
With this feature, non-BCCH timeslots participate in the baseband hopping, thus improving the radio quality of non-BCCH timeslots and the cell performance.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 169 of 368
Benefits
This feature helps improve the radio quality of non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH carrier.
Description
In Huawei BSS, the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX can participate in baseband hopping in the cell. In this way, the baseband hopping performance is improved because the number of frequencies participating in FH increases, and the performance of non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX is improved because they also participate in the FH. For the FH that the BCCH carrier participates in, the BCCH timeslot is not involved, but the rest timeslots can participate in the baseband hopping. According to the GSM specifications, the BCCH must be carried on a fixed frequency to ensure the cell selection, cell reselection, and handover measurement. Therefore, the BCCH carrier cannot participate in the RF hopping.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following feature: Baseband hopping in GBFD-3701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) This feature and the following feature are mutually exclusive: RF hopping in GBFD-3701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping) Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and the BTS.
2.4.3 GBFD-3703 Antenna Frequency Hopping

Availability
Summary
Similar to the baseband frequency hopping, the antenna frequency hopping enables the data of all the timeslots on a specific carrier to be transmitted in turn on the antennas of other carriers in the cell. In this way, the space diversity is increased and the quality of the TRX data received by the MS is improved, and thus the network performance is improved.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 170 of 368
Benefits

Increases the space diversity and improves the quality of BCCH TRX data received by the MS, thus improving the network performance and reducing the network interference. Increases the network capacity. Compared with the non-FH or FH with a few frequencies, the antenna frequency hopping can increase the radio network capacity by up to 30% and the network diversity gain by up to 3 dB.
Description
Similar to the baseband frequency hopping, the antenna frequency hopping enables the data of all carriers to be transmitted in turn on the antennas of other TRXs in the cell. This feature applies to the BCCH on the BCCH carrier. The BCCH must be transmitted on the same frequency. Therefore, the antenna frequency hopping cannot be used together with baseband hopping or RF hopping. In a GSM cell, however, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the BCCH carrier. These broadcast messages are important for the MS in idle mode to search for a network and for the MS in dedicated mode to measure the neighboring cell. If the MS is located in a place where it is difficult to receive the messages from the BCCH carrier or if the antenna for the BCCH carrier is damaged, then the MS cannot properly receive the broadcas t control messages from the BCCH carrier. Similar to the baseband frequency hopping, the antenna frequency hopping enables the data of all times lots on the BCCH carrier to be transmitted in turn on other antennas of all other TRXs. This increases the space diversity of the BCCH signals and improves the quality of the data received from the BCCH carrier by the MS, TRX, thus improving the network performance. For example: If a cell is configured with three TRXs and each TRX connects to one antenna with the antenna frequency hopping enabled, the data of TRX 0 may be transmitted on antenna 1 at this instant and on antenna 0 at the next instant, and then on antenna 2 at the third instant. In this way, the space diversity is realized and thus the receiver performance of the MS is improved.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 171 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description This feature should be supported by the BTS, and at least two antennas are required in a cell to enable the antenna frequency hopping.
2.4.4 GBFD-8001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

Availability
Summary
This feature allows the operator to adopt a tight frequency reuse pattern for the frequencies of the BCCH carriers.
Benefits
With this feature, the number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH carriers reduces, thus improving the frequency usage. In addition, the number of frequencies available for the TCHs and the number of frequencies participating in FH on the TCH increase, thus increasing the system capacity and reducing the costs of adding sites and cells. With this feature, the TCHs on BCCH carriers are assigned to only the MSs near the BTS, thus improving the speech quality because of less uplink interference.
Description
Each cell is configured with a BCCH carrier, and timeslot 0 on the BCCH carrier is used to carry the BCH and CCCH. This timeslot continuously sends messages to all the MSs camping on the cell. The messages include the synchronization message, system information, paging message, and assignment message, which are directly related to cell selection, cell reselection, call initiation, and paging response. Therefore, the BCCH becomes the most important channel in GSM telecommunication. Generally, the 4x3 pattern is adopted for the BCCH frequencies. This can ensure a high carrier-to-interference ration (CIR) between BCCH carriers. In this pattern, however, the BCCH carriers occupy 12 frequencies. In a network with tight frequency reuse and limited frequency resources, if 3x3 pattern is used for the BCCH frequencies, the interference to the TCH on the BCCH carrier increases and the performance degrades to an unacceptable leve l. This feature enables the BCCH frequencies to adopt a tight frequency reuse pattern. In this way, in the network with limited frequency resources, the number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH carriers reduces and the number of frequencies available for the TCHs increases, thus increasing the system capacity without adding hardware and reducing the costs of adding sites. With BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, a cell can be divided into two logical layers: TCH layer on BCCH carriers and FH layer on other carriers. The FH layer serves the whole system and covers the whole network, including the MSs at the boarder of a cell. The TCH layer on the BCCH TRX, however, provides limited coverage to ensure the performance of call access. The interference in the area near the BTS is smaller than that in the peripheral area and at the edge of a cell. Therefore, the TCH layer on the BCCH carrier provides the coverage for the MSs near the BTS only. During the initial access and channel assignment triggered by handover (non-BCCH tight frequency multiplexing), the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 172 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description system preferentially assigns TCHs on the non-BCCH carriers to ensure the access performance of the MSs. If a call is assigned a TCH on a non-BCCH carrier in the cell, the BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing feature has less impact on the call if the MS is near the BTS. The system then hands over the call to a TCH on the BCCH carrier and reserves the channels on the non-BCCH carrier to ensure the access performance of other calls.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.4.5 GBFD-4901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM Frequency Band

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS equipment supports the E-GSM900 and R-GSM900 frequency bands.
Benefits

This feature enables services to be processed on the extended frequency bands and extends the frequency range. The state radio regulatory commission of each country is responsible for the division and selling of the frequency resources of the country. The GSM900 is the commonly used frequency band. To fully utilize frequency resources, the P-GSM900 frequency band is extended to bring more benefits to governments and operators. In this way, the related government organizations can make profits by selling this frequency band. In addition, the operators obtain more radio resources and thus make more profits by providing better services to end users.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 173 of 368
Description
The operating frequency of E-GSM (including the standard GSM900) is as follows: Uplink: 880-915 MHz Downlink: 925-960 MHz ARFCN: 0-124, 975-1023 The operating frequency of the R-GSM (dedicated to the railway communication) is as follows: Uplink: 876-915 MHz Downlink: 921-960 MHz ARFCN: 0-124, 955-1023 The E-GSM900, R-GSM900, and P-GSM900 belong to the same frequency band while their frequencies are not adjacent. Therefore, the extended frequency bands of E-GSM and R-GSM are introduced. The E-GSM extended frequency band refers to the E-GSM frequency band excluding the P-GSM frequency band. The R-GSM extended frequency band refers to the R-GSM frequency band excluding the E-GSM frequency band. For the cells configured with E-GSM extended frequency or R-GSM frequency band, the system considers the frequency bands supported by the MS and the frequency band of the channel to adopt different channel assignment strategies. During the immediate assignment, the system assigns a channel to the MS based on the frequency band supported by the BCCH carrier. When assigning a channel, the system obtains the classmark of the MS and then determines whether a channel is supported by the MS. Among all the channels supported by the MS, the system preferentially assigns a channel that is not in the intersection of the frequency bands to the MS. For example, if an MS supports the E-GSM band, and the available channels are carried on the P-GSM band and the E-GSM extended band, the system preferentially assigns the channel on the E-GSM extended band to the MS. The band intersection, that is, P-GSM band, is reserved for other MSs with weak multiband capability.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS, TRX, and MS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 174 of 368
2.4.6 GBFD-7002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation)

Availability
Summary
With the IBCA feature, when a call accesses the network, the interference to the established calls caused by the new call and the interference to the new call caused by the established calls are calculated. Based on the calculation result, the network assigns a channel with the minimum interference to the new call. This minimizes the overall interference in the network and thus enables a tighter frequency reuse pattern. This increases the network capacity while maintaining the speech quality in the whole network.
Benefits

Effectively improves the frequency usage and thus improves the network capacity while maintaining the speech quality. Reduces the overall interference and thus improves the network performance. Improves the speech quality of calls.
Description
In the GSM network, the loose frequency reuse provides better network performance, higher network KPIs, and excellent speech quality, but reduces the network capacity compared with the tight frequency reuse. The tight frequency reuse pattern can increase the network capacity, but also increases the probability that the TRXs use the same frequency or adjacent frequencies. This results in more co-channel or adjacent-channel interference, thus degrading the network performance. Based on the timeslot synchronization on the Um interface, the IBCA feature considers the channel-level interference only. During the channel assignment, the IBCA considers the interference strength of all idle channels and then preferentially assigns the channel with the minimum interference. The IBCA feature involves the following: Calculation of the interference to the new call caused by the established calls : The IBCA must be used together with frequency hopping. The idle channels with different MAIOs transmit signals on the Um interface with different frequencies, and thus the interference that the idle channels experience from the established calls varies. The IBCA calculates the interference strength on each idle channel when different MAIOs are applied (CIR). Calculation of interference to the established calls caused by the new call: The established calls cause interference to the new call. Similarly, the new call causes interference to the established calls once it accesses the network. The IBCA estimates the CIR of the new call to the established calls. Considering the preceding two types of interference, the IBCA-enabled network assigns the channel and MAIO with the minimum interference to the new call for network access. The IBCA feature consists of the intra-BSC IBCA and the inter-BSC IBCA. That is, the IBCA-enabled cells may belong to one BSC or multiple BSCs.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 175 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The implementation of the IBCA feature improves the frequency usage and thus effectively increases the network capacity. In addition, the IBCA-enabled network considers the interference to the new call caused by the established calls, thus improving the speech quality of calls.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware A pair of boards should be added for processing the IBCA-related services. The IP interface board should be added for the inter-BSC IBCA. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-8621 Connection Inter BSC over IP GBFD-8201 Soft-Synchronized Network or GBFD-10401 BTS GPS Synchronization GBFD-3701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) GBFD-7601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm This feature and the following feature are mutually exclusive: GBFD-7001 Flex MAIO Dependency on other NEs None.
2.5 Network Synchronization

2.5.1 GBFD-10401 BTS GPS Synchronization
Availability
Summary
The BTS supports the GPS synchronization through a satellite.
Benefits
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 176 of 368

The frame synchronization on the Um interface in the entire network by using the GPS provides high synchronization precision and easy implementation. When the network works in synchronous mode, the features such as ICC and IBCA can be used to increase the network capacity by more than 40%. This feature improves the KPIs such as mean opinion score (MOS), paging success rate, handover success rate, call drop rate, and traffic volume.
Description
In the existing GSM system, the BTSs work in asynchronous mode, resulting in timeslot overlapping. In the asynchronous network with a tight frequency reuse pattern, the overlapping of timeslots causes unnecessary and unpredictable interference because the frequency reuse distance between two cells using the same frequency is relatively short. The interference (that is, channel quality) rather than the number of channels restricts the network performance. Therefore, the BTS in the entire network synchronize with each other based on the reference clock signals provided by the GPS satellite. The GPS clock system of the BTS receives the related information sent by the GPS satellite and then obtains the GPS absolute time and precise 1PPS pulse signals. The BTS clock circuit traces the 1PPS pulse signals to obtain the reference clock and then obtains various clock signals based on the reference clock. Each BTS in the network adjusts the frame number based on the absolute frame number calculated from the GPS absolute time received by the BTS software.
Enhancement
Each BTS is equipped with a GPS for hardware synchronization of the entire network, which increases the costs. Therefore, Soft-Synchronized Network feature, which is an optional feature, is introduced to GBSS8.0 to realize the frame synchronization on the Um interface through software. For details, see the GBFD-8201 Soft-Synchronized Network feature.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The BTS3012 should be configured with the DGPS. The BTS3900/BTS3900A/DBS3900 should be configured with the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU). Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 177 of 368
2.5.2 GBFD-8201 Soft-Synchronized Network

Availability
Summary
With this feature, all the BTSs under one BSC synchronize with each other by adjusting the frame number, timeslot number, and bit offset in the timeslot to be the same through software. In a synchronous network, dynamic frequency allocation and dynamic channel assignment can be adopted to minimize inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel collision. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity.
Benefits
The soft-synchronized network feature provides the following benefits:
This feature synchronizes all the BTSs under a BSC through the software without the need of adding expensive hardware device. The necessary hardware devices for synchronization include GPS for each BTS and the satellite. After the BTSs are synchronized, the IBCA feature c an be implemented. The IBCA enabled in the synchronous network can improve the network capacity by 20% to 25%. After the BTSs are synchronized, the performance of technologies such as ICC and SAIC can be greatly improved. The ICC enabled in the synchronous network can improve the network performance by about 5.5 dB compared with the performance in the asynchronous network, and the SAIC enabled in the synchronous network can increase the network capacity by about 40%. This feature improves the KPIs such as MOS, paging success rate, handover success rate, call drop rate, and traffic volume. This feature realizes the software synchronization with the reference BTS, thus enabling the flexible networking and reducing the workload of synchronization.
Description
Most of the existing networks work in asynchronous mode. That is, all BTSs are not synchronized, and each BTS adopts a different frame number, timeslot number, and offset. There are two network synchronization modes: hardware synchronization and software synchronization. In hardware synchronization mode, each BTS is equipped with a GPS device to realize the network synchronization through the satellite. This requires expensive hardware devices. The Soft-Synchronized Network feature realizes the synchronization through software. This feature enables all the BTSs under a BSC to synchronize with each other by adjusting the frame number, timeslot, and bit offset to be the same through software. In the asynchronous network, the system cannot estimate the adjacent-channel interference but only can reduce the interference by using the functions such as loose frequency reuse and frequency hopping. In the synchronous network, the system estimates the co-channel and adjacent-channel interference in any inter-cell overlapping area and minimizes inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel collision by adopting the dynamic frequency allocation and dynamic channel allocation. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 178 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description In the synchronous network, the ICC and SAIC achieves the optimal performance. When wanted signals are synchronized with interfering signals in time, the interfering signals are the same in the entire burst. The interference estimated on the basis of the training sequence can effectively counteract the interference during the burst. In this case, the ICC and SAIC provide the optimal performance. The soft-synchronized network feature needs to be used together with the GBFD-7002 IBCA feature to avoid the inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel interference. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Inter-BSC soft-synchronized network: software synchronization of BTSs under multiple BSCs Multiple-reference soft-synchronized network: In the system, some BTSs are synchronized through hardware and others are synchronized through software to enable the flexible networking. When the network replanning and upgrade are required, the enhanced feature fully utilizes the existing resources to realize synchronization, thus reducing the workload of synchronization and saving the costs.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the BTS.
2.6 Energy Saving

2.6.1 GBFD-7601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
Availability
Summary
This feature enhances and optimizes the GBFD-0703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm feature with regard to the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold configuration.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 179 of 368
Benefits

Improves the efficiency and accuracy of power control. Reduces the intra-network interference and the power consumption of the MS and BTS. Increases the network capacity. Improves the network performance.
Description
Power control is an important method for radio link control. Based on the expected values set for parameters and the MRs on the uplink/downlink receive level and receive quality sent by the BTS, the BSC determines whether to adjust the transmit power of the MS and the BTS. Power control on the radio link is aimed at reducing the transmit pow er while maintaining the transmission quality. The HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm feature enhances and optimizes the GBFD-0703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm feature with regard to the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold configuration. Optimizing the filtering/interpolation of the MR: With this feature introduced, the incorrect MRs obtained at the initial stage of channel access do not affect the power control algorithm and thus the change in trend of the transmit power of the MS can be predicted based on the MRs more timely and correctly. Optimizing the decision algorithm: Based on the filtered receive level and receive quality, this algorithm considers the gain of the radio channel from frequency hopping, thus improving the accuracy of decisions. Setting the power control threshold according to the service type: This algorithm sets different power control thresholds for AMRFR services, AMRHR services, FR services, and HR services to optimize the power control on the AMR.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 This feature can be used with GBFD-0802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report together.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the BTS when it is implemented by the BTS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 180 of 368
2.6.2 GBFD-4801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink

Availability
Summary
The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink feature can reduce the transmit power of the BTS and the co-channel interference on the Um interface.
Benefits

This feature reduces the power consumption of the BTS and intra-system interference. From the perspective of the whole network, this feature reduces the frequency interference, thus increasing the network capacity.
Description
DTX includes V oice Activity Detection (VAD) and Silence Descriptor (SID). In addition, the GBSS automatically generates the comfortable noise to ensure the continuity of services. VAD: When the Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit (TRAU) detests through the V AD module that the data received from the MSC contains no voice information, it clears the voice flag bit in the encoded TRAU frame. After identifying the flag bit, the BTS disconnects the downlink until the flag is reset. SID: The noise coding procedure is the same as the voice signal coding procedure. The SID frame also experiences the channel coding, interleaving, ciphering, and modulating and then is turned into the field containing the noise messages and sent out in eight continuous bursts. Comfortable noise: When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID is set, the MS is in the intermittent period. To make the user feel that the GSM provides services continuously, the TRAU inserts comfortable noise in the uplink. With this feature, the TRAU can reduce the transmit power of the BTS, co-channel interference on the Um interface, and the power consumption. In downlink DTX mode, the GBSS equipment makes the user feel that the communication is continuous by providing the receiving MS with the comfortable noise.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Configuring the DTX according to the voice coding: DTXs for different voice coding can be configured separately. That is, you can enable the DTX for the FR (including FR, EFR and AMR) voice coding and the DTX for HR (including HR and AMR HR) voice coding simultaneous ly, and you can also enable FR DTX or HR DTX respectively. The flexible configuration helps reduce the intra-network interference while maintaining the voice quality.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 181 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and the BTS.
2.6.3 GBFD-4803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink

Availability
Summary
If the encoder of the MS detects through the VAD module that the received voice signal is environment noise only, the MS periodically sends the SID, and then the TRAU restores the comfortable noise accordingly.
Benefits

This feature reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time of the MS. From the perspective of the whole network, this feature reduces the frequency interference, thus increasing the network capacity.
Description
The uplink DTX can reduce the transmit power of the MS and the co-channel interference on the Um interface. DTX includes VAD and SID. In addition, the system automatically generates the comfortable noise to ensure the continuity of services. VAD: In uplink DTX mode, if the encoder of the MS detects through the V AD module that the received signal is environment noise only, the MS periodically sends the SID. When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU judges the SID flag. If the SID flag is set, the MS is in intermittent period. In this case, the TRAU restores the comfortable noise on the uplink to make the user feel that the communication is continuous. SID: The noise coding procedure is the same as the voice signal coding procedure. The SID frame also experiences the channel coding, interleaving, ciphering, and modulating and then is turned into the field containing the noise messages and sent out in eight continuous bursts. Comfortable noise: When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID is set, the MS is in the intermittent period. To make the user feel that the GSM provides continuous services, the TRAU inserts comfortable noise on the uplink.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 182 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The uplink DTX can reduce the transmit power of the MS, the co-channel interference on the Um interface and the power consumption of the MS, and prolong the call duration and standby time of the MS. In uplink DTX mode, the GBSS equipment makes the user feel that the communication is continuous by providing the receiving MS with the comfortable noise.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Configuring the DTX independently according to the voice coding: DTXs for different voice coding can be configured separately. That is, you can enable the DTX for the FR (including FR, EFR and AMR) voice coding and the DTX for HR (including HR and AMR HR) voice coding simultaneously, and you can also enable FR DTX or HR DTX respectively. The flexible configuration helps reduce the intra-network interference while maintaining the speech quality.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.
2.6.4 GBFD-1602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

Availability
Summary
In the existing network, the cells are not busy all the time. When some cells are idle, some TRXs can meet the current traffic requirements. In this case, you can disable the idle TRXs to reduce the power consumption of the BTS and the operation expenditure of telecom operators.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the power consumption and thus greatly reduces the costs of investment and operation. The power consumption of TRXs constitutes a major part of the power consumption of BTSs. In the existing network, however, the TRXs are not always working. With this feature, the power amplifiers of some idle TRXs are shut down to reduce the power consumption of the BTS and power costs of operators.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 183 of 368
Description
The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown feature can be enabled in a specific period. With this feature, idle TRXs can be shut down based on the prediction of traffic load and traffic volume to save energy. Alternatively, the power amplifiers of the disabled TRXs can be switched on to ensure that these TRXs are available for use anytime. Before shutting down a TRX, the BSC initiates an intra-cell handover for the calls on the TRX and then instructs the BTS to shut down the TRX when there is no call on the TRX. If some calls on the TRX cannot be handed over to other TRXs, the BSC does not instruct the BTS to shut down the TRX. Generally, the channel allocation optimization measure is used together with this feature. That is, channels are allocated to some centralized TRXs during the channel allocation. The channels on the BCCH TRX are preferentially allocated to reduce the channel usage on the non-BCCH TRX and thus reduce the power consumption of the BTS. In addition, the BTS allocates channels based on the priorities of TRXs. That is, the channels are preferentially allocated to TRXs with high priorities. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy channels on a few TRXs so that idle TRXs can be shut down as many as possible.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the TRX. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature and the following feature are mutually exclusive: Baseband hopping in GBFD-3701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) Dependency on other NEs None.
2.6.5 GBFD-1603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level

Availability
Summary
The power amplifier consumption constitutes a major part of the TRX power consumption, which constitutes a major part of the BTS power consumption. The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level feature reduces the static power consumption by
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 184 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description controlling the power amplifier on timeslot level to make the idle timeslots consume no power.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the power consumption of the BTS and thus greatly reduces the costs of investment and operation. The power amplifier consumption constitutes a major part of the TRX power consumption, which constitutes a major part of the BTS power consumption. In the existing network, however, not all the timeslots are always working. With this feature, the power amplifiers consume no power when the timeslots are idle, thus greatly reducing the power costs of operators.
Description
The power amplifier is an important device used for transmitting power to the antenna system. The power consumption of the power amplifier consists of static power consumption and dynamic power consumption. The linear-shaped power amplifier requires a constant offset voltage to enable power transmission at any time even when it does not transmit power. The power consumption corresponding to the fixed offset voltage is called static power consumption. The dynamic power consumption, however, refers to the power consumption produced only when the power amplifier is processing services. The dynamic power consumption increases with the output power of the TRX. When the power amplifier does not process services, the dynamic power consumption is zero. In the industry, the static power amplifier can be shut down only when all the TRXs process no service. This feature shuts down the static power consumption of the power amplifier when the dynamic power consumption is zero. Thus, the total power consumption of the power amplifier is zero.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the TRX. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.6.6 GBFD-1604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 185 of 368
Summary
With this feature, the original TRX with high output power is replaced by two TRXs with lower output power to reduce the power consumption of BCCH TRX while maintaining the network capacity in low traffic periods. Thus, this feature saves power for the BTS.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the power consumption of BTSs and thus greatly reduces the costs of investment and operation. The power consumption of TRXs constitutes a major part of the power consumption of BTSs. In the existing network, however, the TRXs are not always working. In low traffic periods, this feature can change the working status of TRXs to further reduce the power consumption without interfering with the coverage and thus bring benefits to operators.
Description
The ICB applies to the DTRU only. The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH carriers are idle, some channels on the BCCH carrier are idle in the cell, and the DTRU on the BCCH applies the combination mode with physical connection. For example, the ICB can be enabled in an S4 cell with single antenna, two DTRUs, and BCCH TRX in combination mode. For an S4 cell, the output power of TRXs should be 30 W for the coverage requirement. In normal cases, the TRX transmits at a high power of 60 W. After the combination mode is applied, the output power is 30 W, which still meets the coverage requirement. In the existing network, the traffic is low in some periods. When the timeslots on the BCCH carrier are idle, the output power of the BCCH TRX is reduced to 15 W and the PBT mode is applied to ensure that the combined output power retains 30 W. In this way, the TRX power is reduced from 60 W to 15 W while maintaining the network capacity. This greatly reduces the energy consumption of the TRX and thus reduces the power consumption of the BTS.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH TRXs are idle and some channels on the BCCH carrier are idle in the cell. The ICB applies only to the DTRU in combination mode. This feature is supported by the optimized DTRU, the DRRU, and the DRFU. The ICB cannot be enabled in baseband FH mode. The ICB cannot be enabled on the static PDCHs or on the PDCHs converted from the dynamic PDCHs (TCHs).
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 186 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description When the output power of the TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 0 or 1, the ICB helps save the energy. When the output power of the TRX is 40 W and the static power level is 0, the ICB helps save the energy. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.6.7 GBFD-1605 Active Backup Power Control

Availability
Summary
The Active Backup Power Control feature adopts different measures to prolong the service time of the BTS in case of mains power cut due to power off, snow disaster, and earthquake, thus assuring sufficient time for repairing the equipment and improving the network robustness.
Benefits
When the external power of the BTS is disrupted, this feature provides various choices for operators to meet different requirements. For a configured BTS, the coverage preferred strategy ensures sufficient coverage, the capacity preferred strategy ensures high traffic capability, and the backup power time preferred strategy prolongs the service time and provides diverse services. This greatly improves the service quality for operators.
Description
When the external power supply of the BTS is disrupted, a power-off alarm is reported to the BTS. The BTS then uses the battery to supply the power. To save the backup power, the BTS automatically shuts down some TRXs under the control of the timer and then gradually reduces the TRX transmit power with a certain step until the BTS is powered off. When the external power supply of the BTS recovers, the previously disabled TRXs are enabled and all TRXs transmit at the normal power. The Active Backup Power Control feature takes into account the coverage, capacity and backup power time. Therefore, three modes can be configured: coverage preferred, capacity preferred, and backup power time preferred. Coverage preferred: Shut down some TRXs and then gradually reduce the transmit power of the remaining TRXs. Capacity preferred: Gradually reduce the transmit power of all TRXs and then shut down some TRXs. Backup power time preferred: Shut down some TRXs and at the same time reduce the transmit power of the remaining TRXs.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 187 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description This feature reduces the coverage of a cell gradually and therefore the MSs on the edge of the cell are gradually handed over to the neighboring cells. Thus, this feature has no negative Impacts on the network performance.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The BTS3012 series and the BTS3900 support this feature. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.6.8 GBFD-1606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBTS equipment supports two modulation modes: 8PSK and GMSK. The working voltage of the power amplifier varies with the modulation modes. When the 8PSK modulation mode is changed to GMSK, the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type feature accordingly adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to reduce the power consumption of the TRX.
Benefits
This feature adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier based on the working mode of MSs. The flexible adjustment of the working mode ensures that the BTS always works in optimal state while maintaining the service quality. This minimizes the power consumption and saves the power.
Description
The Power Optimization Based on Channel Type feature involves two functions: dynamic voltage adjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment. The dynamic voltage adjustment provides different working voltages for the power amplifier based on the modulation mode. If all channels on the TRX are configured as TCHs, the TRX works in GMSK mode and the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in GMSK mode. If some channels on the TRX are configured as dynamic or static PDCHs, the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 188 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description TRX works in 8PSK mode and the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in 8PSK mode. In this way, the feature reduces the power consumption. As the GPRS traffic increases, an increasing number of dynamic PDCHs are configured on the TRX. When no data service is processed and a great number of speech services are processed on a TRX, the dynamic PDCHs are converted into TCHs to provide speech services. According to the dynamic voltage adjustment function, the 8PSK mode is adopted on the TRX because the TRX is configured with dynamic PDCHs. In this way, the voltage is adjusted to a very high value, thus increasing the power consumption. The dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment function, however, can detect the channel status on the TRX. When detecting that all dynamic PDCHs are converted into TCHs, it enables the voltage adjustment function to provide the working voltage required in GMSK mode. If the TCHs are converted back into PDCHs, the working voltage required in 8PSK is applied again.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The BTS3012 series and the BTS3900 support this feature. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.6.9 GBFD-1608 PSU Smart Control

Availability
Summary
The PSU Smart Control feature switches on the required PSUs and shuts down the redundant PSUs based on the required power consumption of the BTS. This improves the efficiency of the power system and prolongs the service time of the power system.
Benefits
When the load is not heavy, the power system works with low efficiency, thus reducing the service time of the power conversion modules. This feature flexibly adjusts the power supply capability as required by controlling the number of working PSUs in real time. This avoids the case that the power conversion equipment works under light load and prolongs the working time of the equipment, thus reducing the costs of operation and maintenance.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 189 of 368
Description
In certain BTS application scenarios, when the external power supply cannot provide the working voltage of -48 V DC required by the BTS, the BTS power system should be added to perform the power conversion such as conversion from 220 V AC to -48 V DC. The power system is composed of PMU and PSU. The PMU is responsible for the management of the PSUs and the communication between the PSU and the BTS. The PSU is responsible for power conversion. In Huawei system, the PSU is configured in N+1 mode according to the possible maximum power consumption of the BTS. Generally, the power consumption of the BTS is lower than its possible maximum power consumption. Therefore, the PSUs are usually in light load state. This results in low efficiency of power conversion and shortens the service time of PSUs. The PSU Smart Control feature switches on the required PSUs and shuts down the redundant PSUs based on the required power consumption of the BTS. This improves the efficiency of the power system and prolongs the service time of the power system.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The PMU in the power system cooperates with the BTS to manage the PSU. The BTS3012AE supports this feature. The BTS3006C/BTS3002E supports this feature only when it is equipped with the Advanced Power Module (APM). The BTS3900 series support this feature. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.6.10 GBFD-1609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization

Availability
Summary
The Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption feature reduces the power consumption of the BTS by reducing the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 190 of 368
Benefits
The overall power consumption of the BTS is a major concern for operators. This feature provides the following benefits:

This feature reduces the overall power consumption of the BTS and thus saves the power cost of operators. This feature reduces the intra-network interference by reducing the transmit power to enable the tighter frequency reuse.
Description
When the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX are idle, this feature supports the configuration of the transmit power of these timeslots. When the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH carrier are occupied, this feature supports the power control on these timeslots. The power control range can be configured on the Local Maintenance Terminal.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS and the TRX. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature may affect the accuracy of measuring neighboring cells by the MS. Therefore, it is recommended that this feature be enabled during low traffic hours at night.
2.6.11 GBFD-1611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

Availability
This feature is introduced in the GBSS8.1.
Summary
The TRX power consumption accounts for a large proportion of the BTS power consumption. The working voltage of the TRX is a major factor that affects the TRX power consumption. Hence, to lower the TRX power consumption, the TRX should work under a suitable voltage to ensure an efficient output power.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 191 of 368
Benefits
Reduction in the TRX power consumption plays a key role in saving energy in a BTS system because the TRX power consumption accounts for a large proportion of the BTS power consumption. When the function of "TRX Working V oltage Adjustment" is enabled, the efficiency of the output power of the TRX can be maintained, which helps reduce the investment in power made by network operators on the base station equipment.
Description
The working voltage of the TRX is always set to a high level to ensure the maximum output power of the TRX. In actual application, however, the maximum output power of the TRX is not always required. In this case, if the TRX still works under such a high voltage, extra power is consumed because a lower working voltage can also provide the required output power. To reduce the power consumption of the TRX, Huawei developed the function of "TRX Working V oltage Adjustment" that enables the intelligent adjustment of the TRX working voltage according to the output power. For example, in the DTRU that works under different output powers of 40 W and 60 W, this function supports the intelligent adjustment. In addition, this function supports the intelligent adjustment of the Power Amplifier (PA) working voltage based on different power levels to reduce the TRX power consumption.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC Hardware None. Impacts on the BTS Hardware This function is supported by the optimized TRX modules of the BTS3012 series base stations. This function is supported by the TRX modules of all the BTS3900 series base stations. Dependence on Other GBSS Functions None. Dependence on Other NEs None.
2.6.12 GBFD-1612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 192 of 368
Summary
With this feature, the working voltage of the power amplifier of the multi-transceiver module can be timely adjusted on the basis of its output power. This improves the working efficiency of the power amplifier and reduces the power consumption of the BTS.
Benefits
With the advanced design structure applied, the multi-transceiver RF module of the 3900 series base station provides the operators with the benefits such as simplified configuration, small space, and easy capacity expansion. When this feature is enabled, the multi-transceiver RF module of the 3900 series base station can properly configure the working status of the power amplifier and reduce the operation expenditure for operators without affecting the network coverage.
Description
The power consumption of the TRX is a major part of the power consumption of the BTS. The power consumption of the TRX is related to factors such as the number of actually working TRXs, the traffic volume, output power, and working mode. All the carriers in the multi-transceiver module share one power amplifier. When many MSs access the same carrier, the output power of the carrier varies with the distance between the MS and the BTS. From the perspective of the total output power of the multi-transceiver module, in most cases, the output power is lower than the maximum output power of the power amplifier. The power amplifier works most efficiently when it transmits at the maximum power. The reduction of the output power affects the efficiency to some extent. The flexible adjustment of working voltage of the power amplifier helps improve the working efficiency of the power amplifier. This feature monitors the output power of all the carriers within the module. When the total output power of the power amplifier reduces after the measurement for a period, this feature adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to a lower value according to the related algorithm. In this way, the power amplifier works with great efficiency after the output power reduces, thus reducing the power consumption of the TRX.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware Only Multi-Carrier TRX modules of 3900 series base stations. can support this feature. Dependency on other functions of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 193 of 368
2.7 Abis Transmission Saving

2.7.1 GBFD-6701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface
Availability
Summary
With this feature, each signaling link occupies only 16 kbit/s bandwidth at the physical layer, thus saving the transmission resources on the Abis interface.
Benefits

When the capacity of the BTS is low, such as O1 or O2, this feature can minimize the transmission resources required on the Abis interface. The rent cost for the satellite transmission resources is very high. The 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface feature can save bandwidth, and thus can be used when satellite transmission is used.
Description
With this feature, the RSL or OML occupies 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots. In this case, the signaling and service can be configured in a 64 kbit/s timeslot on the Abis interface, and the signaling of different BTSs can coexist in the same 64kbit/s timeslot. Compared with the traditional 4:1 multiplexing technology, the 16 kbit/s LAPD signaling link mode can reduce the timeslot fragments, thus reducing the rent in the network with expensive transmission cost such as the satellite transmission networking. The bandwidth of each signaling link is limited to 16 kbit/s. Therefore, for the cell with high traffic volume, the call access failure or call drops may occur due to signaling link congestion.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other NEs
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 194 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature and the GBFD-7801 Ring Topology feature are mutually exclusive.
2.7.2 GBFD-7301 Flex Abis

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the Abis transmission resources can be dynamically allocated to MSs.
Benefits
Flex Abis enables the sharing of the Abis interface transmission resources among different BTSs, cells, and services, thus improving the resource usage. Especially for BTSs of large capacity with multiple cells, cascaded BTSs, and the cells configured with the EDGE, this feature can greatly improve resource usage.
Description
In the CS domain, the timeslot transmission on the Abis interface adopts the resource pool mode. The Abis resource is allocated to a TRX only when the TRX is busy. This can improve the usage of Abis resources. In PS domain, the transmission resources on the Abis interface are allocated based on 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot. A main times lot is allocated to the PDCH, and then additional timeslots are allocated with the steps of 16 kbit/s based on the required coding rate on the Um interface. Huawei adopts 16 kbit/s as the unit so that bandwidth usage is greatly improved and bandwidth is saved as much as possible. The synchronization timeslot, signaling link times lot, OML timeslot, and PS idle timeslot still adopt the fixed Abis allocation mode. Other Abis timeslots adopt the Abis pool mode. Huawei BSS equipment also supports the allocation of half-rate channels on the Abis interface, which is triggered on the basis of the load of the Abis resources. Abis timeslots are allocated at a minimum rate of 8 kbit/s. When the resource usage on the Um interface does not reach the congestion threshold but the transmission resource usage has reached the congestion threshold, 8 kbit/s half-rate channels on the Abis interface are allocated to improve the usage of Abis resources.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 195 of 368
2.7.3 GBFD-7702 BTS Local Switch

Availability
Summary
With this feature, if the calling MS and called MS are within the coverage of the same BTS or BTS group, the BSC performs the loopback on the cabinet group of the convergent BTS.
Benefits
This feature helps save the local or long-distance transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfaces.
Description
You can enable either the BTS local switch or the BSC local switch, and you can also enable both functions at the same time. After a call is established, the BSC performs the local switch if it detects that the calling MS and called MS are located in the same BTS or in the coverage of a group of cascaded BTSs and the requirements for the local switch are met. Before performing the loopback for the local switch, if the speech coding schemes of the two MSs are different, the BSC adjusts the two speech coding schemes to the same scheme by enabling the two MSs to adopt the lowest speech coding capability. In this way, the speech coding schemes and the speech coding rates of the two MSs are consistent. The following figure shows the circuit usage after the BTS Local Switch feature is enabled. The system performs the loopback of the speeches of both the calling MS and called MS on the BTS side, and then releases the timeslots used on the Abis and Ater interfaces.
Um Abis Ater A
MS a
BTS 2
BTS1 MS b BSC TC Core Network
BTS 3
Transfer channel loop Transfer channel released
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 196 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Huawei BTS local switch can be started on the basis of the prefix number or the congestion conditions of the Abis resources or started unconditionally. For the BTS with special numbers, this feature is unavailable. If the CN equipment is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable after the BTS local switch is enabled: lawful interception, MSC announcement, DTMF, fax during voice, and independent charging of the BTS local switch. Impacts on the speech quality from the BTS local switch: With this feature, the times of speech coding and decoding are reduced, thus enhancing the speech quality. n satellite transmission mode, there is no satellite transmission delay because the speech loopback is performed. Thus, the speech quality is greatly improved.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other NEs None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS If the TDM transmission mode is used on the Abis interface, this feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-7301 Flex Abis In Abis over IP mode, this feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-8601 Abis over IP This feature and the following feature are mutually exclusive: GBFD-8602 A over IP
2.7.4 GBFD-8401 Abis Transmission Optimization

Availability
Summary
The Abis Transmission Optimization feature detects and compresses the idle voice frames by using VAD and then sends the compressed data packet on the HDLC transmission channels for statistical multiplexing. This improves the E1/T1 bandwidth usage. With this feature, each E1/T1 can support 24 or 18 TRXs under the following conditions. (The number of TRXs
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 197 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description supported by E1 and T1 are different because the bandwidth of an E1 is 2 Mbit/s and the bandwidth of a T1 is 1.55 Mbit/s.)

Full-rate CS services (excluding the half-rate and PS services) V oice activation factor of 0.5. Cascaded BTSs not carried on a single E1.
Benefits
In the radio access network, the transmission cost accounts for 20% of the operators' expenditure, of which the transmission cost over the Abis interface makes up a large portion. Therefore, to effectively reduce the CAPEX and OPEX of the operator, it is necessary to introduce a technology that saves transmission resources while protecting the current investment. This feature can save the transmission resources of the Abis interface. By adding the BSC interface hardware and upgrading the BSC and BTS software, the operator can improve the usage of Abis resources by 30% to 40%. Under certain conditions, one E1 can carry 24 TRXs.
Description
The Abis Transmission Optimization feature introduces the HDLC frame and HDLC channel without changing the physical transmission mode. It statistically multiplexes the traffic data, signaling data, and OM data on the HDLC channel to obtain a higher transmission gain through voice frame compression and multiplexing. Figure 2-1 Abis transmission optimization-enabled networking
BSC
TDMCH HDLC
SDH
HDLC HDLC BTS HDLC BTS HDLC BTS BTS HDLC
BTS
BTS
BTS
Different from the TDM resources, the HDLC resources can be shared by multiple MSs. Therefore, the QoS mechanism is introduced to add the admission control and congestion management after this feature is enabled.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 198 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Admission control is a major measure taken to prevent congestion and is an important part of the entire QoS policy. The system determines the bandwidth required for the access of new services to prevent port or link congestion and to ensure the QoS of the entire system. Congestion management alleviates the congestion by using the mechanism of slowing down the speech coding rate when transmission resources are congested, thus improving the processing capability of the entire system.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 The function of manually configuring the HDLC channel is introduced. GBSS8.1 The enhanced QoS is introduced.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware The BSC should be configured with the GEHUB. If the TC is configured externally, the GDPUX should be configured in the subrack where the GEHUB is located for processing the HDLC frame. Impacts on the BTS hardware In HDLC networking mode, this feature has no Impacts on the hardware. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature and the following features are mutually exclusive : GBFD-7301 Flex Abis GBFD-7702 BTS Local Switch Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the BTS.
2.7.5 GBFD-2013 Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution

Availability
Summary
The Abis Congestion Triggered HR Distribution feature provides the following strategies for alleviating the Abis congestion: preferentially allocating the TCHH, dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion, and queuing/preemption. In this way, the system capacity and speech quality are dynamically balanced.
Benefits
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 199 of 368

This feature saves the transmission resources of the Abis interface and reduc es the network deployment cost. When the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested, this feature maintains the system capacity by degrading the speech quality. When the transmission resources are not congested, the speech quality recovers and thus the system capacity and the speech quality are dynamically balanced.
Description
With the Abis Congestion Triggered HR Distribution feature enabled, the system triggers the HR allocation based on the congestion condition of transmission resources on the Abis interface. In peak hours, the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested before these on the Um interface. Therefore, the original dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion/preferentially allocating the TCHH based on the load of the Um resources cannot ensure the system capacity. This feature performs the dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion, preferential allocation of TCHH, and queuing/preemption to alleviate the congestion of Abis resources and increase the system capacity. Dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion: When the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested, the qualified calls, calls initiated by non-VIP subscribers, calls with high speech quality, and calls with allowed path loss, are handed over from TCHF to TCHH. This alleviates the congestion of transmission resources on the Abis interface and increases the system capacity. When the congestion of transmission resources on the Abis interface is eliminated, the qualified calls in the cell are handed over from TCHH to TCHF to improve the speech quality of calls. Preferentially allocating the TCHH: When the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested, the TCHHs are preferentially allocated to the newly accessed calls to slow down the congestion. Queuing/Preemption: Similar to the queuing/preemption mechanism for the Um interface, the queuing/preemption is performed for calls that allow queuing/preemption on assignment or incoming handover. This ensures that services can be provided for subscribers with high priorities even if the transmission resources on the Abis interface are severely congested. If the TDM transmission is used on the Abis interface, preferentially allocating the TCHH mechanism is applied to eliminate the Abis congestion triggered by the GBFD-7301 Flex Abis feature. If the HDLC transmission is used on the Abis interface, preferentially allocating the TCHH mechanism and queuing/preemption mechanism are applied to eliminate the Abis congestion triggered by the GBFD-8401 Abis Transmission Optimization feature. If the IP transmission is used on the Abis interface, dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion, preferentially allocating the TCHH, and queuing/preemption mechanisms are applied to eliminate the Abis congestion triggered by the GBFD-8601 Abis over IP feature.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 200 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.8 A Transmission Saving

2.8.1 GBFD-6901 Flex Ater
Availability
Summary
The Flex Ater feature allocates the Ater resources according to the channel type during the call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the 16 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, the 8 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used.
Benefits
This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote TC networking. When the half rate accounts for 30% in the system, the Flex Ater-enabled network saves the Ater transmission resources for up to 15%, compared with the Flex Ater-disabled network.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 201 of 368
X% * 50% 50%
16K TS 8K TS
X% HR /AMR HR without F lex Ater
...
X% HR /AMR HR with F lex Ater
...
100% HR /AMR HR with F lex Ater
Description
The Ater interface is an internal interface between the GMPS/GEPS and the GTCS in the Huawei BSS equipment. With this feature, the Ater resources are classified into 16 kbit/s timeslots and 8 kbit/s timeslots. The Flex Ater feature allocates the Ater resources according to the channel type during the call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the 16 kbit/s timeslots are used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, the 8 kbit/s timeslots are used. Thus, the Ater resources are fully utilized. The user can determine the initial proportion of the 16 kbit/s timeslots to the 8 kbit/s timeslots based on the traffic module. If either type of resources is insufficient, the BSC6000 dynamically adjusts the Ater resources. If the 16 kbit/s timeslots are insufficient, two continuous 8 kbit/s timeslots are incorporated into one 16 kbit/s timeslot. Similarly, if the 8 kbit/s timeslots are insufficient, one 16 kbit/s timeslot is divided into two 8 kbit/s timeslots. The adjustment process is recorded in the traffic statistics. In addition, the user can query through the LMT the number of the 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s timeslots of a specific subrack and the usage of these timeslots. Based on the query information, the user can determine whether the initial proportion of 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s timeslots is proper or the Ater resources are congested. With this feature, when the transmission resources on the Ater interface are insufficient, the BSC6000 preferentially allocates the half rate to alleviate the congestion, thus increasing the system capacity.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
...
Page 202 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.8.2 GBFD-7701 BSC Local Switch

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BSC performs the voice loopback within the BSC if the calling MS and called MS are located under the same BSC. The data is not transmitted on the Ater interface or A interface, and thus the transmission resources on the Ater interface and the TC coding resources are released.
Benefits

In remote TC networking, this feature effectively reduces the transmission resources on the Ater interface by 5% to 40%. In the scenario where a large number of calling MSs and called MSs are under the same BSC, less TC resources configured can be configured, and thus the initial cost of network deployment is reduced. This feature improves the speech quality of calls.
Description
Overview of the BSC local switch With this feature, if the calling MS and called MS are under the same BSC, the speech signals on the Abis interface are looped back to the MS without traveling around the NSS. As shown in the following figure, the BSC local switch saves transmission resources of segment C. Note that the BSC local switch is performed on the BSC side without involving the NEs on the NSS side and the speech signals are not routed to the MSC. The transmission resources at the D and E segments of the MSC, however, are not released.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 203 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description In addition, in the BSC local switch, the speech coding schemes of the calling MS and called MS are the same and thus no coding conversion is required. Therefore, the TC resources involved in the BSC local switch can be released, and thus the speech quality is improved.
BSC local switch based on the Ater transmission congestion The BSC local switch involves the following modes: unconditional BSC local switch, BSC switch based on the Ater transmission congestion, and BSC local switch based on the prefix number. With the BSC local switch based on the Ater transmission congestion enabled, the BSC determines whether to perform the local switch based on the congestion of the Ater resources to alleviate the congestion. Speech version adjustment When starting the BSC local switch, ensure that the speech coding rates of the calling MS and called MS are the same. If different speech coding rates are used, the BSC adjusts different rates to the same rate through a forced handover. If the adjustment fails because the calling MS and called MS have no intersection of speech coding, the BSC local switch should not be enabled.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 The lawful interception should be supported by Huawei MSC. GBSS8.1 The supplementary services such as CW/HOLD/MPTY/ECT are supported. The announcement should be supported by Huawei MSC.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 204 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The independent charging of local switch should be supported by Huawei MSC. That is, the operators can adopt flexible charging strategies.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature and the following features are mutually exclusive: BFD-8401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-8601 Abis over IP, or GBFD-8602 A over IP. Therefore, the MS involved in the BSC local switch should come from the IP BTS or the BTS with the transmission optimization enabled. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.9 Hardware Saving

2.9.1 GBFD-5702 TrFO
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the calling MS and called MS use the same speech coding scheme. Thus, the speech signal is coded at the calling MS once and decoded at the called MS once. This can solve the problem that the TRAU repeatedly codes and decodes the speech signal.
Benefits
The TrFO feature enables the calling MS and called MS to use the same speech coding, which prevents the repeat coding and decoding during the MS-MS calling process. This provides better speech quality for users. In addition, the TRAU is not involved in the TrFO, thus saving the TC resources.
Description
Repeat coding and decoding In the traditional MS-MS calling where the TFO/TrFO is not adopted, the speech signal is coded at the calling MS, transmitted on the Um interface, and is then decoded at the first TRAU. The decoded PCM data flow is transmitted on the 64 kbit/s link to the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 205 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description second TRAU for coding and is then transmitted on the Um interface to the called MS for decoding. In the MS-MS calling process, the coding and decoding are continuously performed for twice. This is referred to as repeat coding and decoding.
Overview of TrFO The TrFO feature enables the calling MS and called MS to use the same speech coding. Thus, the speech signal is coded at the calling MS for once and decoded at the called MS for once. This solves the problem of speech signal damage in repeat coding and decoding, thus improving the signal quality. In the GSM network, the coding capability of each cell can be dynamically configured. The coding scheme of the Um interface is determined by the BSS. When implementing the TrFO, the MSC server selects the speech version supported by the cells where the calling MS and called MS are located based on the coding capability of the cells. Then, the MSC sets the expected speech version to a highest value. In this way, the TrFO c an be successfully implemented. 1) The BSC selects the speech version according to the Preferred Codec List carried in the assignment request sent by the MSC. 2) To improve the success rate of TrFO, the BSC sends the Complete Layer 3 Information message carrying the coding schemes supported by the cells to the MSC. 3) To perform the TrFO services on the established calls, the MSC sends the INTERNAL HANDOVER ENQUIRY message carrying the specified Speech Codec to the BSC to trigger the intra-BSC handover.
Differences between TrFO and TFO Both TrFO and TFO use the speech compression in the CN. Both features avoid the repeated code conversions during the MS-MS call and improve the QoS. The two features, however, are different from each other. TFO is enabled, disabled, and controlled by the TRAU after a call is established. When the encoder and decoder use the same coding/decoding scheme, the TFO is enabled to transmit the compressed speech. TrFO, however, does not require the TRAU. It uses the OoBTC to negotiate the coding/decoding type of both the calling MS and called MS before the call is established. Then, the compressed speech is transmitted after the call is established. If the requirement for TrFO is not met, it takes some time to configure the TRAU for restoring the PCM coding/decoding. Without the TRAU, the call fails. In TFO, however, the PCM coding is immediately used when the requirement for TFO is not met. Thus, the speech quality is not affected.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature should be used together with GBFD-8602 A over IP. Dependency on other NEs
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 206 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description This feature should be supported by the CN.
2.10 Static Networking

2.10.1 GBFD-4601 Multi-Cell Function
Availability
Summary
With this feature, one BTS can be configured with up to 12 cells.
Benefits
This feature meets the requirement for special networking and saves the investment of operators.
Description
In some special scenarios, one BTS is required to support more than three cells. In the GSM900/DCS1800 dual-band networking, the following configurations are required: GSM900 Sx/x/x and DCS1800 Sy/y/y. In this case, one BTS should be configured with six cells. In Huawei GBSS, one BTS supports up to 12 cells and meets the requirements of special networking scenarios, especially the dual-band network. This saves the investment of operators.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 207 of 368
2.11 Network Reliability

2.11.1 GBFD-7801 Ring Topology
Availability
Summary
The ring networking mode is a special chain networking mode. Several BTSs form a chain, and the lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC through the transmission link, thus forming a ring. If there is a breakpoint on the ring, the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remain unchanged in networking mode whereas the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a new chain connection in the reverse direction.
Benefits
Compared with the ordinary chain networking, the advantage of the ring topology is that when a connection is broken, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. In this way, the BTSs that precede and follow the breakpoint can work normally, thus improving the robustness of the system.
Description
The ring topology supports the following operations: automatic switchover, manual switchover, querying and dynamically configuring of the switchover parameters, and dynamic data configuration such as adding or deleting a BTS, c ell, or TRX. Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show the ring networking of the BTS: Figure 2-2 Ring networking (1)
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 208 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Figure 2-3 Ring networking (2)
Numbers 0 and 1 shown in Figure 1 refer to port 0 and port 1 of the BTS. In the BTS ring topology, the link established at port 0 is a forward link and the link established at port 1 is a reverse link. The BTS ring topology can be implemented between interface boards but not between subracks. In other words, the BTS ring topology must be implemented between the GEIUBs located in the same subrack, as shown in Figure 2. Generally, the BTS ring topology is a chain of BTS0, BTS1, and BTS2 in sequence, known as a forward direction. In the forward direction as shown in Figure 1, BTS0 is the highest-level BTS, BTS1 is the second-level BTS, and other BTSs are connected analogically. When the link A, B, C, or D is broken, the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remains in the same topology, and the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a chain in a reverse direction. The BTS ring topology is categorized into two types: Huawei BTS ring topology I and Huawei BTS ring topology II. In BTS ring topology I, the BTS with a reverse link is initialized again after transmission disruption, and thus the services of the BTS are disrupted. In BTS ring topology II, the services of the BTS with a reverse link are not disrupted after transmission disruption.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other NEs None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 209 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Dependency on other features of the GBSS Huawei Ring Topology II depends on GBFD-7802 Fast Ring Network Switch.
2.11.2 GBFD-3801 TRX Cooperation

Availability
Summary
With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the cell automatically rectifies the faults. Thus, the services in the cell are not affected before the faulty TRX is replaced.
Benefits
The TRX Cooperation feature ensures that the cell provides services at any time. The probability that the cell is out of service due to the faulty BCCH TRX is reduced. The probability that the call quality in the cell is degraded due to the faulty TRX involved in the baseband FH is reduced. Thus, the reliability of the network is greatly improved.
Description
With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the cell automatically rectifies the faults. Thus, the services in the cell are not affected befor e the faulty TRX is replaced. Based on the type of faulty TRXs and the handling method, the TRX cooperation is classified into BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation. For the non-baseband FH cell, only the BCCH TRX cooperation occurs. For the baseband FH cell, both BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation are likely to occur.
BCCH TRX cooperation In idle state, the MS needs to know some information through the broadcast messages sent on the BCCH. The messages carry information about cell selection, adjacent cell, access control, dedicated channel control, cell identification code, location, system parameters related to the PS services, and so on. When a BCCH TRX of a cell is faulty, all the services in this cell are interrupted. Therefore, when the BCCH TRX is faulty, another available TRX of the cell is used to substitute the faulty BCCH TRX to ensure that the cell can continue providing services. After the fault in the original BCCH TRX is rectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX. This process is called BCCH TRX cooperation.
Baseband FH TRX cooperation In the baseband FH cell, if the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, some speech frames in the call using the FH channel are lost. Thus, the speech quality is degraded. To ensure the speech quality in the cell, when a TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the BSC enables the baseband FH TRX cooperation and changes the FH mode to non-FH mode. In this way, the speech quality of the cell is not affected by the faulty TRX. When the TRX fault is rectified, the BSC changes the non-FH mode to FH mode. This process is called baseband FH TRX cooperation. When the BCCH TRX in a baseband FH cell is faulty, except for BCCH TRX cooperation, baseband FH TRX cooperation can also be performed. That is, the cell is
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 210 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description changed to the non-FH mode. After all the faults in the original BCCH TRX and in the TRX involved in FH are rectified, the baseband FH TRX cooperation can be performed. That is, the BSC changes the non-FH mode to the FH mode.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.11.3 GBFD-7401 MSC Pool

Availability
Summary
With this feature, multiple MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers belonging to one group of BSCs.
Benefits
The MSCs in a MSC pool share the traffic load and resources. Therefore, this feature provides the following benefits:

This feature increases the network capacity and saves the equipment investment. This feature realizes the redundancy backup and thus improves the network reliability because the addition or deletion of an MSC does not affect the services. This feature automatically adjusts the traffic load on an MSC and reduces the operation and maintenance cost of operators. The MSC pool is logically an MSC. Therefore, the number of handovers between MSCs is reduced and the network performance is improved.
Description
With this feature, a maximum of 32 MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers under one group of BSCs. Through the MSC pool, one BSC can be connected to multiple MSCs at the same time. In addition, the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 211 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description the MSCs in the pool according to the NRI or load balancing principle. The following figure shows the typical networking of the MSC Pool feature:
MSC 3 MSC 2 MSC 1 MSC 6 MSC 5 MSC 4
MSC 7
CS pool area 1 RAN node Area 1 RAN node Area 2
RAN node Area 5
RAN node Area 6
RAN node Area 7
RAN node Area 8
PS pool - area 1
PS pool - area 2
In the preceding figure, MSC 1, MSC 2, and MSC 3 form an MSC pool. All the CS services or PS services in the BSC service areas (Area 1, Area 2, Area 5, and Area 6) are routed to the MSC pool for further processing. The following describes the routing policies:
Routing by network load For the newly-registered MS, the BSC selects an MSC by using the load balancing algorithm based on the IMSI carried in the CMP L3 message, the status of MSCs in the MSC pool, and the available capacity. Then, the BSC directs the traffic of the MS to the selected MSC for processing. If the MS without the SIM card initiates an emergency call, the BSC selects the MSC based on the IMEI, the status of MSCs in the MSC pool, and the available capacity and then directs the traffic of the MS to the selected MSC for processing. Routing by the NRI After the MS is registered, the MSC allocates the TMSI containing the NRI to the MS. The NRI is used for identifying an MSC in the MSC pool. During the call processing, the MS sends the TMSI to the network side. On receiving the TMSI, the BSC resolves the NRI from the TMSI and then directs the traffic to the MSC based on the MSC signaling point corresponding to the NRI in the configuration data. With this feature, the BSCs in the pool area share a group of MSCs. If high traffic hours of each BSC are at different time, less CN resources are required compared with the network where the MSC Pool feature is disabled. This saves the investment on the CN equipment. When an MSC in the MSC pool is faulty, the traffic of the newly accessed MS is automatically directed to another normal MSC, thus enhancing the network reliability. When some maintenance operations such as software upgrading are performed on an MSC in the MSC pool, the traffic on this MSC can be easily directed to other MSCs.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 212 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description After the operation is complete, the traffic is reallocated to the original MSC. This reduces the service interruption duration and thus improves the user satisfaction.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0 The MSC Pool feature in case of A over IP is supported.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the NSS.
2.11.4 GBFD-9701 SGSN Pool

Availability
Summary
With this feature, multiple SGSNs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers belonging to one group of BSCs.
Benefits
The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share the traffic load and resources. This feature provides the following benefits:

Increases the network capacity and saves the investment on equipment. Implements redundancy backup and thus improves the network reliability because the addition or deletion of an SGSN does not affect the services. Reduces handovers between the SGSNs because the SGSNs in an SGSN pool are logically one SGSN and thus improves the network performance.
Description
This feature, which is similar to the MSC Pool feature, enables a maximum of 32 SGSNs to form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers belonging to one group of BSCs. With this feature, one BSC can be connected to multiple SGSNs at the same time. In addition, the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the SGSNs in the pool according to the network resource identifier (NRI) or load balancing principle.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 213 of 368
RAN node Area 5
RAN node Area 6
RAN node Area 7
RAN node Area 8
PS pool - area 1
PS pool - area 2
SGSN 1 SGSN 2
SGSN 3 SGSN 4 SGSN 5
SGSN 6
The following describes the routing selection modes:
Routing by network load When an MS accesses the network for the first time, it generates a random TLLI and sends it to the BSC because it does not have a local/foreign TLLI. Then, the BSC uses the load balancing algorithm to select an SGSN for the MS according to the status and available capacity of the SGSNs in the pool and routes the MS to the selected SGSN.
Routing by the NRI After an MS accesses the network for the first time, the SGSN allocates a new local TLLI that includes the NRI information associated with this SGSN to the MS. When the MS processes services, it sends the NRI information to the network through the local/foreign TLLI. Then, the BSC obtains the NRI from the local/foreign TLLI and routes the services to the SGSN corresponding to the NRI in the configuration data. Using the SGSN pool, the BSCs in the pool share a group of SGSNs. If peak hours of traffic on each BSC are different, less CN resources are required in comparison with the non SGSN pool networking. This saves the investment on the CN equipment. When an SGSN in the SGSN pool is faulty, the new services are automatically transferred to another normal SGSN and thus the network reliability is enhanced. When some maintenance operations such as software upgrade are performed on an SGSN in the SGSN pool, the traffic on this SGSN can be easily transferred to other SGSNs. After the operation is complete, the traffic is reallocated to the original SGSN. This reduces the service interruption duration and thus improves the user satisfaction.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 214 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the SGSN.
2.11.5 GBFD-6601 Abis Bypass

Availability
Summary
In the case of chain topology, when the power supply to a BTS fails, this feature can bypass this BTS (that is, this BTS is used only as the path) so that the signals of the lower-level BTSs can be sent to the BSC.
Benefits
Chain topology is the main topology among the current networking modes. In chain topology, if the power supply to the upper-level BTS fails, the transmission of the lower-level BTSs cannot proceed normally. With this feature, the lower-level BTSs can work normally even if the power supply to the upper-level BTS fails. Thus, this feature provides higher reliability for the network in chain topology, especially in the areas where the power supply fails frequently.
Description
To improve the working capability of the BSS system in the areas where the power supply fails frequently, Huawei BTS provides the Abis Bypass feature. This feature is applicable in the case of chain topology. When the power supply to a BTS fails, the BTS automatically bypasses the Abis interface so that the lower-level BTSs in the chain network can work normally. When the power supply is restored, the BTS and the lower-level BTSs are reset automatically.
Enhancement
In GBSS8.1, this feature is supported from the 3900 series base station.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 215 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description In the case of the BTS3012 and BTS3012AE, the DABB is required. In the case of the BTS3006C/BTS3002E, the dedicated DMCM module is required. In the case of the 3900 series bases station, the BBU can implement this feature. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature can be used together with the Flex-Abis feature only when the ring topology is not used in TDM networking mode. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.11.6 GBFD-7802 Fast Ring Network Switch

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the ring network switchover is accelerated and the BTS need not be initialized in the reverse ring direction. Thus, the call drops due to the ring network switchover and the impact of the switchover on the new calls are reduced.
Benefits
This feature reduces the impact of the ring network switchover on the services, thus increasing the network reliability and improving the user satisfaction.
Description
With this feature, when a transmission link in the ring network is faulty, all the BTSs behind the faulty point in the ring network perform switchover in the reverse direction. That is, the OML is set up on port 1 instead of port 0. For example, in the following figure, when the transmission link in the C section is faulty, the BTS2 and BTS3 enter into reverse ring state. The lower GEIUB, BTS3, and BTS2 then form a new chain connection. The BTS2 and BTS3, however, need to be reinitialized. This causes call drops in these two BTSs. In addition, new calls cannot access the network during the initialization process.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 216 of 368
With the Fast Ring Network Switch feature, the ring network switchover is accelerated and the BTS need not be initialized in the reverse ring direction. Thus, the call drops due to the ring network switchover and the impact of the switchover on the new calls are reduced. As a result, the network reliability is increased and the user satisfaction is improved.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS In ring topology, this feature must be enabled when the GBFD-8401 Abis Transmission Optimization feature is used. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.11.7 GBFD-3721 Robust Air Interface Signalling

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the FACCH frames and SACCH frames are sent repeatedly when the radio quality is poor. Thus, the anti-interference capability of the signaling links on the FACCH and
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 217 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description SACCH is enhanced and the possibility that the MS and the BSC succes sfully receive the signaling messages is increased. This feature involves repeated sending of downlink FACCH frames and repeated sending of uplink/downlink SACCH frames.
Benefits
Repeated sending of FACCH frames improves the FACCH link performance of the ordinary MS by 2 dB and the FACCH link performance of the MS in R6 version by 4 dB to 5 dB. Repeated sending of SACCH frames improves the SACCH link performance of the ordinary MS by 4 dB to 5 dB. The improvement in the FACCH and SACCH performance reduces call drops and increases the accuracy of the handover decision and power control decision of the BSC.
Description
In the network with tight frequency reuse and poor radio transmission performance, the messages sent through the FACCH frames or the SACCH frames may be lost due to high bit error rate on the Um interface. This feature consists of repeated sending of downlink FACCH frames and repeated sending of uplink/downlink SACCH frames. Repeated sending of downlink FACCH frames: With this feature, when the receive quality in the downlink measurement report is lower than the specified threshold, the BTS determines whether to resend the FACCH frames. The repeated sending of downlink FACCH frames can increase the possibility that the MS successfully receives the signaling messages. Repeated sending of uplink/downlink SACCH frames: With this feature, if the BTS detects that the SACCH frames are incorrectly decoded, it instructs the MS to resend the recent SACCH frame. If the MS detects that the SACCH frames are not correctly decoded, it instructs the BTS to resend the recent SACCH frame. With this feature, the voice quality is slightly affected because the signaling messages are sent through frame stealing. When the radio quality is poor, resending of signaling messages in the downlink can reduce call drops caused by decoding failure. And resending of signaling messages in the uplink can increase the accuracy of the handover decision and power control decision of the BSC by increasing the possibility of correctly decoding the uplink measurement reports.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 218 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and the BTS.
2.11.8 GBFD-7803 Abis Transmission Backup

Availability
Summary
When the active SDH transmission link is faulty because of a natural disaster, the GBSS automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link over the Abis interface to a backup satellite transmission link, thus maintaining the normal operation of the network. This feature is applicable in the case of Abis over TDM and not applicable in the cas e of Abis over IP.
Benefits
This feature provides backup transmission links over the Abis interface, thus increasing the reliability of the GSM network.
Description
In the case of natural disaster, the GBSS devices sometimes work normally; however, the GSM network cannot provide services due to the terrestrial transmission disruption. With this feature, the backup satellite transmission links can be used for the communication between the BSC and the BTS so that the GSM devices can provide services in emergency conditions. When this feature is enabled, satellite transmission links are backed up for terrestrial transmission link. When the terrestrial transmission link is faulty, the GBSS automatically uses the satellite transmission link. After this feature is enabled, the BTS periodically checks whether the active terrestrial transmission links are recovered. If the active terrestrial transmission links are recovered, the GBSS devices trigger the transmission link rollback mechanism to use the terrestrial transmission links again. With this feature, no information is transmitted over the backup satellite transmission links. Thus, the satellite bandwidth is saved. This feature is applicable only in Abis over TDM and not applicable in Abis over IP or Abis over HDLC.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 219 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-3901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface GBFD-7801 Ring Topology Dependency on other NEs None.
2.12 High Speed Coverage

2.12.1 GBFD-10101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
Availability
Summary
The automatic frequency correction (AFC) feature uses a special balancing algorithm to estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the frequency of the GMSK signal sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. The AFC estimates the frequency offset between the frequency of each received burst and the standard frequency in real time. Then, the estimated frequency offset is used to correct the RX working frequency of the BTS.
Benefits
This feature improves the decoding performance of the physical link in the uplink in the fast moving condition, thus ensuring the physical transmission performance and reliable connections between the fast-moving MS and the BTS. In addition, this feature enables the system to support a telecommunication environment with a speed higher than 500 km/h, which serves as the basis of the high-speed frequency offset handover algorithm.
Description
AFC is a BTS frequency correction algorithm designed for fast-moving MSs. This algorithm ensures reliable radio links and continuous services with good voice quality when the MS moves at a speed of 500 km/h. According to Doppler frequency shift principle, the frequency of the signals sent by the fast-moving MS shifts. The frequency shift information is related to the moving speed and direction of the MS relative to the BTS. The BTS digital signal processor uses a special balancing algorithm to estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the frequency of the GMSK signal sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. The AFC estimates the frequency offset between the frequency of each received burst and the standard frequency in real time. Then, the estimated frequency offset is used to correct the RX working frequency of the BTS. This improves the decoding performance of the physical link in the uplink in the fast moving condition, thus ensuring the physical transmission performance and reliable connections between the fast-moving MS and the BTS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 220 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The performance of AFC depends on the vertical distance between the BTS and the railway. The shorter the vertical distance is, the faster the change of the frequency offset is when the train approaches the BTS. Therefore, the AFC loop cannot keep pace with the change of frequency offset, leading to a great residual frequency offset. Simulation results show that the frequency offset smaller than 100 Hz has little impact on the demodulation performance. Therefore, when the TRX is on the GSM900 band and the speed of the train is 600 km/h, only the vertical distance of more than 100 m is supported if the loop bandwidth is 2 Hz. In the case of a lower demand for the voice quality, the vertical distance between the BTS and the railway can be shorter.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.12.2 GBFD-10102 Fast Move Handover

Availability
Summary
This feature enables better cell handover in a short period of time.
Benefits
Generally, the chain cell algorithm is not used because of the special characteristics of the railway and highway users. This may lead to slow handover or call drops during handover. With this feature, the handover success rate in the fast-moving condition is increased and thus the subscriber satisfaction is increased.
Description
In a fast-moving train, it takes a short time for an MS to move across a cell. Therefore, a handover must be performed quickly. To reduce the handover failure rate, a handover must be quickly initiated when required. If the handover fails (for example, when the radio interface suddenly incurs interference), a second handover must be quickly initiated.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 221 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The fast PBGT handover algorithm enables better cell handover in a short period of time. Compared with the existing PBGT handover algorithm, the fast PBGT handover algorithm has the following improvements:

Handing over an MS to a proper target cell by predicting the moving direction of the MS. Accelerating the handover decision to improve the handover rate.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.12.3 GBFD-10103 Chain Cell Handover

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the fast-moving MS to be preferentially handed over to the chain neighboring cell.
Benefits
This feature increases the handover success rate in the fast-moving condition and thus increases the subscriber satisfaction.
Description
By predicting the moving direction of a fast-moving MS, this feature enables the fast-moving MS to hand over between two chain neighboring cells. Thus, the handover success rate is increased and the network quality is improved. Chain neighboring cells ensure reliable handovers between cells.
Chain neighboring cells are formed on the basis of the linear coverage characteristic of the fast-moving environment such as the railway.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 222 of 368
A handover to a chain neighboring cell is preferred. In addition, handover to the moving direction of the user should be guaranteed.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.12.4 GBFD-10104 Multi-site Cell

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the subsites in different physical sites to be set to a logical cell, which is also called a cascading cell. A subsite refers to a certain area physically covered by multiple RRU/RFUs that belong to the same BBU. In the scenarios such as railway, tunnel, or indoor coverage, a cascading cell can reduce handovers, improve the coverage efficiency, and enhance the user experience.
Benefits

This feature reduces handovers between cells and increases the handover success rate. A cascading cell increases the effective coverage distance of each subsite and improves the coverage efficiency of the entire cell because few handover areas are required between different subsites.
Description
Cell cascading means that different subsites in the same BBU physically belong to different sites but logically belong to the same cell. The principle is shown in the following figure.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 223 of 368
Cascading cells are carried in multiple subsites. These subsites have the same cell parameters such as physical configurations, the number of TRXs, and frequencies. One cascading cell has only one primary subsite responsible for cell management and service control. Other subsites are secondary subsites. Under the control of the primary subsite, these secondary subsites implement cell service functions such as the selection of available TRXs and the activation of channels. During the initial access of an MS, all the subsites calculate the uplink signal noise ratio (SNR) of the MS respectively and report the result to the primary subsite. Then the primary subsite selects the subsite with the optimal SNR as the serving subsite. All the subsites continuously calculate the uplink SNR of the MS and then report the SNR to the primary subsite. When the SNR reported by an adjacent subsite is better than the SNR reported by the serving subsite, the handover between subsites is triggered. When the MS is handed over between subsites, the new subsite is connected and then the old subsite is disconnected without the interruption of services. In this manner, seamless handover is implemented and the QoS is guaranteed.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 224 of 368
2.13 2G/3G Seamless Coverage

2.13.1 GBFD-4301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
Availability
Summary
The BSS system supports the handover and reselection of MSs between the GSM network and the WCDMA network.
Benefits
This feature enables the MS to roam and be handed over from the WCDMA network to the GSM network. This can solve the problem of insufficient c overage in the early stage of the WCDMA network development. With this feature, the GSM network can smoothly evolve to the WCDMA network, thus saving the operator's investment.
Description
GSM/WCDMA interoperability refers to the handover and roaming of dual-mode MSs between the GSM network and the WCDMA network. Huawei BSS supports the handover and roaming of dual-mode MSs between the GSM network and the WCDMA network. The handover and roaming include the following situations: (1) In idle mode, an MS roams from the GSM system to the WCDMA system. (2) In idle mode, an MS roams from the WCDMA system to the GSM system. (3) In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the GSM system to the WCDMA system. (4) In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.
Roaming in idle mode Through PLMN reselection, an MS can be handed over from the GSM network to the WCDMA network, or from the WCDMA network to the GSM network. The selection of the GSM network or the WCDMA network is determined by the network operator. Usually the WCDMA MSs preferentially select the WCDMA network. The PLMN reselection can be scheduled on the MS. The reselection time is determined by the operator. To inform the MS about the information on the WCDMA neighboring cell, the GBSS system needs to add the description of the WCDMA neighboring cell to the system information. The system information 3 is modified to indicate whether the system information 2 quarter exists. The system information 2 quarter includes information about cell reselection, measurement, and WCDMA neighboring cell. Through system reselection, a WCDMA MS can be handed over to a GSM neighboring cell when the signal in the WCDMA network is weak.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 225 of 368
CS domain handover in busy mode The handover from the WCDMA system to the GSM system is determined by the UMTS. When receiving the handover request from the MSC, the BSS works with the MSC to implement the handover based on the resource situation. Then, the MS in busy mode in the GSM cell measures the WCDMA neighboring cell based on the neighboring cell information in the system information and submits the measurement report to the BSC. The BSC then makes decisions according to the information in the measurement report and initiates inter-RA T handover when the requirements for the WCDMA cell handover are met.
PS domain interoperability Huawei GBSS does not support PS domain handovers. The interoperability between the WCDMA system and the GPRS/EDGE system is performed through the autonomous cell reselection of the MS. The inter-RA T NACC feature can speed up the cell reselection from the WCDMA system to the GPRS/EDGE system. The cell reselection of the network-controlled MS from the GPRS/EDGE system to the WCDMA system is implemented through the inter-RA T NC2 feature.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS, MSC, SGSN, HLR, and the WCDMA-related NEs.
2.13.2 GBFD-4302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

Availability
Summary
GSM/TD-SCDMA interoperability refers to the handover and reselection of dual-mode MSs between the GSM network and the TD-SCDMA network when the MSs process CS services and PS services.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 226 of 368
Benefits
This feature enables the MS to roam and be handed over from the TD-SCDMA network to the GSM network. This can solve the problem of insufficient coverage in the early stage of the TD-SCDMA network development and achieve continuous network coverage. With this feature, the GSM network can smoothly evolve into the TD-SCDMA network. Thus, the operators' investment is saved.
Description
GSM/TD-SCDMA interoperability refers to the handover and roaming of dual-mode MSs between the GSM network and the TD-SCDMA network. Huawei BSS supports the handover and roaming of dual-mode MSs between the GSM network and the TD-SCDMA network. The handover and roaming scenarios are as follows: (1) In idle mode, an MS roams from the GSM system to the TD-SCDMA system. (2) In idle mode, an MS roams from the TD-SCDMA system to the GSM system. (3) In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the GSM system to the TD-SCDMA system. (4) In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the TD-SCDMA system to the GSM system.
PS domain interoperability Huawei GBSS does not support PS domain handovers. The interoperability between the TD-SCDMA system and the GPRS/EDGE system is performed through the autonomous cell reselection of the MS. The inter-RA T network assisted cell change (NACC) feature can speed up the cell reselection from the TD-SCDMA system to the GPRS/EDGE system. The cell reselection of the network-controlled MS from the GPRS/EDGE system to the TD-SCDMA system is implemented through the inter-RA T NC2 feature.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS, the MSC, the SGSN, the HLR, and the NEs related to the TD-SCDMA network.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 227 of 368
2.13.3 GBFD-4321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover

Availability
Summary
In a coexistent GSM-WCDMA network, the operator can classify services into different types according to the operation policies. Then, the operator determines whether a service preferentially uses the radio resources of the GSM system or the WCDMA system. During call access or the handover, the BSC works with the MSC to perform the handover from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.
Benefits
With this feature, the advantages of the GSM system and the WCDMA system are fully utilized and thus the service quality is improved and the user experience is enhanced. In addition, the operators' investment is saved and the usage of the network resources is maximized.
Description
With the application of the WCDMA system, the coexistent GSM-WCDMA network is widely in use. The service quality on the two radio access systems is different. Therefore, it is necessary to immediately implement the use of different system resources for different services. According to the service hierarchy principle, different services can be preferentially handed over to different systems. For example, the CS services are preferentially handed over to the GSM system whereas the PS services are preferentially retained in the WCDMA system. In the assignment procedure, the MSC sends the service handover information to the BSC through the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message. If the service handover information indicates that the call should be preferentially processed in the UTRAN, the directed retry procedure is initiated to hand over the call to the WCDMA system. The HANDOVER REQUEST message received by the BSC may also carry the service handover information and the BSC uses this information for the subsequent handover decision.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 228 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description This feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-4301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability Dependency on other NEs None.
2.13.4 GBFD-4322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

Availability
Summary
When the cell load in the GSM system is high, the BSC can initiate the handover from the GSM system to the WCDMA system based on the load of the GSM system and the WCDMA system respectively to balance the overall load in the network, thus maximizing the usage of the network resources.
Benefits
This feature balances the load of the WCDMA system and the GSM system, thus improving the service quality and the usage of the network resources.
Description
With the application of the WCDMA system, the coexistent GSM-WCDMA network is widely in use. Therefore, the usage of the resources in the two radio access systems needs to be maximized. When the load of one radio access system is heavy whereas the load of the other radio access system with the same coverage is light, the load-based inter-RA T handover can be initiated to balance the load of the two systems if the services of the current user can be supported by the other system. The load information about the WCDMA system is transparently transmitted to the BSC through the MSC. Then the BSC determines whether to initiate the inter-RA T handover based on the load information about the WCDMA system and the load information about the BSC. Meanwhile, the load information about the BSC is carried in the handover request message for the reference of the target system during the inter-RA T handover decision.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 229 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description This feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-4301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability Dependency on other NEs None.
2.13.5 GBFD-4323 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

Availability
Summary
This feature is designed to optimize the 2G/3G cell reselection function (3G network includes the WCDMA network and the TD-SCDMA network). It enables dual-mode MSs in idle state or in packet transfer state to adopt different reselection polic ies to access the 2G network or 3G network as required.
Benefits

Helps the operator to determine whether to select the 2G or 3G network according to the network planning requirements when the MS is in idle state or in packet transfer state. Reduces service disruptions caused by frequent cell reselection.
Description
During the 3G network construction, operators need to select a proper network planning strategy to control the MSs to select the 2G network or the 3G network based on the coverage of the 3G network and the compatibility of dual-mode MSs with the 3G network. This feature provides different cell reselection strategies based on the MS status. For example, in the early phase of the 3G network construction, operators expect that the 3G network can share some traffic of the 2G network. The data transmission of the MS in packet transfer state, however, may be interrupted after cell reselection because the coverage of the 3G network is imperfect or the compatibility between the MS and 3G network is poor. In such a case, the KPIs are deteriorated. In addition, the current 3GPP protocols do not support the NACC feature between the GERAN and the UTRAN. Thus, the services of the MS in packet transfer state are inevitably interrupted during the inter-RA T cell reselection and thus the quality of the PS services is deteriorated. With this feature, operators allow the MS in idle state to search for neighboring 3G cells by setting the parameter Qsearch_I to a specific value between 0 and 14. Similarly, operators can prohibit the MS in packet transfer state to search for neighboring 3G cells by setting the parameter Qsearch_P to 15. In this manner, operators can control the MS's access to the 2G network or the 3G network according to the MS state. This feature and the Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) feature are mutually exclusive. With the NC2 feature, the MS in packet transfer state can select a neighboring 3G cell through the BSC's control of the inter-RA T cell reselection. With this feature, however, the MS in packet transfer state can be prohibited from selecting a neighboring 3G cell. This problem can be solved by configuring priorities for these two features.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 230 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other NEs None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature and the GBFD-6201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) feature are mutually exclusive.
2.14 BTS Satellite Transmission

2.14.1 GBFD-3901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
Availability
Summary
Satellite communication features wide coverage, fine mobility, flexible link scheduling, and good topography adaptability. With this feature, operators can deploy BTSs to provide radio services in mountainous regions, outlying areas, isolated islands, and other areas that that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission.
Benefits
With this feature, the operator can deploy BTSs in the areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission, thus solving the communication problem in those areas. This feature can also be used for emergency communication.
Description
The Abis interface of ordinary GSM equipment does not support satellite transmission because satellite transmission encounters problems such as delay, jitter, and bit error. This feature takes these factors into account, makes improvements on the Abis signaling processing, voice processing, and clock processing, and uses special satellite transmission equipment, thus addressing the drawbacks of satellite transmission.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 231 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description With this feature, the voice quality of the CS services can reach the normal level. However, there is a certain delay in voice because there is a long transmission delay in satellite transmission. In the cell using satellite transmission, the EDGE services are supported.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.15 BSC Satellite Transmission

2.15.1 GBFD-3902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface
Availability
Summary
Satellite communication features wide coverage, fine mobility, flexible link scheduling, and good topography adaptability. This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide radio services in the areas that the conventional transmission cannot reach.
Benefits
In the areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission, hot spots on special occasions, or emergency conditions, this feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide radio services. The satellite transmission resources over the A interface can be shared with other interfaces.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 232 of 368
Description
The conventional terrestrial transmission has the problems such as small coverage, poor topography adaptability, and poor flexibility. With this feature, the operator can deploy the BSS system in isolated is lands or small areas to share the same CN resources with other BSS systems. Huawei also provides the A interface monitoring function. This enables the operator to monitor the circuit usage over the A interface based on which the operator can extend the circuit (or add the transmission links). Thus, the cost of the satellite link usage is effectively reduced.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.15.2 GBFD-3903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface

Availability
Summary
Satellite communication features wide coverage, fine mobility, flexible link scheduling, and good topography adaptability. This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission.
Benefits

This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide radio services in special geographical areas or emergency conditions. With this feature, the BSC signaling processing unit can be deployed on the BTS side and the TRAU unit can be configured in the CN equipment room. Thus, the transmission cost is reduced because the Ater interface adopts the 4: 1 multiplexing mode.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 233 of 368
The satellite transmission resources over the Ater interface can be shared with other interfaces.
Description
This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission. With this feature, the TRAU can be configured in the CN equipment room. This enables the circuit over the Ater interface between the BSC signaling processing unit and the TRAU to use the 4:1 multiplexing mode. As a result, the bandwidth required by the A interface circuit is greatly reduced and thus the cost of using the A interface is reduced. In addition, Huawei provides the Ater interface monitoring function. This enables the operator to configure the bandwidth for satellite transmission over the Ater interface as required and dynamically extend the circuit with the increase of the traffic volume. In this manner, the circuit lease cost and the operation and maintenance cost are greatly reduced.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.15.3 GBFD-3904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the operator can deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission.
Benefits
This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide PS services in special geographical areas or emergency conditions.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 234 of 368
The satellite transmission resources over the Pb interface can be shared with other interfaces.
Description
This feature enables the operator to deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to be reached through conventional transmission. The PCU can be configured in the CN equipment room for multiple BSCs to share.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.15.4 GBFD-3905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface

Availability
Summary
Benefits

This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide PS services in special geographical areas. The satellite transmission resources over the Gb interface can be shared with other interfaces.
Description
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 235 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.16 Big Capacity BSC

2.16.1 GBFD-5201 High Speed Signaling
Availability
Summary
With this feature, N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7 signaling. A maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used.
Benefits
This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband signaling. In addition, this feature saves the signaling point resources and reduces the networking complexity while meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high processing capacity of the BSC6000.
Description
With network expansion, development of new services, popularization of the short message service and wireless intelligent network service, and increase in the traffic volume, the signaling flow between different signaling points increases rapidly. According to the protocols related to the SS7 signaling, a maximum of 16 signaling links are allowed between single signaling points. If the 64 kbit/s signaling link is used, a maximum of 1 Mbit/s bandwidth can be provided for a single signaling point in the entire system. This is far from the requirements for the signaling link bandwidth when the BSC6000 is in full configuration. With this feature, the N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7 signaling. Therefore, the bandwidth of a signaling link is extended to N x 64 kit/s and a
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 236 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used. The high-speed signaling has the following characteristics:
Large capacity This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband signaling, saves the signaling point resources, and reduces the networking complexity while meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high processing capacity of the BSC6000.
Flexible bandwidth configuration The bandwidth of the high-speed signaling link is N x 64 kbit/s, where N ranges from 1 to 31. This enables the operator to flexibly configure the physical bandwidth according to the traffic volume of the BSC6000, thus reducing the transmission cost.
Low delay The high-speed signaling link uses bound timeslots to carry the signaling data. This effectively reduces the transmission delay over the A interface when the traffic volume is low, thus reducing the call establishment duration to some extent. This feature is used together with the Local Multiple Signaling Points feature to support more flexible signaling networking mode.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0 This application enhancement supports the use of high-speed signaling in the MSC pool.
Dependency
2.16.2 GBFD-5301 Local Multiple Signaling Points

Availability
Summary
With this feature, a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. Each signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 237 of 368
Benefits
This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband signaling. In addition, this feature is compatible with the traditional signaling networking mode while meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high processing capacity of the BSC6000. Thus, the operators' investment is saved.
Description
With network expansion, development of new services, popularization of the short message service and wireless intelligent network service, and increase in the traffic volume, the signaling flow between different signaling points increases rapidly. According to the protocols related to the SS7 signaling, a maximum of 16 signaling links are allowed between single signaling points. If the 64 kbit/s signaling link is used, a maximum of 1 Mbit/s bandwidth can be provided for a single signaling point in the entire system. This is far from the requirements for the signaling link bandwidth when the BSC6000 is in full configuration. With this feature, a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. Each signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points. If a physical node is logically classified into N signaling points, the number of links between this physical node and the remote signaling point is extended to N x 16 because the maximum number of signaling links between the OSP and DSP is 16. This feature breaks the limitation of 16 signaling links of a single signaling point using the narrowband signaling and thus meets the signaling link requirements for large capacity processing of the BSC6000. In addition, the requirements for the signaling networking capability of the CN are reduced because the high-speed signaling technology is not used. Thus, the operators' investment is saved. This feature is used together with the High Speed Signaling feature to support more flexible signaling networking mode.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0 This application enhancement supports the use of local multiple signaling points in the MSC pool.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 238 of 368
2.17 Maintainability
2.17.1 GBFD-4701 Semi-Permanent Connection
Availability
Summary
The semipermanent connection feature enables some of the idle E1 times lots in the existing network to be used to transmit information such as service hall information, alarm information on the BTS AC power supply, and other maintenance information.
Benefits
Using semipermanent connection prevents the arrangement of new paths to transmit the external maintenance information. As a result, the transmission networking is simplified, the maintenance cost is reduced, and thereby the transmission cost is greatly reduced. With this feature, the semipermanent connections on multiple GMPS/GEPS converge on one E1 through the timeslot switching on the interface boards. Thus, the investment on the transmission and timeslot switching devices (DXX devices) are saved.
Description
When the operator needs to transmit some data that does not have a high requirement for the transmission bandwidth from one terminal to another terminal, this feature enables the idle transmission resources in the GSM network to be used to transmit the data. Semipermanent connection refers to the situation that the information collected on the E1 timeslots of the receiver is exchanged to the E1 timeslots of the transmitter through the intra-BSS timeslot switching function. The collected information is transparently transmitted within the BSS. The transparent transmission path is retained permanently without change in the link configuration. The timeslot switching process is shown in the following figure.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 239 of 368
Huawei BSS supports the semipermanent connection at four rates: 8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, and 64 kbit/s. The access points of all paths carrying the semipermanent connections into the BSS are E1 interface timeslots. The BSS switches over multiple semipermanent connections to one E1 and then exports the collected maintenance information to the devices in the external network. Huawei BSS supports two types of semipermanent connections: common semipermanent connection and monitoring timeslot.
Common semipermanent connection In the case of common semipermanent connection, the interface boards in the BSC are used for input and output, and only the BSC is involved in the timeslot switching function from the input timeslot to the output timeslot. With common semipermanent connection, the external information of the BSC equipment room can be sent to the CN equipment room using the transmission resources over the A interface. In addition, simple DXX devices can be used to combine multiple times lots into one E1 for transmission. As a result, the transmission cost is reduced and the DXX device investment is saved.
Monitoring times lot
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 240 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description With monitoring timeslot, the timeslot switching function is performed by the BTS and the BSC. One end of the monitoring timeslot path is connected to the BTS port and the other end is connected to the interface board in the BSC. The monitoring times lot is used for transmitting external data (such as the information about the alarm of the power supply) on the BTS side. In a cascade of BTSs, the upper-level BTS is also involved in the timeslot switching function to transparently transmit the monitoring timeslot data for the lower-level BTS.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0 This application enhancement supports configuration of monitoring times lots at the transmission optimization site.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware The monitoring timeslot should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS When monitoring timeslots are used at the transmission optimization site, E1 connection paths should be configured between the GEHUB and the GEIUB/GOIUB. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.17.2 GBFD-6401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 241 of 368
Summary
With this feature, you can collect the information about the specified MS if required and then collect the traced faults in a specific network element using only a few system resources. In this manner, you can rectify the faults effectively.
Benefits
As the communication network becomes increasingly complicated, it is more and more difficult to locate the service faults in MSs. You can detect the section where the faults occur only when the information about the whole process of one MS is collected. Using the end-to-end MS signaling tracing feature, you can completely record the service activities of an MS and then locate the section where faults occur. The recorded information covers all the network elements involved in the service of an MS. If the traced MS is reasonably defined, the valid location information can be obtained without using a large amount of processing and transmission resources of the system in the whole tracing process.
Description
With this feature, you can create or delete a tracing task in the HLR. The HLR sends the tracing activation message to the MSC/VLR where the MS is located. When the traced MS initiates services, the MSC notifies the BSC to perform tracing. When the MS is switched over to a new MSC, location update is initiated. Then the HLR sends a tracing activation message to the new MSC/VLR and the tracing task of the original MSC is complete. When receiving the message of starting a tracing task from the MSC, the BSC traces information about all the interfaces and then saves the information to the BAM. The information is saved as a .tmf file, which is used for interface tracing on the BSC6000 LMT. The file can be browsed through the function of interface tracing review on the BSC6000 LMT. When browsing the information about a traced MS, you can choose a time segment and choose the message field to be viewed through a message filter window. The BSC6000 supports a maximum of 64 tracing tasks (including single-MS signaling tracing, interface signaling tracing, and end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks). There should be at least 16 end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks. If the number of existing end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks reaches or exceeds 16, determine whether the total number of tasks reaches the upper threshold when creating an end-to-end MS signaling tracing task. If the total number does not reach the upper threshold, you can create more tasks. If the total number reaches the upper threshold, task creation fails.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 242 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the HLR and the MSC/VLR.
2.17.3 GBFD-6402 Maintenance Mode Alarm

Availability
Summary
This feature distinguishes the maintenance mode alarms from the ordinary alarms to avoid the impact of the maintenance mode alarms on the ordinary alarms.
Benefits
This feature prevents sudden increase in the number of alarms during engineering operations such as network upgrade and maintenance, thus improving the network maintenance efficiency.
Description
With the network operation and development, the engineering operations such as network upgrade, capacity expansion, and commissioning of the BSS system are inevitable. Therefore, a large amount of maintenance mode alarms are generated due to the temporary state of the engineering operations. If these alarms are not separated from the ordinary alarms, the ordinary alarms generated by the BTS/BSC are masked. This greatly affects the operators' normal monitoring of the network. This feature distinguishes the maintenance mode alarms from the ordinary alarms. By setting the engineering object before engineering operations, the EMS/NMS system can distinguish the maintenance mode alarms from the ordinary alarms. In addition, the EMS/NMS system can configure the receiving strategy of the maintenance mode alarms and filter out the maintenance mode alarms, thus reducing the impact of the maintenance mode alarms on the system load.
Configuration of the engineering object This feature supports configuration of the BTS or the BSC as the engineering object. When the BTS is configured as the engineering object, all the related device alarms, service alarms, and transmission alarms are maintenance mode alarms. When the BSC is configured as the engineering object, all the BSC alarms and the alarms about the BTSs managed by the BSC are maintenance mode alarms. The duration of the maintenance mode alarm can be set. The engineering object is restored to non-engineering object after the set duration. The alarms generated by the non-engineering object are viewed as ordinary alarms.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 243 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by theM2000.
2.18 Power Control Algorithm

2.18.1 GBFD-7602 Active Power Control
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the uplink power and the downlink power are calculated immediately after an MS successfully accesses the network or an intra-BSC handover is successfully performed. Then, the network informs the calculation result of the uplink power to the MS. The BTS and the MS then transmit signals at proper power. Thus, power control is performed immediately.
Benefits
Through the power control of both the BTS and the MS, the system interference is reduced and the service quality is improved. In addition, as the power consumption of the BTS and MS is reduced, energy is saved, and the service time of the MS is prolonged.
Description
With this feature, the uplink power and the downlink power are calculated immediately after an MS successfully accesses the network or an intra-BSC handover is successfully performed. Then, the network informs the MS of the result of uplink power calculation. The BTS and the MS transmit signals at proper power. Thus, power control is performed immediately.
Active power control during MS access When an MS accesses the network, the following power control procedures are performed: Calculation of the path loss: According to the 3GPP TS 45.005, the path loss of the MS is obtained on the basis of the transmit power used by the MS when the MS accesses the network, and the uplink signal strength measured by the BTS. Calculation of the transmit power: The transmit power of the MS and the BTS is obtained on the basis of the path loss of the MS and the expected signal strength in the uplink and downlink.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 244 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Execution of power control: When the TCH request is successful or when the MS accesses the network, power control is performed immediately. This enables the BTS and the MS to immediately transmit signals at proper power.
Active power control during intra-BSC handover Calculation of the path loss: During the intra-BSC handover, the path loss of the MS is obtained on the basis of the BCCH signal strength of the target cell recorded by the source cell before the handover and the transmit power of the BCCH TRX of the target cell. The calculation of the transmit power and the execution of power control procedures are the same as those of active power control during MS access.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.19 Network Security

2.19.1 GBFD-3501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm
Availability
Summary
This feature is used when the voice, data, and signaling of the user are transmitted over the Um interface.
Benefits
An evident advantage of the GSM system over the analog system is that the unauthorized users are prohibited to access the network and the data of the authorized
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 245 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description users are encrypted through sophisticated ciphering algorithm, thus ensuring the communication security.
The ciphering algorithm is referred to as A5 algorithm, which is a 114-bit ciphering sequence according to the GSM specifications. The GSM specifications define eight ciphering algorithms. They are A5/0 A5/7. With this feature, all the voice and signaling information over the Um interface are transmitted in A5/1 or A5/2 ciphering mode. This ensures the network security.
Description
GSM specifications define eight ciphering algorithms. They are A5/0 A5/7. A5/0 indicates "Not encrypted". With this feature, all the voice and signaling information over the Um interface are transmitted in A5/1 or A5/2 ciphering mode. This ensures the network security.
Ciphering procedure The MSC uses the Cipher Mode CMD message (including the required ciphering algorithms and the key Kc) to initiate the ciphering procedure through the BSC. Then, according to the ciphering algorithm supported by the MS, the ciphering algorithm required by the MSC, and the ciphering algorithm allowed by the BSC, the BSC determines the algorithm to be used and notifies the BTS of the decision. The BSC then sends the Ciphering Mode CMD message to notify the MS of the ciphering algorithm. After the MS receives the Ciphering Mode CMD message, it initiates the transmission in ciphering mode.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and the wireless CN.
2.19.2 GBFD-3503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm

Availability
Summary
This feature is used when the voice, data, and signaling of the user are transmitted over the Um interface.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 246 of 368
Benefits
An evident advantage of the GSM system over the analog system is that the unauthorized users are prohibited to access the network and the data of the authorized users are encrypted through rigorous ciphering algorithm, thus ensuring the communication security. The ciphering algorithm is referred to as A5 algorithm, which is a 114-bit ciphering sequence according to the GSM specifications. The GSM specifications define eight ciphering algorithms. They are A5/0A5/7. With this feature, all the voice and signaling information over the Um interface are transmitted in A5/3 ciphering mode. This ensures the network security.
Description
For details, see the description about the A5/1 and A5/2 ciphering algorithm.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impact on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and the wireless CN.
2.19.3 GBFD-3521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BTS optimizes the A5/1 ciphering algorithm to improve the network security.
Benefits
Information security becomes increasingly important as the subscribers use MSs to browse webpages and perform business on the network. This features aims to solve the low security problem of the A5/1 ciphering algorithm and thus improve the data transmission security by
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 247 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description optimizing the service processing procedure and increasing the complexity of network wiretapping.
Description
With the technology development, some hacker organizations state that they can attack the calls encrypted by the A5/1 ciphering algorithm within 30 seconds in ideal conditions. Huawei studies the manner in which hackers attack, and prepares a scheme to enhance the A5/1 ciphering algorithm. With this scheme, only the network software needs to be upgraded. Therefore, hackers can attack the calls with a success rate of only a maximum of 10% within 40 successive days. In this manner, the data transmission security is greatly improved.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs The A5/1 ciphering algorithm should be supported by the MS and the wireless CN.
2.19.4 GBFD-3522 Encrypted Network Management

Availability
Summary
The encrypted network management is related to the secure socket layer (SSL). This feature allows for the establishment of a TCP transmission channel between the network management server and the network element (NE) based on the encrypted SSL.
Benefits
With the rapid development of the radio network, operators have higher requirements for the OM transmission security. Thus, encryption to the OM transmission channel becomes a basic requirement.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 248 of 368
The encryption to the OM transmission channel involves the encryption to the data transmitted between the LMT and the NE and to the data transmitted between the BSC and the BTS. This feature ensures the confidentiality of the data transmitted through the OM transmission channel, thus effectively protecting the privacy of the subscriber data and reducing the risk that the transmitted plain text is intercepted.
Description
In many scenarios of the communication between the network management system and the NE, a large amount of data is transmitted in the form of data files, including performance data file, log file, configuration data file, version file, and patch file. The traditional plain text transmission in the network is a threat to the secrecy of the transmitted data files. The encrypted network management feature establishes a transmission channel based on the encrypted SSL between the network management server and the NE during the establishment of the TCP connection. The data is then transmitted over this encrypted channel. Application layer Transmission before encryption Transport layer (TCP)
Application layer Transmission after encryption Transport layer (TCP) Secure socket layer (SSL)
The encrypted network management feature supports the transmission of plain text and cipher text, and thus does not affect the normal communication between the network management server and the NE that does not support the encrypted SSL.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 249 of 368
Network management server (supporting encrypted SSL)
Cipher text
Plain text
New network element (supporting encrypted SSL)
Old network element (not supporting encrypted SSL)
This feature complies with RFC4217, and supports two SSL protocol versions, namely, SSL3.0 and TSL1.0.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.19.5 GBFD-3523 NAT Beside OM

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the network address translation (NA T) firewall is deployed on the LMT side and the M2000 side to maintain the network security without affecting the normal connections between devices.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 250 of 368
Benefits
Firewall is a basic technology to maintain the network security. The NA T firewall protects the internal network by hiding the internal network address through the NA T technology. Thus, the network security is enhanced. The customer can deploy the NA T firewall as follows according to the actual requirements:

Deploy the NA T firewall on the M2000 to avoid the attack from the network. Deploy the NA T firewall on the LMT so that multiple LMTs on the same network segment are connected to the GBSC by using the same IP address, thus saving the public network IP resources.
Description
To guarantee the network security of the GBSS system, the NA T firewall needs to be deployed between the GBSC and the LMT or the M2000.The NA T technology converts the IP address in the IP header to another IP address. Through the NA T firewall, the IP address and port number in the IP packet of the network device are changed. The GBSC is interconnected to the LMT and the M2000. When one side initiates the connection, the other side cannot be normally connected because the new IP address and port number of the other side are inaccessible.
LMT
NAT Firewall IP transmission network BSC6000
M2000
NAT Firewall
The NA T beside OM feature supports the deployment of the NA T firewall on the M2000 and the LMT but not on the GBSC. After starting the NA T firewall, configure the GBSC as the server and the M2000 and the LMT as the clients. Then, always initiate the connection from the M2000 and the LMT to the GBSC. In this manner, the GBSC can be connected normally because the IP address of the GBSC is not converted through the NA T technology.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 251 of 368
2.20 Enhanced Voice Service

2.20.1 GBFD-3301 Enhanced Full Rate
Availability
Summary
The enhanced full rate (EFR) is an improved speech coding scheme. The quality of the speech using EFR is better than the speech using FR.
Benefits
The user experience is enhanced because the voice quality in the EFR that uses the FR channel resource approaches or even exceeds the voice quality in the ADPCM.
Description
The EFR is an improved speech coding scheme, which works at the rate of 12.2 kbit/s. The quality of the voice using the FR channel resource in the EFR scheme approaches or even exceeds that in the ADPCM scheme. The EFR has good anti-noise performance. If the quality of the Um interface is good, you can obtain the voice quality as good as the voice quality of the traditional wired telephone even if there is a lot of background noise. Therefore, in the same air conditions, the subscriber can perceive a better voice quality in the EFR than in the FR. In addition, the rate of the EFR is lower than that of the FR (13 kbit/s). Thus, the BER sensitivity of EFR is lower than that of FR. In this manner, the data can be transmitted more reliably on the Abis interface, which further improves the voice quality. The EFR is also compatible with the highest rate of the narrowband AMR.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Forced EFR Function in BSC If the EFR feature is supported by the MS and the BSC but not supported by the MSC, the EFR feature can be forcibly enabled on the BSC. In this manner, the used speech version is shielded on the MSC side to avoid assignment or handover failure. The forced EFR function is mainly applied in the areas with poor voice quality to improve the voice quality.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 252 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MSC when the forced EFR is not used. This feature should be supported by the MS.
2.20.2 GBFD-3401 Half Rate Speech

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the speech coding rate is reduced to half of the full-rate speech coding rate through a new speech coding algorithm. In this manner, the physical channel carrying the service of one MS is able to carry the services of two MSs.
Benefits
This feature enables the operator to increase the network capacity and improve the frequency usage without increasing the hardware cost. In addition, more traffic volume can be carried on an E1.
Description
With the increase of the GSM subscribers, the frequency resource of the existing GSM network is insufficient. The half-rate service helps increase the number of speech channels configurable for one TRX, thus increasing the frequency usage without greatly reducing the voice quality and increasing the network capacity without increasing the hardware cost. The half-rate service has the following benefits:
Saving the resource on the Um interface The half-rate speech coding rate is reduced to half of the full-rate speech coding rate through the new coding algorithm. In addition, the multiframes on the Um interface are used by two MSs with one MS receiving the even-numbered multiframes and the other MS receiving the odd-numbered multiframes. In this manner, the physical channel that supports one MS in the full-rate service can carry two MSs in the half-rate service. The entire network interference is reduced because fewer timeslots are seized.
Saving the resource on the Abis interface In half-rate service, one 16 kbit/s channel carries two calls on the Abis terrestrial circuit. In this manner, more traffic volume is carried on the terrestrial link. However, the load
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 253 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description on the RSL is heavy because one TRX carries more traffic volume. Therefore, when configuring signaling multiplexing, use the 2:1 mode instead of the 4:1 mode.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0 The half-rate service can be used to save the resource on the Ater interface. When the Flex Ater feature is enabled, the 8 kbit/s circuit is allocated to the half-rate call over the Ater interface. In this manner, the transmission resource on the Ater interface is saved. GBSS8.1 The half-rate channel is preferentially allocated when transmission resource congestion occurs on the Abis interface. The half-rate channel is allocated based on the resource congestion condition on the Abis interface. The load on the Abis interface is calculated in real time. When the resource on the Abis interface is congested, the BSC preferentially allocates a half-rate speech channel for a call to relieve the resource congestion. The dynamic conversion between half-rate and full-rate channels is triggered when resource congestion occurs on the Um or Abis interface. The dynamic conversion between half-rate and full-rate channels is triggered based on the resource congestion condition on the Um or the Abis interface. When the resource is congested, the conversion from the full-rate call to the half-rate call can reduce the congestion.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS When using the half-rate speech feature to save the transmission resource on the Ater interface, you should enable the GBFD-6901 Flex Ater feature at the same time. When the transmission resource congestion on the Abis interface triggers the half-rate channel allocation or the dynamic conversion between half-rate and full-rate channels, you should enable the GBFD-2013 Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution feature at the same time. When the TCH resource congestion on the Um interface triggers the dynamic conversion between half-rate and full-rate channels, you should enable the GBFD-5522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation feature at the same time. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and the MSC.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 254 of 368
2.20.3 GBFD-3402 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the full-rate (FR) channels and the half-rate (HR) channels are dynamically converted to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell during the call. In this manner, the situation in which one type of channel is congested whereas the other is idle can be prevented.
Benefits

Improves the channel usage because the channel is adjusted according to the requirement of the call. Reduces the workload of the network OM personnel because the full-rate channel and the half-rate channel are automatically converted
Description
If the half-rate channel is configured, the full-rate channel and the half-rate channel are dynamically converted as required to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell during the call. In this manner, the situation in which one type of channel is congested whereas the other is idle can be prevented. In addition, the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell can be controlled through related parameters. During the call, the channel is allocated based on the resources in the MS, MSC, and BSC. If a half-rate channel is required but is unavailable, a full-rate channel is converted into two half-rate channels. If a full-rate channel is required but is unavailable, the half-rate channels are converted into the full-rate channels. Each time a call is released, the attributes of the channel are not changed and the converted channel is not immediately switched back to its original form. If the load on the cell is normal, the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell are maintained at a certain value through the automatic adjustment of the calls. The conversion between the half-rate channels and the full-rate channels occurs only when the load of the cell is high or congestion occurs.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 255 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-3401 Half Rate Speech Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS and the MSC.
2.21 Cell Broadcast

2.21.1 GBFD-3601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)
Availability
Summary
The short message service cell broadcast (SMSCB) is a teleservice (TS23) through which all the MSs in the specified area can periodically receive messages.
Benefits
The SMSCB can increase the revenue of the operator by providing information such as weather forecasts, stock, and sales promotion based on the location of the MS.
Description
The SMSCB is a teleservice that periodically broadcasts messages to all the MSs in a specified area. Based on different settings, the MS can continuously or discontinuously receive short messages, such as weather forecasts or traffic information. The SMSCB allows all the MSs in a specified area to receive the short messages. The area may be one or more cells, or the entire PLMN. The short messages from the cell broadcast center (CBC) are managed and scheduled in the CDB of the BSC, which sends the short messages to the BTS. The BTS then broadcasts the messages to all the MSs in a specified area at certain intervals. The CDB receives and stores the short messages, schedules and sends the messages based on certain algorithm, and responds to the query from the CBC. The MS can receive the messages in DRX mode. That is, the MS can work discontinuously. Through a scheduling message, the BSC notifies the MS that no short message is sent during a period. Therefore, the MS needs to receive the short messages only in the specified period and need not detect the messages continuously. Thus, the power consumption is reduced. The SMSCB supports the BTS flow control. That is, the order in which the short messages are sent is scheduled by the CDB, but the sending of the messages is implemented by the BTS. Each TRX of the BTS maintains one message buffer and periodically sends the cell broadcast short message on a specified channel. When the messages are not sent in time, the BTS reports the out-of-synchronization situation to the BSC through a LOAD IND message. By
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 256 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description controlling the BTS flow, the CDB maintains the balance of the cell broadcast system and thus meets the requirements of the message sending.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.21.2 GBFD-3602 Simplified Cell Broadcast

Availability
Summary
This feature is implemented by using a built-in cell broadcast processing module in the BSC in the case that a CBC is not used.
Benefits
Without a CBC, Huawei simplified cell broadcast feature supports the most commonly used standard cell broadcast services with low equipment costs and low OM costs, thus reducing the operator's CAPEX.
Description
The SMSCB function broadcasts short messages to all MSs in one or several cells, or even in the entire PLMN. The MSs can receive the broadcast messages continuously or discontinuously. Generally there is a CBC responsible for managing and scheduling the SMSCB. Huawei simplified cell broadcast feature is performed through a built-in cell broadcast processing module in the BSC, thus reducing equipment costs. Huawei simplified cell broadcast feature is performed to broadcast messages such as the cell name, weather forecast, and social commonweal messages. These functions are described as follows:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 257 of 368
Information broadcast function Messages such as BTS name, cell name, weather forecast, or any character string, with a maximum length of 80 characters are broadcast.
Information timing broadcast function Cell broadcast messages are sent at specified intervals during a specified period of time. Information management function The MML commands are used to start or stop sending the broadcast messages in specified cells or all cells, or stop sending a specified cell broadcast message. In addition, the cell broadcast status can be viewed through the MML commands. In any period of time, a maximum of 16 cell broadcast short messages can be simultaneous ly sent in a cell.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 A maximum of 64 cell broadcast short messages can be simultaneously sent in a cell.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other NEs None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS Huawei simplified cell broadcast feature cannot be used in combination with the cell broadcast function provided by the CBC. That is, you can use either Huawei simplified cell broadcast feature or the cell broadcast function provided by the CBC.
2.22 CS General Enhancement

2.22.1 GBFD-5601 Automatic Level Control (ALC)
Availability
Summary
This feature enhances the user experience by checking the speech signal and then adjusting the sound volume according to certain rules.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 258 of 368
Benefits
This feature can level out the difference between the sound volumes controlled by different terminal manufactures and thus balance the receive level adaptation of subscribers in different areas. In this manner, the subscriber can perceive better voice quality.
Description
The ALC algorithm automatically controls the receive level. By evaluating the receive level of the input signal, the ALC feature controls the gains of the input signal, adjusts the output signal to a certain target receive level, and maintains the stability and comprehensibility of the signal receive level. Thus, the subscriber can perceive comfort sound volume and good voice quality. The ALC has the following three modes:
Fixed level mode The receive level of the signal is adjusted to a fixed target value based on the receive level of the input voice.
Adaptive level mode The receive level of the signal is adaptively adjusted to a value within a pre-determined range based on the receive level of the input voice. Fixed gain mode The sound volume of the input signal is raised or lowered in a fixed proportion based on the original sound volume.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 The ALC algorithm performance is optimized.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature cannot be used together with GBFD-5701 TFO. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.22.2 GBFD-5602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 259 of 368
Summary
The AEC identifies and cancels the acoustic echo after comparing the main features of downlink voice and those of uplink voice after a period of delay.
Benefits
The AEC can reduce the acoustic echo generated by the MS, thus improving the network voice quality and enhancing the user experience.
Description
The acoustic echo refers to the situation that the sound wave from one MS speaker is reflected to the microphone (MIC) and the speech signal is sent back to the other MS because of the characteristics of the MS. The acoustic echo generated by the MS is mainly related to the fact that the MS speaker is too close to the MIC and thus the sound wave attenuation is insufficient. During the call, the input voice from the CN is retained through the AEC module of the TC. After a period of delay, the remote input voice from the CN is compared with the local voice from the MS. If the codes of similar characteristics exist, it is considered that the local voice is the echo of the remote voice. Then, the echo is handled nonlinearly and replaced with comfort noise. In this manner, the original voice from the MIC is cancelled, and thus the user experience is enhanced.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 The AEC algorithm performance is optimized.
Dependency
2.22.3 GBFD-5603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 260 of 368
Summary
The ANR feature constrains the background noise during the call, reduces the receive level of the noise, and thus increases the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
Benefits
By constraining the background noise during the call, the ANR enables the voice to be c lear, thus enhancing the user experience.
Description
The ANR distinguishes voice information from background noise based on the characteristics of the input speech signal in different time domains and frequency domains. Then, the ANR reduces and suppresses the background noise based on a certain algorithm. By reducing the receive level of the noise and improving the SNR, the ANR improves the user experience without affecting the authentic voice.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 The ALC algorithm performance is optimized.
Dependency
2.22.4 GBFD-5701 TFO

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the TFO frames are transparently transmitted and encoding/decoding is bypassed through the bit stealing scheme between the TCs at two ends. Thus, the process of encoding/decoding is reduced once.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 261 of 368
Benefits
The speech signals are deteriorated with each encoding/decoding. Thus, using TFO to bypass encoding/decoding can improve the voice quality. In the case of encoding/decoding of lower rate, the voice quality is more evidently improved.
Description
For traditional mobile network system without TFO, the voice signal is encoded by the MS on one side and transmitted through the radio interface. The signal is then decoded by the first TC unit. The decoded PCM data flow is transmitted to the second TC unit through the 64 kbit/s transmission link for encoding. After being encoded, the data is transmitted to the MS on the other side through the radio interface for decoding. During the whole conversation, the speech is transcoded two times, which is called tandem operation.
Transcoding Functions
PLMN A MS/UE
Transcoding Function Transcoding Function
PLMN B MS/UE
Encoding
Compressed Speech
Decoding
ITU-T G.711 A-Law/-Law
Encoding
Compressed Speech
Decoding
The TFO feature can reduce the speech signal degradation caused by tandem operation, thus improving the voice quality. When the calling MS and the called MS use the same speech version, the TFO link is established through the in-band signaling negotiation. In addition, the least significant bit (or the second least significant bit) is stolen to seize the 8 kbit/s (or 16 kbit/s) sublink of the PCM transmission link for transparent transmission of TFO frames and bypass TC encoding/decoding. In this manner, the speech signal is encoded at the MS initiating the call and decoded at the MS terminating the call for only once. Thus, the degradation of the speech signals due to tandem operation is reduced and the voice quality is improved. This process is called tandem free operation (TFO).
Transcoding Functions Bypassed
PLMN A MS/UE
Transcoding Function
Transcoding Function
PLMN B MS/UE
Encoding
Compressed Speech
Decoding
Enhancement
GBSS 8.1 The AMR TFO is supported.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 262 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description This feature cannot be used together with ALC. This feature cannot be used together with AEC. This feature cannot be used together with ANR. Dependency on other NEs The data between the TCs at the two ends should be transmitted transparently. In addition, the TFO should be supported by the TCs at both ends.
2.22.5 GBFD-6801 Voice Quality Index (VQI)

Availability
Summary
The voice quality index (VQI) feature provides a direct method to measure the voice quality of the radio network. By measuring the uplink VQI and downlink VQI, the voice quality of the network is quantified, which provides a reference for future network optimization.
Benefits
The VQI can measure the voice quality of the network rapidly and effectively and thus provide a reference for network optimization.
Description
The VQI establishes the mapping between the radio network performance and voice quality. The VQI value, which helps learn the voice quality, is calculated based on the parameters related to the radio quality of the uplink/downlink speech signals. The MOS analysis method is applied in VQI to measure the voice quality. The MOS is used to assess the quality of the middle- and low-rate voice coding. The MOS value ranges from 1 to 5. Based on the MOS analysis method, Huawei further divides the voice quality into 11 levels. The VQI is obtained through the analysis of the BER, FER, LFE, and CODE of the uplink/downlink speech signal. In this manner, the voice quality is quantified to facilitate the identification of the voice problem and network optimization.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 263 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description This feature depends on the following feature: GBFD-7501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) Dependency on other NEs This EMR feature should be supported by the MS.
2.22.6 GBFD-7501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR)

Availability
Summary
The EMR is a new downlink measurement report introduced from R99. Compared with the traditional MR, more measurement contents are added to the EMR, such as the bit error probability (BEP), and frame erase ratio (FER). This facilitates the performance improvement of the power control algorithm and the handover algorithm.
Benefits

Improves the capability of monitoring the voice quality, and the performance of the power control algorithm and the handover algorithm. Provides better performance for GSM/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA interoperability by supporting up to 15 neighboring 3G cells.
Description
The EMR is a new downlink measurement report introduced from R99. It is reported by the MS to the network. Compared with the MR, the EMR has the following advantages : 1. The EMR uses an optimized scheme of encoding the neighboring cell information and reports more neighboring cells than the MR. The MR provides up to six GSM neighboring cells whereas the EMR provides up to 15 GSM/WCDMA/TD_SCDMA neighboring cells. Thus, the EMR provides better performance for the GSM/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA interoperability and ensures the service continuity. 2. The EMR adds BEP, which is used to identify the channel quality. BEP is estimated one burst after another. It reflects the current C/I, delay of signals, and velocity of the MS. In addition, BEP adopts the 5-bit encoding scheme whereas RXQUAL adopts the 3-bit encoding scheme. Thus, compared with RXQUAL, BEP has higher precision, especially when the radio signal quality is poor. 3. The EMR adds the number of speech frames that are correctly received, which is used to calculate FER. Compared with RXQUAL that measures the radio signal, the measurement effect of EFR is better because it measures the encoding/decoding performance of the speech signal. RXQUAL should be replaced with BEP and FER for the power control algorithm and the handover algorithm that use RXQUAL to evaluate radio signal quality because BEP and FER can be used to improve the performance of those algorithms.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 264 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description According to 3GPP TS 44018, through the MI/2QUA TER system information, the network can determine whether an MS should report the measurement information about the serving cell and neighboring cells through MR or EMR.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This EMR feature should be supported by the MS.
2.22.7 GBFD-7101 BTS Power Lift for Handover

Availability
Summary
Before sending the handover command to the MS, the BSC adjusts the transmit power of the BTS to the maximum value to prevent call drops due to rapid level drop.
Benefits

Reduces call drops, increase handover success rate, and optimize KPIs. Improves voice quality, prolong call duration, and increase the operators' revenue.
Description
During the call, if the receive level drops rapidly, the handover is triggered to avoid call drops. However, the power control algorithm may fail to adjust the MS and BTS power in time. Thus, the MS fails to receive the handover command, which then causes call drops. Using the BTS power lift for handover feature, the BSC can adjust the transmit power of the BTS to the maximum value before sending the handover command to the MS to prevent call drops due to rapid level drop.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 265 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.22.8 GBFD-5522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the established calls can be handed over between half-rate channels and full-rate channels based on the usage of channel resources. In this manner, the balance between the network quality and cell capacity is maintained.
Benefits

When the traffic volume is low, calls are handed over from half-rate channels to full-rate channels, thus improving the voice quality. When the TCHs in a cell are insufficient, calls are handed over from full-rate channels to half-rate channels, thus increasing the cell capacity.
Description
During a call establishment, the network assigns a half-rate or a full-rate channel to the call based on the usage of the cell resources. In the case of a long-duration call, the usage of the cell resource may change: During the call establishment phase, if the TCH seizure rate is high, a half-rate channel is assigned to the call. After the call lasts for a period, many calls are released and the TCH seizure rate decreases. In this case, TCHs in the cell are sufficient and a full-rate channel can be assigned to the call to improve the voice quality. If the TCH seizure rate is low during the call establishment, a full-rate TCH may be assigned to the call. After the call lasts for a period, many calls access the cell and the TCH seizure rate increases. In this case, the available TCHs in the cell are insufficient.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 266 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description If the dynamic adjustment between full-rate and half-rate channels is enabled, the half-rate/full-rate channels of established calls can be adjusted based on the usage of cell resources. When the TCHs in a cell are sufficient, full-rate channels are preferably assigned to new calls and calls with poor communication quality can be handed over from half-rate channels to full-rate channels, thus improving communication quality. When the TCHs in a cell are insufficient, half-rate channels are preferably assigned to new calls and calls with good communication quality may be handed over from full-rate channels to half-rate channels, thus increasing the cell capacity. When this feature is enabled, the half-rate speech feature needs to be enabled at the same time.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-3401 Half Rate Speech Dependency on other NEs None.
2.23 AMR Package

2.23.1 GBFD-5501 AMR FR
Availability
Summary
In an interfered situation, better voice quality can be provided if the system uses AMR FR. Under the same conditions, the voice quality in AMR FR is equal to or better than the voice quality in EFR.
Benefits

Increases the capacity of the system in physical areas. Enhances the anti-interference capability to adapt to tight frequency reuse.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 267 of 368

Improves the network indexes in an increasingly complex radio environment in combination with the frequency hopping technology. Provides a better voice quality for the subscriber.
Description
The AMR is an integration of multiple voice encoding/decoding rates. With different encoding/decoding rates, the voice code streams of different rates are yielded. The AMR enables the BTS and MS to select an appropriate encoding/decoding algorithm and to adjust the encoding rate according to specific radio environment. Therefore, the voice quality of the whole wireless communication system is improved. When there is a lot of interference on the radio channels, better voice quality can be provided in AMR FR than that in EFR or FR. In addition, the system in AMR FR has higher anti-interference capability to adapt to tight frequency reuse. In the wireless communication system, the higher the original speech rate involved in channel encoding, the more the Information about the speech characteristics carried in the coded stream and thus the higher the fidelity of the speech. However, the redundant information in the coded stream decreases, and thus the coded stream becomes more interference sensitive. In a poor wireless communication environment, bit errors occur easily and the speech frames may be lost. Thus, voices may be discontinuous. If the original speech rate involved in channel encoding is reduced, more redundant information is carried in the coded stream. Then the coded stream has strong anti-interference and error correction capabilities. Thus, the continuity of voice can be improved. The AMR FR provides a selection of multiple coding rates from 4.75 kbit/s to 12.2 kbit/s, as listed in the following table. Channel TCH/AFS Coding Rate 12.2 kbit/s 10.2 kbit/s 7.95 kbit/s 7.40 kbit/s 6.70 kbit/s 5.90 kbit/s 5.15 kbit/s 4.75 kbit/s
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Enhanced anti-interference capability of signaling transmission: If the original speech rate involved in channel encoding is reduced, the coded stream can contain more redundant information. Then the coded stream has stronger anti-interference and error correction capabilities and the voice continuity is improved as a result. However, the signaling transmission performance is not improved. When this function is used, the transmit power is
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 268 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description increased during signaling transmission to increase the success rate of signaling transmission. This can avoid voice interruption concerned with signaling transmission in bad radio environment.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS, BTS, and CN.
2.23.2 GBFD-5502 AMR HR

Availability
Summary
In an interfered situation, better voice quality can be provided if the system uses AMR HR. In the same conditions, the voice quality in AMR HR is equal to or better than that in HR. If the AMR HR feature is enabled, the half-rate speech feature must be enabled at the same time.
Benefits

Increases the capacity of the system in physical areas. Enhances the anti-interference capability to adapt to tight frequency reuse. Improves the network indexes in an increasingly complex radio environment in combination with the frequency hopping technology. Provides a better voice quality for the subscriber.
Description
In an interfered situation, better voice quality can be provided if the system uses the AMR HR. In the same conditions, the voice quality in AMR HR is equal to or better than that in HR. Therefore, if the communication quality meets the requirements, the AMR HR can be widely used to increase the system capacity. When much interference exists and the voice quality decreases, the system automatically switches to the AMR FR so that the voice quality and the system capacity are balanced in real-time. In this manner, the system can provide good voice quality to subscribers when the system capacity is increased. The AMR HR provides a selection of multiple coding rates, as listed in the following table.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 269 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Channel TCH/AHS Coding Rate 7.40 kbit/s 6.70 kbit/s 5.90 kbit/s 5.15 kbit/s 4.75 kbit/s
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Support for TCH/AHS 7.95 kbit/s coding rate: The BTS using the Abis over IP or Abis transmission optimization function can provide the speech services with the coding rate of AMR HR 7.95 kbit/s. The following table lists multiple coding rates of the AMR HR. Channel TCH/AHS Coding Rate 7.95 kbit/s 7.40 kbit/s 6.70 kbit/s 5.90 kbit/s 5.15 kbit/s 4.75 kbit/s
Enhanced anti-interference capability of signaling transmission: If the original speech rate involved in channel encoding is reduced, the coded stream can contain more redundant information. Then the coded stream has stronger anti-interference and error correction capabilities and the voice continuity is improved as a result. However, the signaling transmission performance is not improved. When this feature is used, the transmit power is increased during signaling transmission to increase the success rate of signaling transmission. This can avoid voice interruption due to signaling transmission in bad radio environment.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the GBFD-3401 Half Rate Speech feature.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 270 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS, BTS, and CN.
2.23.3 GBFD-5503 AMR Power Control

Availability
Summary
Using different AMR power control algorithms, this feature can provide better anti-interference capability, larger network capacity, and better voice quality.
Benefits

Reduces the transmit power and prolong the standby time of the MS. Reduces the network interference and improve the frequency usage. Improves the network quality.
Description
The AMR speech codec can select one of the coding rates according to the radio channel quality to achieve an optimized combination of speech coding rate and channel coding rate. In this manner, the AMR speech codec can provide the best voice quality in the current radio environment and meet the communication requirements in various radio environments. The coded stream contains more redundant information. Then the coded stream has stronger anti-interference and error correction capabilities and the voice continuity is improved as a result. The system automatically decides whether to adopt the AMR. If the system uses the AMR, the power control strategy for the AMR calling is different from that for the none-AMR calling. In this manner, the network interference is reduced, the BTS transmit power is saved, and the standby time of MS is prolonged.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-5501 AMR FR
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 271 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description GBFD-5502 AMR HR Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS, BTS, and CN.
2.23.4 GBFD-5504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment

Availability
Summary
Through the dynamic adjustment of AMR HR and AMR FR, the cell capacity and the voice quality are balanced.
Benefits

Less maintenance work is required because the system can automatically adjust the ratio of AMR FR to AMR HR based on the network capacity and quality. This feature expands the network capacity and reduces the network deployment cost without degrading the voice quality.
Description
Through the dynamic adjustment of AMR HR and AMR FR, this feature helps to balance the cell capacity and the voice quality. After completing the initial voice coding after setting up a call, the BSS calculates the radio quality index (RQI) based on the uplink signal quality measured by the BTS. Then, based on the uplink quality, the code sets activated by the BSC, and the corresponding thresholds, the system determines the encoding/decoding scheme used for the uplink. In addition, the system dynamically adjusts the voice coding rate in the uplink, and informs the MS to use the selected voice coding rate. According to the RQI and parameters such as network capacity, the BSS decides whether to enable the AMR FR/HR dynamic adjustment in the cell to balance the voice quality and the cell capacity. The AMR FR/HR dynamic adjustment in different radio environments and capacity configurations helps to balance the voice quality and the cell capacity. Before enabling the AMR FR/HR dynamic adjustment feature, you must enable the half rate speech and AMR HR features.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 272 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-5501 AMR FR GBFD-5502 AMR HR GBFD-3401 Half Rate Speech Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS, BTS, and CN.
2.23.5 GBFD-5505 AMR Radio Link Timer

Availability
Summary
The radio link timer is used for the detection of the radio link quality. When the timer expires due to poor radio link quality, the system deactivates the radio channel and interrupts the conversation. In this manner, the timer can improve the channel utilization and prevent channels with poor quality from occupying radio channel resources for a long time.
Benefits
This feature brings the following benefits:
Prolongs the duration of the AMR voice service with high anti-interference capability and thus reduce the call drop rate by setting the radio link timer of AMR voice service and that of non-AMR voice service separately. Improves the user experience and increase the operators' revenue by prolonging the AMR call duration in the network of poor radio link quality.
Description
This feature provides a special radio link timer for AMR calls. AMR calls enjoy higher robustness than common calls. Therefore, when a common call fails due to poor radio link quality, the AMR voice service can maintain good conversation quality. If the radio link timer of the AMR call and that of a common call are set to the same value, the chance of AMR call drop increases and the user experience is deteriorated. In this case, you should set the AMR radio link timer to a greater value so that the AMR call endures the poor radio environment and the call drop rate is reduced. You can configure the radio link timers for the AMR HR and the AMR FR separately.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 273 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-5501 AMR FR GBFD-5502 AMR HR Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS, BTS, and CN.
2.23.6 GBFD-5506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment

Availability
Summary
Through the setting of the target voice quality and the monitoring of the real-time voice quality, the GBSS devices can adjust the coding rate adjustment threshold so that the AMR speech can select an appropriate coding rate to enable the voice quality to approach the target voice quality.
Benefits

Enables the AMR speech to select an appropriate coding rate. Guarantees the performance of the AMR speech.
Description
The AMR speech rate set consists of multiple coding rates. Based on the measurement of the receive level, receive quality, and carrier-to-interference ratio, the BTS and MS adjust the AMR call control parameters by using the algorithm to select a speech source coding rate that matches the existing radio environment. The appropriate selection helps obtain an optimal combination of the channel quality and speech coding rate and improve the voice quality to the greatest extent in the existing radio environment. Generally, the AMR speech coding rate adjustment threshold is set to a fixed value based on the network planning engineers assessment of the radio channel quality. If the radio channel quality changes or the network planning engineers assessment of the radio channel quality is inaccurate, the AMR speech will fail to select an appropriate coding rate. The AMR voice quality is then affected.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 274 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Based on the setting of the target voice quality and the monitoring of the real-time voice quality, this feature adjusts the coding rate adjustment threshold so that an appropriate coding rate can be selected to guarantee the performance of the AMR speech.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-5501 AMR FR GBFD-5502 AMR HR Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS, BTS, and CN.
2.24 PS QOS
2.24.1 GBFD-9901 Streaming QoS(GBR)
Availability
Summary
For the streaming class services, after the QoS mechanism is introduced, the BSC allocates radio resources according to the guaranteed bit rate (GBR) of the QoS to ensure the data transmission rate. When the radio resources are insufficient, the subscribers with high priority can preempt the radio resources of the subscribers with low priority.
Benefits

Ensures sufficient and stable bandwidth for the streaming services. Ensures preferentially the bandwidth requirement and service experience of the subscribers with high priority when radio resources are insufficient. Helps the operator to take flexible charging policies.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 275 of 368
Description
This feature supports the packet flow management (PFM) procedure, which manages packet flow context (PFC). The PFM process includes the establishment, modification, and deletion of the PFC. In addition, the BSC obtains or modifies the attributes of QoS through the PEM procedure. This feature is enabled to support streaming and push to talk over cellular (PoC) services. If the MS supports GBR, the resources are allocated according to the GBR of the QoS. If the MS does not support GBR, the resources are allocated according to the BEST EFFORT. The BSC dynamically allocates Um interface resources to the MS based on the radio environment so that the bandwidth of the MS is permanently greater than or equal to the GBR. When the radio resources on the Um interface are insufficient, the GBR is reduced. When the radio resources on the Um interface are sufficient, the reduced GBR is restored. When the BSC needs to reduce or restore the GBR, it requests the SGSN to modify the GBRs through the PFM procedure.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Streaming class service resource preemption: If the BSC cannot offer sufficient transmission resources for the high-priority subscribers of the streaming class service, the transmission resources of the low-priority subscribers of the streaming class service will be preempted. If the radio resources are still insufficient after preemption, the GBR is reduced. If the radio resources are sufficient, the reduced GBR is restored. This feature ensures that the high-priority subscribers of the streaming services get preference to use the radio resources, thus reducing the possibility that the packet service access fails due to insufficient radio resources on the Um interface and enhancing the user experience.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs The PFM procedure and R99 QoS should be supported by the MS and SGSN.
2.24.2 GBFD-9902 QoS ARP&THP

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 276 of 368
Summary
After the QoS mechanism is introduced, the BSC allocates radio resources to the users according to the allocation/retention priority (ARP) and traffic handle priority (THP) of the QoS. The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. To be compatible with R97/R98 QoS, this feature supports the mapping between R97/98 QoS and R99 QoS.
Benefits
With this feature, the operator allocates the radio resources according to different service types and user priorities. As a result, the user with higher priority can seize more bandwidth and enjoy higher data rate and better quality of service. This feature provides the following benefits:

High-priority users can enjoy more bandwidth whereas low -priority users are subject to bandwidth constraint. The bandwidth allocation mechanism is more flexible because the operator can allocate the radio resources according to different service types and user priorities. The operator can formulate flexible charging policies.
Description
The BSC allocates the radio resources to the MS according the ARP and THP of the QoS. The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. Interactive services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP and THP of the QoS. If the ARPs of the users are the same, the users with higher THP are allocated more radio resources. If the THPs of the users are the same, the users with higher ARP are allocated more radio resources. Other services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP of the QoS. The users with higher ARP can be allocated more radio resources. For the services that do not support the QoS, the BSS allocates the radio resources according to the BEST EFFORT.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Mapping between R97/R98 QoS and R99 QoS: If the MS supports only the R97/R98 QoS, that is, the MS does not support the GBR, the BSC maps the R97/R98 QoS to the R99 QoS according to the 3GPP specifications. After the precedence class of the R97/R98 QoS is mapped as the ARP of the R99 QoS, the BSC allocates the radio resources based on the ARP. Configuration of the radio resource allocation priorit ies: The priorities are configured on the basis of the service types of the QoS, ARP, and THP. For the services that do not support the QoS, the priorities are allocated according to the BEST EFFORT. The BSC allocates the radio resources according to the user priorities. The higher-priority users are allocated more radio resources. This feature enables the operator to allocate the radio resources according to different service types and user priorities and thus the bandwidth allocation mechanism is more flexible.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 277 of 368
Dependency
2.24.3 GBFD-9904 PS Active Package Management

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the server at the application layer adjusts the transmit rate based on the bandwidth that can be provided by the radio links, thus avoiding IP packet loss and timeout of the IP packet transmission. As a result, the performance of the services such as large-sized email sending, webpage browsing, and file transfer is improved. In addition, the packet performance is greatly improved when multiple services are processed simultaneously.
Benefits

Improves the downlink throughput when the quality of the radio link is poor. Reduces the download time when multiple webpages are downloaded simultaneous ly. Ensures high bandwidth usage, reduce the delay of the packet service, and enhance the fairness of the bandwidth seizure of various packet service flows. Improves the performance of the packet service. For example, when large-sized files are involved in the packet service, such as FTP downloading and email sending, this feature shortens the service delay and thus enhances the user experience.
Description
Compared with the reactive queue management (a technique which drops the overflowed packets only when the queue is full), this feature provides active queue management and real-time monitoring of the buffer queue to monitor the network congestion. Once the network is congested, the system drops the data packets proactively and adjusts the sending rate at the TCP sending end to maintain the buffer queue at a certain length to reduce the congestion. Therefore, the throughput of the TCP service is maximized, the data buffer size is reduced, and the interactive time and response time of the services such as webpage browsing are saved.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 278 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description In GSM, the packet service uses the TCP/IP protocol in most cases. When multiple connections co-exist, the strong connection in a system may result in long transmission time over the weak connection. For example, a subscriber clicks a button on an HTTP webpage when FTP downloading is in progress. In such a case, a long time elapses before the corresponding webpage is displayed because the link resource is occupied by the FTP service. The PS active package management is applicable to scenarios where congestion may occur because of bandwidth limitation. It can reduce the network congestion caused by the TCP data flow and thus improves the service throughput and shortens the service delay. The PS active package management performs queue management for only interactive services, background services, and services that do not support the QoS. The queue management is not performed for real-time services, such as conversational services and streaming services.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment GBFD-4101 GPRS Dependency on other NEs None.
2.24.4 GBFD-9905 PoC QoS

Availability
Summary
The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of real-time packet service that has high bandwidth and delay requirements. To guarantee the service quality and real-time performance, Huawei GBSS provides the QoS means such as GBR, reduced data transmission delay, and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 279 of 368
Benefits
This feature guarantees the real-time performance of the PoC service, improves the voice quality of the PoC service, and enhances the user experience. This provides the operator with competitive advantages and enables the operator to provide differentiated services for data service subscribers, and increase the service revenue.
Description
The PoC service is a type of group call service implemented on the GSM network. The PoC service adopts the packet switching technology and is carried on the GPRS/EGPRS network. The PoC service involves subscriber authentication, conversation establishment, media dispatching, charging, and strategy control, most of which run on the PoC server in the CN. The PoC signaling and voice data are carried over GPRS/EGPRS. The GBSS transparently transfers these packets to the CN for further processing. In contrast to the packet service, the PoC service carries speech signals and requires low transfer delay. If the transfer delay is high, the user experience is affected. Huawei GBSS is able to identify the PoC service and provides certain measures to guarantee the QoS. These measures include GBR, reduced data transmission delay, and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation. GBR: The resources are allocated based on the GBR. If the GBR cannot be guaranteed, it is re-negotiated and the resources are then allocated based on the negotiated GBR. Reduced data transmission delay: The services are scheduled based on the priorities. The high-priority service gets preference to be scheduled and the services with the same priority are scheduled in turn. Balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation: In most cases, the PoC service requires the uplink TBF and downlink TBF simultaneously and symmetrical traffic in the uplink and downlink. Therefore, the balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation enables a similar number of PDCHs to be allocated in the uplink and downlink when the multislot class of the MS allows and the requirements of GBR are met.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-4201 EGPRS
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 280 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description GBFD-9901 Streaming QoS(GBR) Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.
2.25 Cell Reselection of PS Domain

2.25.1 GBFD-6201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2)
Availability
Summary
The network-controlled cell reselection (NC2) refers to the situation that the MS in packet transfer mode can be controlled by the network to reselect a cell according to the measurement report.
Benefits
Based on the receive quality of the MS and receive level of the neighboring cell, this feature enables the network-controlled MS to reselect a cell with better receive level. Thus, the subscriber can obtain better packet service, the performance of the packet service in the whole network is improved, and the resource usage is increased.
Description
In NC2 mode, the network instructs the MS to perform cell reselection. In this manner, the MS can reselect a better cell because the network has a clearer view of the actual network condition than the MS does. Thus, a better network performance is achieved. When the MS is in packet transfer mode, the network helps to reselect a cell with better receive level and lighter load for the MS based on the measurement report and the network load condition. The NC2 is triggered under the following scenarios: 1) The downlink receive quality of the MS drops rapidly.
2) The reselection does not occur and the number of received packet measurement reports reaches a certain threshold. In these cases, the network helps the MS to reselect a cell with better receive level. As a result, the user experience is enhanced, and the performance of the packet service in the whole network is improved.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Inter-BSC NC2: The network can select the neighboring cell controlled by another BSC as the target cell and initiate the cell re-selection procedure.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 281 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Intra-BSC NC2 based on cell load: When the load of PS services in the cell exceeds a specified threshold, the MS that meets the requirement of neighboring cell level threshold is reselected to the neighboring cell with light load. Support for NC2 of the target cell of the WCDMA system: The network can select the target cell of the WCDMA system for cell reselection based on the measurement reports.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment GBFD-4101 GPRS Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.
2.25.2 GBFD-6301 Intra BSC Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)

Availability
Summary
NACC refers to network-assisted cell reselection. To implement rapid PS access after cell reselection, the BSC sends the system information about the target cell to the MS before cell reselection. Therefore, the service interruption time due to the cell reselection is minimized.
Benefits

Increases the cell reselection speed, minimize the service interruption time due to the cell reselection, and enhance the user experience. Caters to the services that have higher requirements for delay and throughput (such as the streaming service). Increases the system capacity because the resources of the original cell can be released rapidly after the cell reselection.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 282 of 368
Description
The NACC feature enables the MS to access the new cell rapidly after cell reselection and perform data transmission without receiving the complete system information. The NACC feature does not control the cell reselection of the MS, but notifies the network to send the system information in advance when the MS decides to reselect a cell and delays the cell reselection. In this manner, this feature increases the cell reselection speed of the MS, thus greatly reducing the data transmission interruption time due to cell reselection. Because the cell reselection speed is increased, the MS can rapidly notify the SGSN. The SGSN can then rapidly detect that the cell reselection occurs. As a result, the resources of the original cell can be quickly released to other users and thus the system capacity is increased.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Support for resource reservation in the target cell: When the network receives the cell reselection decision of the MS, it reserves the required radio resources in the target cell to ensure that the MS can obtain sufficient resources for service recovery after reselection. Support for NACC between BSCs or between BSC and RNC: This application enhancement can reduce the delay of cell reselection between BSCs or between the BSC and the RNC. It requires the BSC to support the RIM procedure to obtain the system information of the external cell. During cell reselection, if the BSC has the system information of the external cell, it sends the system information to the MS. Otherwise, the BSC initiates the RIM procedure to request the system information and save the system information for future use.
Dependency
2.25.3 GBFD-9801 Packet SI Status (PSI)

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 283 of 368
Summary
With this feature, the MS requests the system information that it requires by sending the Packet SI Status message to the BSC to reduce the service interruption time or service delay.
Benefits
This feature is used together with the NACC to reduce the interruption time of the packet service due to cell reselection, thus improving the packet service quality and enhancing the user experience.
Description
The MS in packet transfer mode notifies the BSC of the system information it requires by sending the Packet SI Status message to the BSC. The BSC then sends the system information to the MS on the PACCH. The MS uses the obtained system information for the packet service being processed to avoid the service interruption or delay. This feature is used together with the NACC to speed up the cell reselection and reduce the service interruption time.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.
2.26 GPRS/EGPRS Service

2.26.1 GBFD-4101 GPRS
Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 284 of 368
Summary
The General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is a type of end-to-end packet switched service based on the GSM technology.
Benefits
By providing the data service to the subscriber, the GPRS increases the operators' revenue and the proportion of the PS services in the mobile services.
Description
Huawei GPRS is implemented by adding GPRS support nodes (GSNs) and packet control unit (PCU) on the GSM system and upgrading the software. There are two PCU modes: built-in PCU and external PCU. The GPRS provides quick access of PS services for the mobile subscribers. Huawei external PCU is connected to the BSC through the Pb interface. Huawei GPRS has an open system architecture, which facilitates smooth capacity expansion. The standard interfaces ensure the device compatibility and supports the QoS features and the dynamic allocation of radio resources. In addition, the flexible networking and configuration save a large amount of CAPEX for the operator in the initial phase of the GPRS service operation. GPRS provides abundant packet services, for example, mobile Internet access, e-Commerce (e-Bank and e-Currency), cluster management, remote control/remote measurement, booking system (hotels, theatres, and airplanes), and group services (stock information publication). Huawei GPRS implements mainly three functions: managing radio links and resources, controlling MS access, and providing routing functions for packet data transmission. The radio link management includes establishment, maintenance, and release of radio links. The radio resource management includes encoding/decoding, configuration, and multiplexing of the radio packet channel and conversion between the CS service channels and the PS service channels. In addition, by controlling the access of the MSs, the GPRS solves the problem of channel contention and assigns channels for MSs according to the requested QoS. The GPRS system also provides routes to transmit the packet data to the SGSN and receives the downlink data from the SGSN. Huawei GPRS uses 16 kbit/s links on the G-Abis interface. When the CS-3 and CS-4 coding schemes are used, the rate of one PDCH is 15.6 kbit/s and 21.5 kbit/s respectively. Therefore, when the radio channel is mapped onto the terrestrial channel, one PDCH in CS-3 and CS-4 coding schemes should be mapped onto two 16 kbit/s links. Using the dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology, Huawei GPRS solves the transmission problem over the G-Abis interface when the CS-3 and CS-4 coding schemes are used. The dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology assigns a main16 kbit/s sub-timeslot statically and an additional 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot dynamically on the G-Abis interface for each PDCH using CS-3 or CS-4. The dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology has the following features: Any idle 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot on the G-Abis interface can be used as an additional 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot; the additional sub-timeslot can be dynamically attached to different main timeslots within the same site and thus the usage of additional sub-timeslot is increased based on the statistical multiplexing rule; the additional sub-timeslot does not need to be the neighbor of the main timeslot; the data packet is assembled and fragmented through software, which avoids the upgrade of hardware due to different product specifications; dynamical assignment of the TCH on the Abis interface can reduce the cost of the transmission on the Abis interface and thus reduce the O&M cost of the equipment.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 285 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs In external PCU networking mode, the external PCU devices should be configured. This feature should be supported by the GSN and the MS.
2.26.2 GBFD-10001 Network Operation Mode I

Availability
Summary
The Network Operation Mode I feature together with the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and the SGSN support the paging co-ordination function.
Benefits

The Network Operation Mode I together with the Gs interface support paging co-ordination and the CS paging when the MS is in packet transfer state. The Network Operation Mode I feature greatly reduces the signaling load between the MS and the network, thus saving and optimizing the radio resources.
Description
The GSM specifications define three network operation modes according to the paging mode adopted for CS services and PS services: Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II, and Network Operation Mode III. This feature refers to the Network Operation Mode I. With this feature, the network sends the CS paging message to the MS on the packet channels. That is, the network side sends the CS paging message to the MS on the PCCCH, CCCH, or PACCH. The MS monitors only one paging channel.
If the PCCCH is configured and the MS is in idle state, both the CS paging message and the PS paging message are sent on the PCCCH.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 286 of 368

If the CCCH but not the PCCCH is configured in the cell and the MS is in idle state, both the CS paging message and the PS paging message are sent on the CCCH. If the MS is in transfer state, the CS paging message is sent on the PACCH.
The Network Operation Mode I requires the configuration of the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and the SGSN because the CS paging message must be transmitted through the SGSN. For the MS, it listens to only one type of channel to receive the CS paging message. The Network Operation Mode I feature greatly reduces the signaling load between the MS and the network, thus saving and optimizing the radio resources. Using the Network Operation Mode I, the MS receives the CS paging message on the PACCH when processing the PS services. Then, the MS stops the PS services and initiates the CS services.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-9101 Packet Channel Combination Type Dependency on other NEs The Gs interface should be supported by the CN if the paging co-ordination is supported.
2.26.3 GBFD-8901 CS-3/CS-4

Availability
Summary
The CS-3/CS-4 feature makes use of the capability that the GPRS MS already has, thus increasing the throughput. The BSC adjusts the coding scheme to a higher level in the area with low error bit rate according to the transmission quality of the MS.
Benefits
Increases the GPRS service rate, improve the packet service performance in areas w here the EGPRS is not supported, and improve the satisfaction of the subscribers in the entire GPRS network.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 287 of 368
Makes full use of the capability that the GPRS MS already has, choose more suitable coding scheme (from CS-1 to CS-4) according to reasonable GPRS link control algorithm, thus improving the spectrum efficiency.
Description
According to GSM specifications, the GPRS can use four coding schemes, namely, CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4. Although the CS-1 and CS-2 coding schemes ensure 100% and 90% cell coverage respectively and meet the co-channel interference requirement C/I = 19 dB, they only have a data rate of 9.05 kbit/s and 13.4 kbit/s (containing the head of the RLC block) respectively. The reason is that the half-rate and 1/3 rate bits in the RLC blocks of the CS-1 and CS-2 schemes are used for forward error correction (FEC). This reduces the requirement for C/I and the transmission rate. To increase the transmission rate, Huawei provides the CS-3 and CS-4 schemes. The CS-3 and CS-4 schemes provide the transmission rate of 15.6 kbit/s and 21.4 kbit/s (containing the head of the RLC block) respectively. In addition, the CS-3 and CS-4 schemes have higher requirements for C/I. During the data transmission, the BSC dynamically adjusts the channel encoding/decoding scheme according to the retransmission rate of the RLC blocks transmitted on the uplink TBF and downlink TBF. This improves the transmission rate on the basis of guaranteed transmission quality and maximizes the use of radio resources. This feature supports the dynamic conversion among CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BTS hardware The hardware upgrade is not required. Dependency on other features of the GBSS GBFD-9106 Coding Scheme GBFD-4101 GPRS
2.26.4 GBFD-4201 EGPRS

Availability
Summary
The enhanced GPRS (EGPRS) is an enhancement of the GPRS system. EGPRS uses the 8PSK modulation mode on the RF layer so that the rate of a single channel is increased. The maximum rate of a single channel is 59.2 kbit/s. EGPRS adopts new coding schemes MCS-1 to MCS-9.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 288 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description EGPRS improves the algorithm for controlling the link quality by modifying of the RLC/MAC protocol at the link layer.
Benefits
Provides high-speed PS services, increases packet capacity, and reduces the delay of PS services and the congestion rate, thus improving the service quality and enhancing the user experience. Attracts more subscribers of PS services and thus increases the operators' revenue by providing more multimedia services.
Description
Compared with GSM, EDGE supports a higher data transmission rate. EDGE provides a set of enhanced standards for the GSM interfaces and enables the GSM network to carry 3G services. EDGE consists of EGPRS and ECSD. EGPRS is an enhancement of the GPRS system. It improves the rate of data channels. EGPRS improves the data transmission capability of a single times lot by adding the 8PSK modulation scheme on the Um interface and improves the data transmission capability of a single user through multis lot binding. Huawei EGPRS has the following features: 1. Support for coding schemes MCS-1 to MCS-9 in the uplink and downlink Huawei EGPRS supports the coding schemes MCS-1 to MCS-9 in the uplink and downlink, as listed in the following table. Scheme Code Rate Header Modulation Code Mode Rate RLC Blocks per Radio Block (20ms) 2 2 2 1 Raw Data within one Radio Block 2x592 2x544 2x448 592 544+48 MCS-5 MCS-4 MCS-3 0.37 1.0 0.85 1/3 0.53 0.53 GMSK 1 1 1 448 352 296 272+24 MCS-2 MCS-1 0.66 0.53 0.53 0.53 1 1 224 176 B C 11.2 8.8 B C A Family BCS Tail Payload HCS Data rate (kbit/s)
MCS-9 MCS-8 MCS-7 MCS-6
1.0 0.92 0.76 0.49
0.36 0.36 0.36 1/3
8PSK
A A B A
2x12
2x6
59.2 54.4 44.8
12
29.6 27.2 22.4 17.6 14.8 13.6
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 289 of 368
2. Support for the incremental redundancy (IR) mechanism in the uplink and downlink EGPRS adopts two modes for controlling the link quality: link adaptation (LA) and IR. Compared with GPRS that uses only the LA mode, EGPRS uses both the LA mode and the IR mode. The working principle of the IR mechanism is as follows: Generally, the transmitter uses the coding scheme with a high rate for data transmission; however, the coding scheme with a high rate always has a weak protection capability. If the data is received incorrectly, the transmitter retransmits additional coding information. The receiver combines the new information with the historical information and then performs decoding. This procedure is repeated until the decoding is successful. 3. Support for dynamic adjustment of EGPRS coding schemes in the uplink and downlink The dynamic adjustment of EGPRS coding schemes is similar to the dynamic adjustment of GPRS coding schemes. The GBSS sends the system information to the MS. The MS calculates the bit error probability (BEP) in the downlink and reports the result to the GBSS through the measurement report. The GBSS then adjusts the EGPRS coding schemes in the uplink and downlink based on the downlink BEP. 4. Dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology The dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology solves the problem of transmission over the G-Abis interface using MCS-3 to MCS-9. The dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology statically assigns one main 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot and dynamically assigns one to three additional 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots on the G-Abis interface for each PDCH using MCS-3 to MCS9. Using the dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology, the EGPRS BSS need not upgrade the hardware of the BTS, BSC, and PCU for supporting MCS-3 to MCS-9. In addition, EGPRS maximizes the multiplexing mode over the G-Abis interface, thus saving the investment on the transmission devices over the G-Abis interface. The strategy for allocating the 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots for different EGPRS services is listed in the following table. Coding Scheme MCS-1 to MCS-2 MCS-3 to MCS-6 MCS-7 MCS-8 to MCS-9 Number of 16 kbit/s Timeslots Allocated over the Abis Interface 1 2 3 4
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware In the case of the built-in PCU, the Gb interface board and the GDPUP need to be configured. Impacts on the BTS hardware
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 290 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs In external PCU networking mode, the external PCU devices should be configured. This feature should be supported by the GSN and the MS.
2.26.5 GBFD-3101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment

Availability
Summary
With this feature, fixed channels need not be configured for the PS services, the TCH and the PDCH can be automatically converted as required.
Benefits
Reduces the impact of GPRS services on the GSM speech services, decreases the maintenance and configuration workload, and increases channel usage and network capacity. Improves the performance of the PS services and increases the operators' revenue.
Description
Packet channel types The PDCH is classified into static PDCH and dynamic PDCH based on the bearer services (CS services or PS services). The static PDCH is used for the PS services only. The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during the initialization process. In the case of packet access, the TCH and the PDCH can be dynamically converted.
PDCH dynamic adjustment The static PDCH is used for the PS services only. The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during the initialization process. When the packet resources are insufficient, the PCU requests dynamic PDCHs from the BSC for the PS services. When the circuit resources are insufficient, the BSC requests dynamic PDCHs that are used as TCHs from the PCU. In this manner, the channel resources are flexibly used as required. Thus, the usage of resources is increased, and the complexity of PDCH configuration and the workload of maintenance and configuration are reduced. In addition, the impact of unreasonable PDCH configuration on the service performance is reduced.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 291 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description PDCH Preemption Priority: In the latter period of the GSM network development, the requirements for the PS services are preferentially met because of the significant increase in the proportion of PS services. Huawei PCU equipment supports three types of PDCH preemption priorities : all dynamic channels preemptable, packet control channels unpreemptable, and all dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable. This application enhancement optimizes the performance of the PS services by constraining channel preemption of the CS services. The operator can implement different packet strategies by configuring preemption priority. All dynamic channels preemptable: The CS services can preempt all dynamic channels. Packet control channels unpreemptable: The CS services can preempt all the other dynamic channels except the packet control channels. All dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable: The CS services cannot preempt all the dynamic channels carrying services. GBSS8.0 Overall Dynamic PDCH Availability: Except for static PDCHs, all the other channels can be converted in real time based on the situation of the PS services and the CS services. If required, TCHs can be converted to PDCHs for the PS services. With this application enhancement, more PDCHs can be converted when the CS services are not busy. This can alleviate the transmission rate decrease due to PDCH multiplexing. This flexible mechanism can maximize the channel usage and optimize the distribution of PDCHs and TCHs. In addition, the network planning is simple and thus you can expand the capacity if required.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment GBFD-4101 GPRS Dependency on other NEs None.
2.26.6 GBFD-10002 Gb Over FR

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 292 of 368
Summary
As a traditional networking mode, the Gb over FR feature enables the operator to deploy the network in frame relay (FR) transmission mode between the BSC and the SGSN.
Benefits

This feature is compatible with the CN equipment in the existing network. This feature enables the operator to fully utilize the existing network in FR transmission mode.
Description
This feature complies with the 3GPP protocols. The Gb interface provides connections between the BSS and the SGSN to send the information related to cell management and handovers in routing areas and transmit the data between the MS and the SGSN. Traditionally, the Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode to provide the logical link connection. Data is transferred through the network service virtual connection (NS-VC). The NS-VC is the permanent virtual channel (PVC) in FR. Huawei GBSS supports the FR networking over the Gb interface in the E1/T1 direct transmission mode or the FR transmission mode and supports configuration of multiple PVCs between the BSS and the SGSN. In addition, Huawei BSS manages these PVCs and supports load sharing among them. The BSC that supports Gb over FR requires no hardware upgrade. Only software upgrade is required to deploy the SGSN pool. The BSC supports the FR transmission mode and the IP transmission mode for the communication between the BSC and the SGSN. These two modes can work simultaneously.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the SGSN.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 293 of 368
2.27 EGPRS Service Enhancement

2.27.1 GBFD-9201 11-Bit EGPRS Access
Availability
Summary
The Packet Channel Request message is an 8- or 11-bit access burst. This feature supports the 11-bit EGPRS access. The 11-bit access burst contains the multislot capability of an MS and thus enables rapid allocation of more channels. The EGPRS MS supports one-phase 11-bit access. This shortens the access delay.
Benefits
This feature shortens the access delay and increases the access rate of the EGPRS MS, thus increasing the subscriber satisfaction.
Description
With this feature, the EGPRS MS can send the 11-bit channel access request signaling. In this manner, the system implements only one-phase access. That is, the system can immediately assign signaling for the MS to establish the uplink TBF and then transmit data. Before this feature is used, two-phase access is required. Therefore, this feature shortens the time for TBF establishment and improves the performance of small-sized data transmission (such as the TCP handshake).
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 294 of 368
2.27.2 GBFD-9202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the immediate assignment of packets and the uplink assignment of packets are performed by the BTS instead of the BSC. The BSC preallocates the radio resources in the uplink to the BTS so that the BTS completes the uplink TBF establishment and resource scheduling in advance.
Benefits

Moving immediate assignment of packets down to the BTS can increase the initial access rate of the PS services and thus increase the subscriber satisfaction. Moving uplink assignment of packets down to the BTS can improve the performance of the TCP application such as the FTP downloading by optimizing the rate of sending the TCP ACK message in the downlink, thus enhancing the user experience.
Description
Moving immediate assignment of packets down to the BTS Moving immediate assignment of packets down to the BTS is an optimization of the uplink immediate assignment. Generally, after the MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS forwards the message to the BSC to perform the immediate assignment. To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can preallocate the uplink TBF resourc es after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When the MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS uses the resource information to immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink TBF for the MS. In this manner, the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message. Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already accesses the specified channel and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of the radio resources.
Moving uplink assignment of packets down to the BTS During the downlink transmission process, if there is data to be transmitted in the uplink, the uplink channel request information is carried in the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message to request the uplink TBF establishment. Generally, the MS must wait for the BTS to forward the channel request information to the BSC to implement the channel assignment. To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can preallocate the uplink TBF resources after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When receiving the channel request of the MS, the BTS uses the resource information to immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink T BF for the MS. In this manner, the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message. Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already establishes the uplink TBF and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of radio resources. As a result, the time for the interaction between the BTS and the BSC is saved during the access of the MS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 295 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-4201 EGPRS Dependency on other NEs None.
2.27.3 GBFD-9203 Extended Uplink TBF

Availability
Summary
This feature ensures that the TBF is not released when no data is transmitted. In this manner, the TBF need not be re-established after the data is transmitted again. Thus, frequent TBF establishment and releases are avoided.
Benefits
This feature reduces the cost for establishing the uplink T BF, shortens the data transmission time in the uplink, and increases the uplink rate.
Description
After the uplink data is sent, the common uplink TBF is released immediately whereas the extended uplink TBF enters the inactive period. If there is new data to be transmitted, the TBF in inactive period enters the active period for data transmission. If the inactive period timer expires and there is no data to be transmitted, the TBF is released. The inactive period timer is an adjustable parameter pertaining to network optimization. With this feature, the throughput rate of those services with unstable data flow such as webpage browsing and email sending is improved.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 296 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-4201 EGPRS Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.
2.27.4 GBFD-9204 Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the BSS to support coding schemes MCS-1 to MCS-9 and dynamically adjust the coding scheme based on the radio quality.
Benefits
This feature increases the uplink rate of the EGPRS users, enhances the user experience, and improves the network quality.
Description
The requirements for the radio transmission quality vary with the transmission rate of the coding schemes. The higher the transmission rate, the higher the requirements for the radio transmission quality. During the data transmission process, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding scheme based on the radio quality to maximize the radio resource usage and the transmission rate with guaranteed transmission quality. Currently, the BSS supports nine coding schemes MSC-1 to MCS-9. The aim of this feature is to dynamically adjust the uplink rate of the EGPRS user based on the network status. With
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 297 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description this feature, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding scheme adopted by the PDCH based on the uplink measurement report from the BTS. In this manner, the PDCH can quickly adapt to the change of the air condition and thus the uplink throughput is increased.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment GBFD-4201 EGPRS Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the BTS.
2.27.5 GBFD-9205 Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the relative reserved block period (RRBP) frequency is dynamically adjusted according to the status of the uplink TBF and the downlink TBF. The data blocks with the RRBP flag in the downlink are sent at different intervals.
Benefits
Optimizes the uplink access rate of PS services, thus improving the performance of the TCP services such as FTP downloading by increasing the rate of sending the TCP ACK message. As a result, the user experience is enhanced. Reduces unnecessary data flow in the uplink and the impact on other users on the same PDCH.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 298 of 368
Description
This feature optimizes the RRBP frequency based on two factors: uplink T BF status and the phase of delayed downlink TBF release.
Uplink TBF status and RRBP frequency During the downlink transmission process, the BSC periodically sends data blocks with RRBP flag to reserve uplink resources for the MS to respond with the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message to report the receiving status of the downlink data. When the MS needs to send data in the uplink but the uplink TBF does not exist, the MS can carry the channel request information in the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message to initiate the access. Therefore, if the frequency of sending the data blocks with RRBP flag is increased at this time, the access rate of the MS can be increased. On the other hand, the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message seizes the uplink bandwidth. Therefore, when the uplink TBF already exists, the uplink expenditure is reduced and the uplink data bandwidth is increased if the frequency of sending the data blocks with RRBP flag is reduced.
Phase of delayed downlink TBF release and RRBP frequency The MS generally has a demand for sending uplink data in the earlier period of the delayed downlink TBF release after the data transmission in the downlink is complete. At this time, the BSS system uses a high frequency for sending the data blocks with the RRBP flag. In the latter period of the delayed downlink TBF release, there is less data to be sent in the uplink. At this time, the BSS system uses a low frequency for sending the data blocks with the RRBP flag. This feature dynamically adjusts the frequency for sending the data blocks with the RRBP flag based on the uplink TBF status and the phase of delayed downlink TBF release. When the uplink TBF exists and the delayed TBF release is in the latter period, a low frequency can be used to save the uplink bandwidth. When the uplink TBF does not exist and the delayed TBF release is in the earlier period, a high frequency can be used to increase the uplink access rate of the MS.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other NEs None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 299 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description GBFD-4101 GPRS Dependency on other NEs None.
2.27.6 GBFD-9302 Packet Channel Dispatching

Availability
Summary
The GPRS system uses only the GMSK modulation scheme whereas the EGPRS system uses the GMSK and 8PSK modulation schemes. When EGPRS downlink services and GPRS uplink services use the same packet channel, the EGPRS downlink data blocks with the USF should be used to schedule the GPRS uplink services. In this case, the EGPRS downlink data blocks can use only the GMSK modulation scheme. This greatly affects the downlink throughput of the EGPRS MS. With this feature, the operator can separate the EGPRS services from the GPRS services, thus effectively increasing the downlink throughput of the EGPRS MS.
Benefits
This feature reduces the probability that the EGPRS services and the GPRS services use the same channel, thus increasing the EGPRS service rate, improving the entire network performance, and enhancing the user experience.
Description
Types of Preferred Channels for Packet Services There are five types of preferred channels: EGPRS dedicated channel, EGPRS preferred channel, common EGPRS channel, GPRS channel, and non-GPRS channel. EGPRS dedicated channels serve only EGPRS MSs. EGPRS preferred channels serve EGPRS MSs in preference to GPRS MSs but can be used by GPRS MSs when the channels are not occupied by EGPRS MSs. When an EGPRS MS requests an EGPRS preferred channel, the GPRS MSs that occupy the EGPRS preferred channels should be transferred to other channels. EGPRS MSs and GPRS MSs cannot use the same EGPRS preferred channel. Common EGPRS channels serve either GPRS MSs or EGPRS MSs, whichever occupies the channel first. GPRS channels serve GPRS MSs. If a cell is not configured with EGPRS channels, EGPRS MSs in the cell use these channels to process GPRS services. Non-GPRS channels are channels that are not used for the PS services.
Channel Allocation Principles When configuring the channel type on the TRX, you can select the channel type from the GPRS preferred channel types. When the BSS allocates PDCHs, the preferred channel type varies with the specific packet services. For GPRS services, the channels are preferentially assigned in the following order: GPRS channels, common EGPRS channels, and EGPRS preferred channels.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 300 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description For EGPRS services, the channels are preferentially assigned in the following order: EGPRS dedicated channels, EGPRS preferred channels, and common EGPRS channels. Multiplexing of common EGPRS channels may occur when the GPRS MS uses the uplink channel and the EGPRS MS uses the downlink channel. To avoid this, you can set Allow E Down G Up Switch to Close . If you want to eliminate this, do not configure common EGPRS channels. Channels should be used based on the type of the preferred channel. For example, if the channels on the TRX that supports EGPRS are configured as GPRS channels, these channels can be used for only GPRS services. EGPRS dedicated channels can be configured only as static channels whereas the other three preferred channels can be configured as static or dynamic channels.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-4201 EGPRS Dependency on other NEs None.
2.27.7 GBFD-9303 Load Sharing

Availability
Summary
Based on the traffic load on the PDCHs, load sharing applies to the dynamic adjustment of the MS distribution on the PDCHs to improve the channel utilization and single-user PS service rate.
Benefits
This feature helps improve the channel utilization and PS service rate.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 301 of 368
Description
The strategy for load sharing includes the following three parts: When an MS accesses the network, the system preferentially assigns a TRX with a light load to the MS to adjust the load distribution between TRXs. When the MS provides PS services, the system assigns the MS a PDCH or PDCHs with a light load. The occupancy of channel resources varies during the transmission. For example, if the MS releases channel resources when the service ends, some TRXs or PDCHs are idle. If the MS accessing the network is not shifted from the channel with heavy load to the channel with a light load, the channel resources are wasted.According to the load on the PDCHs, the BSS shifts the MS carried on the PDCH with a heavy load to the one with a light load. Thus, load sharing is implemented and the single-user rate increases. When the channel is released, the system adjusts the load distribution between channels according to the traffic load on each channel to ensure load balance on the PDCHs, thus optimally utilizing channel resources.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Load sharing during the release of radio resources: This function enhances the load balance between TRXs when radio resources are released. Thus, the resources on all the TRXs are reassigned in the cell. That is, the MSs carried on the TRXs with a heavy load are assigned to those with a light load, and then the MSs carried on the PDCHs with a heavy load are assigned to those with a light load so that the load balance between all the TRXs in the cell is realized and the channel resources are optimally utilized. For example, an MS transmits data for a long time. During the data transmission, if radio resources are released by other MSs, the BSC determines whether the TRX used by the MSs that release radio resources is idle. If the TRX is idle, the MS performing long-time data transmission is reassigned with the channels on the idle TRX. Thus, the throughput of the MS is increased. When the traffic load of the GPRS channels decreases, some GPRS MSs are shifted from the EGPRS channel to the GPRS channels to increase the channel utilization and minimize the impact on the EGPRS services.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-9110 Access GBFD-9111 Assignment GBFD-4201 EGPRS Dependency on other NEs
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 302 of 368
2.27.8 GBFD-9501 Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels

Availability
Summary
The uplink and downlink channel adaptive adjustment implements dynamic assignment of the number of uplink and downlink channels for the MSs based on the uplink and downlink service data flow.
Benefits
In the case of the services that are processed on both the uplink and downlink such as ping large packets and Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC), this feature helps shorten the system transmission delay. In the case of the downlink-preferred services such as FTP download, this feature helps improve the downlink data throughput. In the case of the uplink-preferred services such as e-mail sending, this feature, used together with extended dynamic allocation (EDA), helps improve the uplink data throughput.
Description
The BSS measures the data throughput of uplink and downlink of each temporary block flow (TBF) regularly to determine the current service type of the TBF. If the downlink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many downlink times lots as possible to the MS. For an MS with multis lot class of 12, the BSS uses the 4+1 DL/UL timeslot configuration preferentially. If the uplink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many uplink timeslots as possible to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 1+4 DL/UL timeslot configuration preferentially used together with EDA. If the service processed on both the uplink and downlink is performed, the BSS tries to assign the timeslots of uplink and downlink asymmetrically to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 3+2 DL/UL timeslot configuration preferentially.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 303 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.27.9 GBFD-9305 BSS Paging Coordination

Availability
Summary
When no Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN is configured and the MS is in packet transfer state, the network sends CS paging messages through the PACCH. Then, the MS in packet transfer state can respond to the CS paging message.
Benefits
With this feature, the MS in packet transfer state can receive the CS paging message, thus avoiding the drop of network paging rate when the PS services are performed.
Description
When the common class B MS is in packet transfer state, it only listens to the paging message on the PACCH. When no Gs interface is configured, the MS in packet transfer state cannot respond to the CS paging message because the CS paging message is sent on the PCH. This problem can be solved through BSS paging coordination. After the BSC receives a CS paging message over the A or Gb interface, BSS paging coordination enables the BSC to query whether the MS is performing PS services according to the IMSI carried in the paging message. If the MS is in packet transfer state, the BSC sends a paging message to the MS through the PACCH; if the MS is in idle state, the BSC sends a paging message to the MS through the PCH. BSS paging coordination is independent of the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN and is independent of Network Operation Mode I. The GBSC independently determines whether the paging message is sent on the PCH or on the PACCH. If no Gs interface is configured in a network with large amount of PS services, BSS paging coordination helps increase the success rate of paging.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 304 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS The built-in PCU must be configured. The external PCU does not support this feature. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.28 High-Speed Data Service

2.28.1 GBFD-9401 EDA (Extended Dynamic Allocation)
Availability
Summary
EDA helps assign more timeslots on the uplink to the MS, thus improving the uplink throughput.
Benefits
This feature improves the uplink rate and helps transmit large amount of data on the uplink. In this way, the user satisfaction is improved.
Description
Generally, the GPRS/EGPRS downlink services outnumber the GPRS/EGPRS uplink services. However, in some cases, a higher uplink bandwidth is required; for example, a large-sized email is sent through the GPRS/EGPRS. The EDA feature enables a single MS to be assigned with four timeslots on the uplink. If the MS high multis lot classes feature is supported, the MS with the high multislot class 34 can be assigned with five timeslots on the uplink, thus meeting the high requirements of bandwidth of the uplink. EDA is based on the uplink dynamic allocation. The network assigns multiple timeslots on the uplink to the MS. The MS listens to all the assigned PDCHs. When the MS hears the assigned USF on the assigned PDCH, the MS uses the uplink block corresponding to this PDCH and the uplink block corresponding to the assigned PDCH with a greater timeslot number. Once the MS is able to send uplink blocks, it will not listen to the following assigned channels. Therefore, the MS can use more uplink channels. The uplink extended dynamic allocation requires the support from the MS. The MS will indicate whether it supports GPRS uplink extended dynamic allocation and EGPRS uplink extended dynamic allocation through the message containing the information about radio access capability.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 305 of 368
Dependency
2.28.2 GBFD-9402 MS High Multislot Classes

Availability
Summary
High multislot classes ensures that a maximum of five timeslots on the uplink or downlink are assigned to a single MS, thus improving the uplink or downlink throughput of a single MS.
Benefits
The BSS supports the MS with a high multislot classes of 30 to 34. A maximum of five timeslots on the downlink can be assigned to an MS. If an MS is of the high multis lot class 34, a maximum of five timeslots on the uplink can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the uplink and downlink throughput is increased by 25%.
Description
The BSS supports the MS with a high multislot classes of 30 to 34. A maximum of five timeslots on the downlink can be assigned to an MS. If the MS is of the high multis lot class 34, a maximum of five timeslots on the uplink can be assigned to the MS. For a GPRS MS, the maximum data rate increases from 80 kbit/s to 100 kbit/s; for an EGPRS MS, the maximum data rate increases from 236 kbit/s to 296 kbit/s. The total number of timeslots on both the uplink and downlink cannot exceed six. That is, if five timeslots on the downlink are assigned to the MS, then only one timeslot on the uplink can be assigned to the MS. The following table lists the multislot capacity of MSs with multis lot classes 30 to 34: High Multislot Class Maximum Number of Downlink Timeslots 5 5 Maximum Number of Uplink Timeslots 1 2 Maximum Number of Timeslots
30 31
6 6
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 306 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description 32 33 34 5 5 5 3 4 5 6 6 6
For an MS with high multislot classes 32 to 34, if more than three timeslots on the uplink are assigned to the MS, EDA must be enabled.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following feature: If more than three timeslots on the uplink are required, the GBFD-9401 EDA must be used. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MS.
2.28.3 GBFD-4151 DTM

Availability
Summary
Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) allows simultaneous transfer of CS service and PS service. That is, a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during a call. The 3G network provides concurrent CS service and PS service. With DTM, the subscribers in a GSM network can enjoy services similar to those provided in a 3G network. In addition, in areas with insufficient 3G coverage, subscribers can use the services that are similar to 3G services through the 2G network.
Benefits
DTM supports concurrent CS service and PS service. That is, a subscriber can provide PS service without disrupting the CS service. With DTM, the concurrent CS services and PS services which are originally available only in the 3G network are available in the 2G network.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 307 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description With the passage of time and development of technology, the data service becomes the new area of profit growth. The concurrent CS service and PS service becomes a new requirement. Without DTM, only the class A mobile phone with complex hardware supports concurrent CS service and PS service. However, due to its complexity, few manufacturers provide such mobile phones. The implementation of DTM is a foundation for the extensive application of data service. With the interaction between the CS servic es and PS services and the multimedia services provided by operators, the call duration is prolonged and a large amount of data traffic is generated. This considerably increases the revenue of operators.
Description
DTM is a 3GPP-defined standard function. This feature implements the simplified operation function of the class A mobile phone, that is, concurrent CS services and PS services. In DTM mode, the CS resource (TCH) and PS resource (PDCH) are assigned to the MS simultaneous ly. According to the multislot capacity of the MS, different number of channels on the uplink or downlink can be assigned to the MS to meet the requirement for different bandwidths. DTM supports MS multislot class 5 and higher classes. According to the MS multislot capacity, the BSC assigns two channels on the uplink or downlink to the MS: one for CS services and the other for PS services. The MS multislot class 9 with DTM can be assigned with one channel for CS service and two channels for PS service.
CS CS
PS PS
PS PS
CS CS
Downlink Uplink CLASS 5 Downlink Uplink CLASS 9
PS
CS CS
PS PS
PS
PS PS
CS CS
After DTM is enabled, the BSC must support BSS paging coordination in packet transfer mode if the NMO II or III is configured in a cell. For an MS supporting DTM, when the MS initiates a location update in CS mode, the CS channels (FACCH or SDCCH) can be used for location update and no PDCH is required. In this case, the channel resources in PS domain is saved. In DTM mode, the MS can establish the PS connection only after the PS connection is established. If an MS providing data service needs to switch to the DTM mode, the TBF must be released first; then, the MS switches to CS mode and a TBF connection. After that, the MS switches to DTM mode. The following figure shows the state transition in DTM mode:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 308 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Figure 2-4 State transition in DTM mode
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-4201 EGPRS This feature and the following features are mutually exclusive: GBFD-4001 Extended Cell GBFD-6201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) Dependency on other NEs DTM should be supported by the MSC, SGSN, and MS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 309 of 368
2.28.4 GBFD-9403 Class11 DTM

Availability
Summary
Based on the common DTM feature, Class 11 DTM doubles the bandwidth of the uplink PS services of the MS. When an MS using Class11 DTM provides mainly uplink service, the channel assignment of Speech + 1Downlink + 2Uplink is supported. That is, two uplink PDCHs and one downlink PDCH are assigned to the MS.
Benefits
Based on common DTM, Class 11 DTM doubles the uplink rate. Theoretically, the uplink rate of the EGPRS MS can reach 110 kbit/s. Class11 DTM provides the bandwidth for developing streaming services. With the Class 11 DTM function, the uplink rate or downlink rate can be increased as required, thus improving the user satisfaction. In addition, the increased data flow can also increase the revenues of operators.
Description
In DTM mode, the MS supports both CS service and PS service simultaneously. Besides supporting the channel combination of Class11 DTM and Class9 DTM, the MS using Class11 DTM can occupy two uplink PDCHs and one downlink PDCH used together with EDA. When the MS provides mainly the uplink services, Class11 DTM meets the requirements of the MS more effectively.
PS PS
CS CS PS
Downlink Uplink CLASS 11
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 310 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description GBFD-4151 DTM GBFD-9401 EDA This feature and the following features are mutually exclusive: GBFD-4001 Extended Cell GBFD-6201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) Dependency on other NEs DTM should be supported by the MSC and the SGSN. Class11 DTM should be supported by the MS.
2.28.5 GBFD-9404 HMC DTM

Availability
Summary
Based on common DTM, HMC DTM improves the bandwidth of the uplink and downlink PS services of the MS. The MS can occupy a maximum of three uplink and downlink PDCHs respectively during a call. The following channel assignments are supported: Speech + 3Downlink + 1Uplink, Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink, and Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink.
Benefits
Based on common DTM, HMC DTM triples the uplink and downlink rates. This improves the user satisfaction and provides bandwidth to develop streaming services. In addition, the increased data flow can also increase the revenues of operators.
Description
The DTM multislot classes defined in 3GPP protocols are classes 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 31 33, 36-38, and 4144. The classes higher than class 31 are called High Multis lot classes DTM (HMC DTM). The DTM multislot capacity is in direct proportion to the uplink/downlink rate. The higher the DTM multislot class supported by the GBSS equipment, the higher the uplink/downlink rate. Huawei HMC DTM supports multislot classes 31-33. In other words, based on the multislot capacity of an MS, a maximum of five channels on the uplink or downlink can be assigned to the MS. The maximum number of channels on both the uplink and downlink is six. Except one TCH assigned to the speech on the uplink and downlink respectively, a maximum of three PDCHs on the uplink or downlink can be assigned to the MS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 311 of 368

PS PS CS CS PS PS Downlink Uplink CLASS 31 Downlink PS Uplink CLASS 32
PS
PS PS
CS CS PS
PS
CS CS
PS PS
PS PS
CS CS PS PS
CS CS
PS PS PS PS
Downlink Uplink CLASS 33
The following table lists the multislot capacity of MSs with multislot classes 31 to 33: Multislot class Maximum number of slots Rx 31 32 33 5 5 5 Tx 2 3 4 Sum 6 6 6
For an MS with multislot classes 32 to 33, if more than three channels on the uplink are assigned to the MS, EDA must be enabled.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-4101 DTM GBFD-9401 EDA GBFD-4101 GPRS GBFD-4201 EGPRS This feature and the following features are mutually exclusive:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 312 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description GBFD-4001 Extended Cell GBFD-6201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) Dependency on other NEs DTM should be supported by the MSC and SGSN. DTM HMC should be supported by the MS.
2.28.6 GBFD-9405 14.4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data

Availability
Summary
The GBSS equipment supports the transfer of PS services on individual speech channels with a high rate of 14.4 kbit/s.
Benefits
Compared with common CS-based PS services, this feature provides PS services with higher bandwidth.
Description
Huawei GBSS system supports various bearer services specified by GSM specifications. The GBSS provides lower-layer connections and transmits service data to the upper layer instead of processing these services. Huawei GBSS system supports the transfer of the PS services on individual speech channels and the CS-based PS services with a high rate of 14.4 kbit/s.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 313 of 368
2.29 VIP Service Support

2.29.1 GBFD-6001 Resource Reservation
Availability
Summary
Resource reservation can reserve a certain number of TCHFs for the high-priority users.
Benefits
With this feature, the channel resources can be reserved for the high-priority users, which guarantees the QoS for the VIP users and improve user satisfaction. Resource reservation provides a segmentation function for operators. With this feature, operators can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities to increase the revenue.
Description
With priority-based resource reservation, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for the high-priority users to ensure the QoS. The reservation of the channel resources in a congested cell prevents the high-priority users from eMLPP preemption and queuing because there are no channel resources available when the high-priority users access. Thus, the access speeds up and access success rate is increased. In addition, the half-rate service uses a coding mode different from that of the full-rate service and has a coding rate of 5.6 kbit/s. Thus, after the half-rate service is enabled, the voice quality of the half-rate service is deteriorated. The MSs of some low -priority users do not support the half-rate feature. Consequently, in the cells where the half-rate feature is enabled, these MSs only occupy the TCHFs and have a high voice quality. However, the MSs of some high-priority users which support the half-rate function. After the half-rate function is enabled in a cell, the TCHHs are preferably assigned to the MSs. Thus, the high-priority users receive a low voice quality. The resource reservation feature reserves TCHFs for these high-priority users to ensure the QoS. The TCHFs can be reserved for the high-priority users as required. In each channel assignment, if the users with the priority equal to or higher than the defined high priority and the reserved channels is sufficient, the TCHFs are directly assigned to the users; if all the reserved channels are assigned, the preemption flow is performed according to the eMLPP rule. If the priority of the user is lower than the defined high priority, the system checks whether the total number of occupied channels and idle channels is greater than the number of reserved channels. If the total number of occupied channels and idle channels is greater than the number of reserved channels, the system initiates the normal call flow; otherwise, the queuing and preemption flow are performed according to the queuing and eMLPP rule.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 314 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature can be used together with GBFD-5001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP), which can effectively improve user benefits and satisfaction. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.29.2 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP)

Availability
Summary
The enhanced multi level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) is a supplementary service that is used to ensure a normal conversation of the subscriber with higher priority by preemption, queuing, directed retry, and forced handover.
Benefits
This feature ensures the QoS of the VIP subscribers and improves their satisfaction. This feature allows operators to classify subscribers into different categories. Thus, operators can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities to increase revenue.
Description
The eMLPP is a supplementary service offered by the GSM system. The eMLPP service allows a subscriber to initiate calls with different priorities. The network side employs different channel assignment strategies for the subscribers according to the priorities. If the network is congested, the call with higher priority is served preferably. The eMLPP service requires the support from MS to ensure that the subscriber can initiate calls of different priorities under different situations. A normal conversation of the subscribers with higher priority is ensured by preemption, queuing, directed retry, and forced handover. With this service, the high-priority subscribers have an advantage in call establishment rate and completion rate compared with the lower-priority subscribers according to different priority configurations in a network. The eMLPP service provides the following two mechanisms:
Preemption
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 315 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The MSC determines whether preemption is allowed. Then, the MSC sends an assignment request or handover request message to the BSC to notify the BSC whether the preemption is allowed. If the MSC allows to perform the preemption and eMLPP is enabled, the BSC forcibly switches the call with lowest priority to a neighboring cell when the TCHs are congested so as to release the resource for the call with high priority. However, if eMLPP is not enabled, the BSC releases the resource of a low -priority user directly to ensure that the call with high priority is normal.
Queuing The MSC determines whether queuing is allowed. Then, the MSC sends an assignment request or handover request message to the BSC to notify the BSC whether queuing is allowed. When the cell has no idle TCH and the MSC allows queuing, the BSC puts the TCH request into the queue. Then, when idle TCHs are available, the TCH is assigned to the waiting call in the queue. If the directed retry is allowed, the BSC performs directed retry before the queue timer expires.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs The eMLPP feature should be supported by the CN, HLR, and MS.
2.29.3 GBFD-0521 Guaranteed Emergency Call

Availability
Summary
In the cells with heavy traffic, the emergency call procedure is enhanced to improve the success rate of emergency call establishment.
Benefits
The success rate of emergency call establishment is guaranteed when the traffic in the network is heavy.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 316 of 368
Description
In most networks, the emergency call services specified by GSM specifications are mandatory. Compared with a common call, an emergency call has a higher priority and faster access capability. Thus, the access rate and success rate of call establishment of the emergency call is guaranteed. However, in emergency situations such as an earthquake, tsunami, or flood, the traffic in the network is heavy. Hence, the emergency call service may not be implemented due to the lack of resources. To avoid this circumstance, in the cells with heavy traffic, the emergency call procedure is enhanced to improve the success rate of emergency call establishment. To ensure that the TCH can be assigned to the MS that initiates an emergency call, the TCH is preferentially assigned in the immediate assignment and the channel mode is modified during service assignment. If no TCH is available in the immediate assignment, an SDCCH is assigned to the emergency call and the channel preemption is performed. If the channel is successfully preempted, the channel is reserved for the emergency call and then assigned to the emergency call during service assignment. Thus, even if the traffic is heavy in the network, the success rate of emergency call establishment can be maximized.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.30 Terminal Package

2.30.1 GBFD-8103 Network Support SAIC
Availability
Summary
The network side performs active power control for the MS supporting single antenna interference cancellation (SAIC).
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 317 of 368
Benefits
In the GSM network, the MS can use only a single antenna because of the limitations in size and cost. Therefore, the co-channel interference cannot be effectively suppressed and the spectrum efficiency of the GSM system is reduced. Some attributes of interference are known, for example, channel modulation type and training sequence. Therefore, it is possible to improve the anti-interference capability of the receiver. The anti-interference technology called SAIC is defined in the 3GPP R6 protocol for the MS with a single antenna. SAIC can enhance the anti-interference capability of the downlink, thus increasing the capacity of the GSM system. With this feature, the network side performs active power control on the MS supporting SAIC to reduce the interference of the entire network, expand the system capacity, reduce the transmit power of the BTS, and save the power consumption.
Description
SAIC is an anti-interference technology for suppressing the co-channel interference and adjacent-channel interference. The SAIC feature applies mainly to the MS with a single antenna and is used to reduce the impact of the interference reception of downlink signals through a signal processing technology.Compared with common mobile phones, the MS supporting SAIC has stronger anti-interference capacity. The network can modify the power control policy as required to reduce the transmit power of the BTSs, thus reducing the interference in the entire network. In downlink power control, the network checks whether the MS supports the SAIC. If the MS supports the SAIC, the network decreases the upper downlink level threshold and the lower downlink level threshold according to the Huawei III power control algorithm; the network increases the UL Qual. Upper Threshold and UL Qual.Lower Threshold, according to the Huawei II power control algorithm.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs SAIC should be supported by the MS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 318 of 368
2.31 LCS
2.31.1 GBFD-5401 NSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA)
Availability
Summary
The built-in serving mobile location center (SMLC) supports the NSS-based Cell ID+TA location service.
Benefits
The location service (LCS) enables the network to provide various services for an MS based on the location of the MS. These services include weather forecasts, trip scheduling, emergency assistance, stock information, business planning, and transport conditions. In this way, the revenue of operators increases.
Description
LCS is a series of services that is achieved based on locating the position of users in a certain range, such as locating an emergency call or position information of users for value-added services. LCS should reach the specified QoS, such as the required accuracy and latency. Huawei supports NSS-based Cell ID+TA location scheme of the SMLC. The location precision of this scheme is about 500 meters.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the NSS side.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 319 of 368
2.31.2 GBFD-5402 BSS-based LCS (Cell ID + TA)

Availability
Summary
The built-in SMLC supports the BSS-based Cell ID+TA location service.
Benefits
This feature can provide location services and increase the revenue of operators. Description Huawei BSS provides the BSS-based CELL+TA mobile location service. The Cell ID + TA location is used to estimate the distance between MS and BTS according to current parameter TA, thus improving the location precision on the basis of Cell ID. Huawei BSC integrates the SMLC. The interface between BSC and SMLC is an internal interface. The location precision of this scheme is about 500 meters.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the NSS side.
2.31.3 GBFD-5403 Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA)

Availability
Summary
The location information of the MSs can be directly displayed on the BSC LMT.
Benefits
With this feature, operators can provide location services and increase the revenue.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 320 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description In addition, LCS helps in disaster relief, routine network optimization, and helps handle emergency situations and customer complaints.
Description
Huawei BSS supports the simple mode LCS on the basis of the NSS-based LCS and BSS-based LCS. The BSC transmits the location results to the BSC6000 LMT by analyzing the location information. In addition to the location information of the traced MS, the CGI, TA, longitude and latitude of the cell, azimuth, and error can be provided.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MSC.
2.32 Abis IP
2.32.1 GBFD-8601 Abis over IP
Availability
Summary
Abis over IP enables the IP networking over the Abis interface.
Benefits
This feature adapts to All IP development trend of future transport layer and protocol development. The Abis interface supports the features such as high bandwidth and low cost, and does not have any restrictions on the BSC capacity. The low IP network deployment cost, short construction period, and easy maintenance effectively reduce the CAPEX and OPEX of operators.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 321 of 368
Description
Abis over IP allows operators to deploy an IP network between the BSC and the BTS. In addition, this feature provides FE and GE interfaces and supports the IPv4 protocol. The BSC connects to the BTS through a LAN or WAN, depending on the location of the BSC and the BTS. Abis over IP supports active/standby mode and load sharing mode, and is reliable. The GBSS adopts the following mechanisms to ensure end-to-end high QoS.
Physical bandwidth shaping The burst flow in the network is controlled by the buffer and token bucket. If the messages are transmitted at a very high speed, the messages are buffered and transmitted at a uniform speed under the control of the token bucket.
Priority mapping A definite rule is used to identify the messages for different services. Then, the messages are classified and prioritized, and they are associated with the corresponding flow control and resource assignment. According to the load on the current network, a specific flow control action is taken. Congestion management Congestion occurs when the rate at which data arrives at the port is higher than the rate at which data is sent from the port. In this case, the voice quality deteriorates and the data transmission rate decreases. The traffic statistics of the interface board show that the number of discarded packets increases. As a result, congestion results in the increase of the packet transmission delay and delay variation. Furthermore, an excessively long delay leads to packet retransmission. If congestion increases, a large number of network resources are wasted and Improper resource assignment may lead to system deadlock or even system corruption. The problem of shortage of network resources can be solved by increasing the network bandwidth. In addition, preventive mechanisms like tail drop and weighted random early detection (WRED) must be applied to avoid the network congestion. When congestion occurs, the priority queue (PQ) or weighted round robin (WRR) of queue scheduling is used to solve the congestion problem.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Impacts on the BSC hardware This feature should be configured with the IP interface board. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 322 of 368
2.33 A IP
2.33.1 GBFD-8602 A over IP
Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS8.0 and GBSS8.1 implements A interface over IP in private protocols. The features include TC in MGW and IP transmission on the signaling plane and user plane.
Benefits
With the increasing use of IP transmission in the wireless core network, the compressed speech coding scheme is used on the Nb interface, and the TDM transmission is still used on the A interface. In this way, a call across MSCs needs to be coded and decoded four times. Compared with coding and decoding in TDM transmission mode that occurs only twice, the application of IP transmission in the CN increases the number of TCs required by the BSC and the MGW in the network and deteriorates the voice quality. However, when A interface over IP is applied, together with the IP transmission on CN and transcoder free operation (TrFO), the originated call and terminated call do not need to be coded and decoded. Thus, the voice quality is improved and the number of TCs required by the BSC and the MGW is reduced. With the increase of the network equipment capacity and the number of nodes, MSC pool is an acknowledged solution that meets the requirements of disaster recovery and backup. In TDM transmission mode, the application of MSC pool over the A interface is difficult to be implemented due to the complexity of the physical connection. The IP transmission, however, is a solution to the problem. In addition, A interface over IP complies with the trend of all IP in the transmission network and simplifies the network maintenance.
Description
The details of this feature are as follows:
TC in MGW To improve the voice quality, the feature of TrFO is supported. The TCs distributed in the BSS are removed from the existing GSM network and are mainly distributed in the MGW. Under the control of the signaling plane, when the calling and called MSs use the same speech versions or compatible AMR codec set, the MGW can be coded or decoded without using TC. Thus, TrFO is implemented and then the voice quality is improved. However, if the calling and called MSs use different speech versions or incompatible AMR codec set, the TC in the MGW is required to converse speech version under the control of the MSC-S.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 323 of 368
MSC-S A/IP
Nc
MSC-S A/IP
BSS
Mc/IP MGW A/IP
Mc/IP MGW A/IP
BSS
Nb
e.g. AMR coded IP based protocol stack
e.g. AMR coded IP based protocol stack
= Signalling = User p lane
= Transcoder or Transcoder-pair, typically not used in MS-to MS calls
V oice over IP The A interface on the user plane is placed between the BSC and the MGW and adopts the standard RTP/UDP/IP protocol to carry user data. The A interface supports all the following speech codec types in the existing BSS: GSM_FR: GSM_HR: GSM_EFR: RFC 3551 for GSM_FR. ETSI 101318 for GSM_HR. RFC 3551 for EFR.
AMR: RFC 3267 for AMR. The speech coding scheme on the A interface is the same as that on the Um interface because there is no TC configured in the BSS. However, the speech codec types are different.
BSC
Payload RTP UDP IP MAC / PPP
MGW
Payload RTP UDP IP MAC / PPP
Signaling over IP The BSC supports signaling over IP on the A interface in the M3UA/SCTP/IP protocol stack. The BSC is directly connected to the MSC server through the M3UA, and the data on the signaling plane and user plane can be transmitted through the MGW routes. To meet the requirements of TrFO and IP transmission on the user plane, some signaling messages at the BSSMAP is modified. At the same time, the intra-BSS switchover procedure of speech versions is added. The introduction of A the interface over IP has no impact on the DTAP message.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 324 of 368

BSC BSSMAP+ SCCP M3UA SCTP IP MAC / PPP MSS BSSMAP+ SCCP M3UA SCTP IP MAC / PPP
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Impacts on the BSC hardware The interface board for A over IP must be configured. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MSC/MGW. The GBSS 8.0 and GBSS8.1 are only applicable to Huawei MSC/MGW.
2.34 Gb IP
2.34.1 GBFD-8603 Gb over IP
Availability
Summary
Gb over IP allows operators to deploy an IP network instead of using frame relay (FR) between the BSC and the SGSN. Thus, operators can fully utilize the advantages of IP transmission so as to save the transmission cost and c arry different types of services.
Benefits
This feature can reduce the cost of network investment. The IP transmission simplifies network maintenance, thus saving the operation cost and maintenance expense.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 325 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description The application of IP transmission increases the bandwidth over the Gb interface. Therefore, the Gb interface does not restrict the bit rate of subscribers. This feature facilitates the SGSN pool function. Compared with the frame relay mode, the cost of using SGSN pool function in IP transmission is much lower because the SGSN pool function requires a large number of links on the Gb interface. Thus, SGSN pool can be implemented in a more cost-efficient way.
Description
Gb over IP complies with the 3GPP protocol. When Gb over IP is enabled, SGSN pool can be implemented after the license of SGSN pool is obtained and no upgrades in the existing hardware is required. Gb over IP supports dynamic configuration and highly automatic upgrade compared with the frame relay mode. If SGSN pool is enabled, the applicat ion of Gb over IP can reduce the configuration work for the Gb interface. The Gb interface supports the FE/GE interface, the interface in active/standby mode or load sharing mode, and the interconnection between the CN and the LAN or MAN. The Gb interface supports IP services based on the DiffServ mechanism and guarantees the QoS of the services with different levels. When the IP network is congested, the data packets of the service with higher priority are preferably transmitted. The BSC supports two kinds of end-to-end communications from the BSC to the SGSN, that is, the FR network and IP network. In addition, two protocol stacks can work simultaneous ly to minimize the impact of the IP transmission on the existing services. When Gb over IP is applied, the transmission equipment supporting IP transmission should be used. Compared with the FR equipment, the cost is lower. With the increase of packet data services, the requirement for the bandwidth over the Gb interface is higher. Gb over IP can compress the IP header and enable the data over the Gb interface to share the bandwidth, thus improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the transmission cost.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the SGSN.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 326 of 368
2.35 IP Enhancement
2.35.1 GBFD-8604 Abis MUX
Availability
Summary
If Abis over IP is used without any compression or multiplexing technology, the utilization of transmission resources is low. Compared with TDM, the transmission bandwidth cannot be saved. Therefore, a compression or multiplexing technology for saving the bandwidth must be used in IP transmission mode. Abis MUX is used to save the bandwidth and multiplex the packets. The BSC and the BTS serve as transmitting end and receiving end of each other. When Abis MUX is applied, the transmitting end multiplexes the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing condition. Multiple UDP packets are multiplexed into one IP/UDP header at the transmitting end and then demultiplexed at the receiving end to reconstruct the original data in the IP/UDP packets. Thus, the transmission efficiency is improved and the bandwidth is saved.
Benefits
By multiplexing and demultiplexing the IP/UDP packet, Abis MUX reduces the overhead of each IP packet, increases the efficiency of the IP transmission, and saves the bandwidth. Without the application of Abis MUX, the efficiency in IP transmission is about 32%. Whereas, after Abis MUX is enabled, 14 full-rate speech packets are multiplexed, and the efficiency of IP transmission can reach 73%, which is increased by 40%.
Description
The speech payload in GSM is small. After the IP transmission is applied, the speech payload that is carried in the IP/UDP packets is smaller than the IP/UDP header. Therefore, the transmission efficiency of the speech is very low. With the multiplexing of the IP/UDP header, the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing condition are multiplexed at the transmitting end, and demultiplexed at the receiving end. In this way, several UDP/IP packets are multiplexed in one UDP/IP packet; in addition, several speech packets share one IP/UDP header. Thus, the efficiency of link transmission is improved. The principle of Abis MUX is shown as follows:
B efore using A bis Mux
MAC
IP
UDP
Speech payload A
MAC
IP
UDP
Speech payload B
After using A bis Mux
MAC
IP
UDP
Speech payload A+B
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 327 of 368
Abis MUX requires the support from both the BTS and the BSC. That is, after the BSC/BTS multiplexes UDP packets, the BSC/BTS at the peer end must be able to identify multiplexed and non-multiplexed packets and then demultiplex packets to reconstruct the original data according to the multiplexing protocol.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BTS hardware Abis MUX should be supported by the BTS. Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.35.2 GBFD-8605 IP QoS

Availability
Summary
IP QoS provides a series of QoS mechanisms for the IP transmission to ensure the transmission quality. The QoS mechanisms include admission control, congestion management, port traffic shaping, queue scheduling, DSCP, and VLAN.
Benefits
IP QoS ensures the KPIs in the wireless network and prevents the drop in QoS caused by the network congestion. IP QoS meets different requirements of applications and enhances user experience.
Description
After the IP transmission is applied to the GBSS, the transmission resources are multiplexed instead of being occupied exclusively. When the transmission resources are not sufficient, the congestion may cause the increase of delay, packet loss, and call drop. Therefore, the QoS mechanisms are required to guarantee the transmission quality of IP network. Huawei GBSS equipment provides different QoS mechanisms at each protocol layer to guarantee an end-to-end QoS, as listed in the following table:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 328 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Protocol Layer Application layer QoS Mechanism 1. Admission control 2. Congestion management based on the congestion status of transmission resources 3. Logical port shaping 4. IP PATH IP layer Data link layer 1. Priority mapping 1. VLAN 2. Congestion management (PQ, WRR, tail drop, WRED) Physical layer 1. Physical bandwidth shaping
QoS mechanism at physical layer Physical bandwidth shaping: The burst flow in the network is controlled by the buffer and token bucket. If the messages are transmitted at a very high speed, the messages are buffered and transmitted at a uniform speed under the control of the token bucket.
QoS mechanism at data link layer VLAN: Virtual local area network (VLAN) logically isolates the data of different applications during transmission. For example, the network allocates the O&M data transferred between the BSC and the BTS, data transferred by signaling messages, and service data to different VLANs. This improves the security of network transmission. This function applies to Abis over IP and A over IP. Congestion management: The congestion occurs when the rate at which the data arrives at the port is higher than the rate at which the data is sent from the port. Then, the voice quality deteriorates and the data transmission rate reduces. In addition, the congestion increases the packet transmission delay and delay variation. An excessively long delay causes packet retransmission and further aggravates the network congestion. Therefore, the congestion control mechanisms are used to prevent congestion for the packets received, such as the tail drop and WRED. The queuing scheduling techniques such as PQ and WRR are used to send the packets in real time based on the priority of each packet. The congestion management is applicable when IP transmission is established on Abis, A, and Gb interface.
IP layer Priority mapping: A definite rule is used to identify the messages for different services. Then, the messages are classified and prioritized, and they are associated with the corresponding flow control and resource assignment. The QoS mapping in the transmission network is implemented according to the data with different priorities. Priority mapping is applicable to Abis over IP and A over IP.
Application layer Admission control: Admission control is a major measure used to prevent congestion and is an important mechanism of the entire QoS policy. The system determines the bandwidth required for the access of new services to prevent port or link congestion and to guarantee the QoS of the entire system. Congestion management: The admission control applies only to new services that attempt to access the system; whereas, the congestion management applies to the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 329 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description admitted services and alleviates the congestion when transmission resources are congested. The BSC decreases the rates of the services that already access the network in the congestion control and bandwidth reservation phases to increase the processing capacity of the entire system. IP PA TH is used for admission control and LDR is used for congestion control. According to the congestion severity, the admission control is classified into three phases: normal admission, congestion control, and bandwidth reservation. Different admission strategies are applied in different phases. Normal admission phase: The transmission resources are not congested and all services are allowed to access the system. Congestion control phase: The transmission resources are slightly congested and the services after rate reduction are allowed to access the system. The rate control measures consist of the PS coding control, CS AMR coding control, and preferential assignment of TCHHs for CS services. Bandwidth reservation phase: The transmission resources are severely congested. When the bandwidth is available, intra-BSC handover, incoming BSC handover, and paging response are admitted. New services with high priorities are allowed to wait in queue and preempt transmission resources, whereas other types of services are rejected. Admission control is performed on the basis of the bandwidth usage of the IP PA TH. When an IP path is configured on the logical port or resource group, two-level (IP PA TH and logical port/resource group) admission is performed. Logical port shaping: Generally, one physical FE/GE port on the BSC can carry the traffic of multiple BTSs. Traffic shaping on this physical port cannot be implemented on these BTSs. When burst flow occurs on one BTS, the traffic processing of other BTSs may be seriously affected. Therefore, the BSC performs two-level traffic shaping on the logical ports on the BTSs in Abis over IP mode. In this way, the BSC accurately controls the traffic flow on the BTSs according to the processing capacity of each BTS. This prevents the prolonged delay of services and the increase of delay variation and packet loss rate. IP PA TH: In Abis over IP mode, the IP paths of different bandwidths are configured according to the service type. This guarantees the transmission resource for each service type and prevents different service types from preempting the transmission resources. The IP path is a logical link with virtual bandwidth and is carried on the physical link in the IP transmission network. The IP PA TH mechanism is mainly applicable to admission control. That is, admission control is performed during the MS access phase according to the service type and the bandwidth of the corresponding IP path. Thus, the effect of the services on each other can be reduced.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 330 of 368
Priority Queues
PQ+WR Rqueues
EF AF4 BE
Priority Queues
PQ+WR Rqueues
EF AF4 BE
Priority Queues
EF AF4
PQ+WR Rqueues
BE
logical port 1 level shaper
logical port
logical port
IP Scheduler
2 level shaper FE port
IP/Ethernet Transport Network
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-8601 Abis over IP GBFD-8602 A over IP GBFD-8603 Gb over IP Dependency on other NEs None.
2.35.3 GBFD-8606 Clock Over IP

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 331 of 368
Summary
Clock over IP provides accurate clock synchronization for several BTSs in the GBSS IP network. Compared with the GPS clock, Clock over IP is a low-cost clock solution. The transmission cost is high because the IP timing packets are sent continuously. Huawei GBSS equipment supports the function of defining the interval for sending IP timing packets. It c an reduce the transmission bandwidth as long as the BTS clock synchronization is guaranteed.Benefits In the IP-based GSM network, Clock over IP provides clock synchronization to guarantee the normal operation of the GSM system. Compared with the GPS clock synchronization, Clock over IP significantly reduces the cost of network deployment.
Description
Clock over IP is a low-cost clock solution for BTS synchronization. It consists of IP clock server and IP clock client. IP clock server extracts reference clock source from a clock device such as a GPS or BITS. Then, the IP clock server sends the clock synchronization information to the BTS by sending timing packets. As the IP clock client, the BTS performs the adaptation on the IP packets and obtains the clock synchronization information. Every IP timing packet occupies a certain bandwidth. Therefore, in the case of leased network or satellite transmission resources, the continuous transmission of IP timing packets leads to an increased CAPEX and may even affect the ongoing services during busy hours. The GBSS allows operators to define the interval for sending IP timing packets. In such a case, the IP timing packets are sent when the load of the network is light. The BTS clock provided by the GBSS can maintain a precision of 0.05 ppm within 90 days. Thus, the bandwidth can be saved and the BTS clock can be synchronized by sending the IP timing packets regularly. The application scenario of Clock over IP is shown as follows:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 332 of 368
Enhancement
GBSS8.1 Enhanced Clock over IP is available, which is used for the flexible configuration of clock synchronization mode.
Dependency
Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs An independent IP clock device is required.
2.35.4 GBFD-8607 IP Performance Monitor

Availability
Summary
IP performance monitor (IP PM) detects the QoS in the IP transmission network. The detection of QoS of the IP transmission network is the base for flow control and admission control of the GSM IP network. IP PM provides timely and fast QoS detection of the bearer network to effectively monitor the transmission network.
Benefits
With this feature, the QoS problems in the IP transmission network can be detected timely and quickly. According to the traffic statistics in IP PM, the usage condition of bandwidth is available, which is a reference for the transmission network adjustment.
Description
IP PM uses Forward Monitoring (FM) and Backward Reporting (BR) mechanisms to detect packet loss. One end periodically sends the FM message, informing the peer end of the number of packets sent. On receiving the FM message, the peer end responds with a BR message, reporting the number of packets received. The sending end then collects statistics about the packet loss and delay based on the BR message. The working principle of IP PM is shown as follows:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 333 of 368
After IP PM is enabled, flow control and admission control are performed on the basis of the delay, delay variation, or packet loss rate of a certain IP link between the BSC and BTS. When the delay variation or packet loss rate increases, you can adjust the outgoing data rate of the logical port associated with the link to reduce the load on the link, thus alleviating the congestion. IP PM, complying with Huawei private protocol, requires the support from the BSC and the BTS.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other NEs None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS This feature depends on GBFD-8601 Abis over IP.
2.36 PICO Solution Package

2.36.1 GBFD-10601 PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning
Availability
Summary
The pico base station is BTS3900B. After being installed with hardware and powered on, the BTS3900B can connect with the BSC automatically with the network automatic detection function. Operators do not need to configure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based on frequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 334 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description level of surrounding frequencies reported from the BTS, and then performs the automatic configuration and planning of the BTS39000B.
Benefits

This feature helps operators to rapidly deploy the network and flexibly adjust the network layout. This feature helps reduce the workload of manual configuration once the network is adjusted.
Description
The BTS3900B is a new generation pico base station launched by Huawei. It is small and light, has the plug-and-play feature, and supports indoor installation. The automatic configuration and planning function of the BTS3900B provides simple and easy installation for operators. After being installed with hardware and powered on, the BTS3900B automatically performs the internal check to confirm that the hardware is properly installed. After the self-check is complete, the BTS3900B automatically configures the parameters related to IP transmission and establishes the encrypted IP transmission links with the BSC and the M2000. Then, the BTS3900B reports its device configurations to the M2000. The M2000 calculates the available radio parameters automatically based on the information about the frequenc y bands and ambient radio environment reported by the BTS3900B, and then sends the parameters including frequencies, BSIC, CGI, and so on to the BSC to configure based on the parameters. After the basic parameters are configured, the BTS3900B can work normally and process services. After the network runs for a period of time, you can manually initiate the automatic planning procedure of the BTS3900B through the M2000 if the network adjustment is required. Only a few manual configurations are required during the automatic planning procedure. Therefore, the BSC provides a mechanism of reporting event alarms to timely notify users of any exception during automatic planning.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature is only supported by the pico base station. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the M2000.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 335 of 368
2.36.2 GBFD-10602 PICO Synchronization

Availability
Summary
The pico base station is BTS3900B. The BTS3900B implements the frequency synchronization on the Um interface by demodulating the signals on the frequency correction channel (FCCH) and synchronization channel (SCH) on the main BCCH in the surrounding macro BTSs and then adjusting the frequency offset.
Benefits
With this feature, operators need to provide neither the external clock source nor the GPS hardware for frequency synchronization, thus saving the cost of deploying sites and O&M cost.
Description
In the GSM network, the frequencies must be synchronized on the Um interface among BTSs. Otherwise, the network quality is affected. For example, the handover success rate drops. At present, four solutions are employed to implement frequency synchronization on the Um interface: external BITS clock, IPCLK, upper-level BSC clock, and GPS clock. All these four solutions require the external clock source or the GPS hardware, and thus are not applicable to the indoor BTS3900B. This feature, however, can implement frequency synchronization on the Um interface between the pico base station and the surrounding macro BTSs by using software to provide the 13 MHz synchronization clock. The BTS3900B applies for frequencies of neighbour cells for synchronization and demodulates the FCCH and SCH in turn. Then, the BTS3900B calculates the frequency offset to the target frequency and corrects its frequency to achieve frequency synchronization on the Um interface.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature is only supported by the pico base station. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 336 of 368
2.37 Easy GSM Solution Package

2.37.1 GBFD-10701 Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning
Availability
Summary
The Compact BTS is BTS3900E. After being installed with hardware and powered on, the BTS3900E can connect to the BSC automatically. Operators do not need to configure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based on frequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink level of surrounding frequencies reported from the BTS, and then performs the automatic configuration and planning of the BTS39000E.
Benefits

This feature enables operators to rapidly deploy the network network layout.
and flexibly adjust the
This feature helps reduce the workload of manual configuration once the network is adjusted.
Description
The BTS3900E is a new generation pico base station launched by Huawei. It is small and light, has the plug-and-play feature, and supports indoor installation. The automatic configuration and planning function of the BTS3900E provides simple and easy installation for operators. After being installed with hardware and powered on, the BTS3900E automatically performs the internal check to confirm that the hardware is properly installed. After the self-check is complete, the BTS3900B automatically configures the parameters related to IP transmission and establishes the encrypted IP transmission links with the BSC and the M2000. Then, the BTS3900E reports its device configurations to the M2000. The M2000 calculates the available radio parameters automatically based on the information about the frequency bands and ambient radio environment reported by the BTS3900B, and then sends the parameters including frequencies, BSIC, CGI, and so on to the BSC to configure based on the parameters. After the basic parameters are configured, the BTS3900E can work normally and process services. After the network runs for a period of time, you can manually initiate the automatic planning procedure of the BTS3900E through the M2000 if the network adjustment is required. Only a few manual configurations are required during the automatic planning procedure. Therefore, the BSC provides a mechanism of reporting event alarms to timely notify users of any exception during automatic planning.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 337 of 368
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature is only supported by the Compact BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the M2000.
2.37.2 GBFD-10702 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning

Availability
Summary
The Compact BTS is BTS3900E. According to the traffic volume, the BSC adjusts the output power of the TRX in real time to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage of the network. A cell is initially configured with one TRX of 30 W power. With the increase of the traffic volume, another TRX in the cell is automatically activated, and thus these two TRXs share the 30 W power.
Benefits
With this feature, the network capacity and coverage can be automatically adjusted without manual intervention, thus reducing the maintenance cost.
Description
At the early stage of site deployment, the traffic volume is low. Thus, the BTS is configured with one TRX, which transmits with 30 W on the GSM900 frequency band. With the slow increase of the traffic volume, when the preset threshold is exceeded, the BSC automatically configures two TRXs, with the total transmit power no more than 30 W. During the operation of the BTS, the system adjusts the TRX transmit power in real time according to the change of the traffic volume. In this way, the coverage is changed, thus achieving the optimal network performance. This feature mainly applies to the scenario where there are few neighboring cells and the network structure is simple, especially, where the network experiences slow increase of traffic volume.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 338 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature is only supported by the Compact BTS. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the M2000.
2.38 2G and 3G Co-transmission

2.38.1 MRFD-260001 2G and 3G Co-transmission by TDM Switching
Availability
Summary
With the TDM timeslot cross connection function, the SDH/PDH transmission network can be shared among the GSM/UMTS network.
Benefits
This feature allows operators to minimize the infrastructure costs, especially during the UMTS deployment phase when the network load is low. The UMTS UTRAN and the GBSS share the same physical transmission media to transfer the user data and control data.
Description
With the TDM timeslot cross connection function, Huawei wireless equipment is able to multiplex the data flow in the GSM/UMTS network onto one SDH network. The RNC and the NodeB map A TM cells or IP packages on multiple E1 timeslots by using the fractional A T M function or fractional IP function to implement the data transmission. The principle of the transmission sharing is shown as follows:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 339 of 368
time slot time slot time slot time slot NodeB time slot time slot time slot time slot GBTS time slot TDM SW
time slot time slot time slot time slot
SDH/PDH
time slot time slot time slot time slot
time slot time slot time slot time slot TDM SW time slot time slot time slot time slot GBSC 2G traffic RNC
Co-transmission Idle timeslot time slot 3G traffic time slot
TDM co-transmission can be applied to both the Abis interface and Iub interface. In the TCM co-transmission, the timeslots are shared among 2G and 3G networks. The following figure shows the co-transmission on the Iub interface. The 3G data occupies some timeslots on the E1 connection by using the fractional A TM or fractional IP techniques. The remaining timeslots are occupied by the 2G data. In this solution, the 3G equipment implements the timeslot cross connection.
E1(fractional A T M/IP)
RNC E1(N64K) BSC
WMPT E1(N64K) GTMU
The following figure shows the TDM co-transmission on the Abis interface. The 2G data occupies only some timeslots on the E1 connection. The remaining timeslots are occupied by the 3G data using the fractional A TM or fractional IP techniques. In this solution, the 2G equipment implements the timeslot cross connection.
E1/SDH
BSC Fractional ATM/IP (N64K) Fractional ATM/IP (N64K) RNC
GTMU
WMPT
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 340 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature depends on the following features of the RNC: WRFD-05030101 A TM over E1T1 on Iub Interface WRFD-050411 Fractional IP Function on Iub Interface
2.39 Public Voice Group Call Service

2.39.1 GBFD-10301 Public Voice Group Call Service
Availability
Summary
The public voice group call service (VGCS) adopts the half-duplex mode and provides voice services for a group of pre-defined MSs in a pre-defined area.
Benefits
With this feature, operators can provide a new half-duplex voice service for a group of subscribers to meet the requirement of dispatching service. This service focuses on enterprise users and government users. This service is called GSM Digital Trunking or Public Access Mobile Radio (PAMR). Compared with multiparty communication service, VGCS can greatly reduce the occupancy of radio channels and improve the utilization of radio channel resources.
Description
VGCS simultaneous ly provides voice services for a group of MSs in a pre-defined area in half-duplex mode. The network side defines the group call number, group members and coverage area. The MS who has the permission can dial the group call number to initiate a group call. All the group members within the coverage area can be informed to join the group call. One of the group members can press and hold PTT on the mobile phone to speak to others. During this period, other members can only listen but not talk by pressing PTT. Other group members can speak by pressing PTT only after the talker releases PTT. When the conversation is complete, the
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 341 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description VGCS originator terminates the call by pressing the on-hook key and then all the group members quit. In addition, the VGCS provides dispatcher service. The dispatcher is a special user of the fixed network or the mobile network defined by the network side. The dispatcher has the permission to talk at any time during a VGCS call and originates or terminates a VGCS call authorized by the network side.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the MSC, HLR, and MS.
2.39.2 GBFD-10303 Late Group Channel Assignment

Availability
Summary
After a VGCS call is established, if no group member involved in the call is in the cell within the predefined coverage area, the VGCS traffic channel is not assigned. If a group member accesses the cell during the VGCS call, then the network side assigns a traffic channel for the call.
Benefits
This feature effectively saves the radio channel resources when operators promote VGCS-based services.
Description
During VGCS, the voice of the talker is sent to other group members through the VGCS channel of the cell. If no group member involved in the call is in the cell within the coverage area, the VGCS channel is actually idle. With this feature, the network side sends a VGCS call notice periodically in each cell within the coverage area and the cell in which group members exist receives the response of the MS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 342 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Then, the network side assigns a VGCS channel for the cell and notifies the group members to join the VGCS call. The cells that do not respond are not assigned VGCS channels. In addition, the network side periodically detects the MSs of all the cells within the coverage area. If no group member involved in the VGCS call exists in a cell due to some reason, for example, outgoing cell handover, the network side releases the VGCS channel assigned to the cell.
Dependency
2.39.3 GBFD-10305 Single Channel Group Call Originating

Availability
Summary
When a VGCS/VBS call is originated, only one TCH is occupied.
Benefits
When a VGCS/VBS call is originated, the originating cell needs only one TCH. This improves the utilization of frequency resources, reducing the congestion rate of TCHs during busy hours, and enhancing the QoS of network.
Description
When a VGCS/VBS call is originated, the originating cell requires two TCHs by default, where one TCH is a VGCS/VBS channel and the other TCH is used for the originator to talk before a VGCS/VBS call is established. After the VGCS/VBS call is established, the network switches the originator to the VGCS/VBS channel and then releases the TCH that is assigned initially. This is called dual-channel group call originating. In the single channel group call originating mode, the BSS switches the VGCS/VBS originator from the SDCCH to the VGCS/VBS channel directly. In the entire VGCS/VBS originating phase, no more traffic channels are occupied.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 343 of 368
Dependency
2.39.4 GBFD-10306 Talker Identification

Availability
Summary
During a VGCS/VBS call, the real-time information of the current talker is displayed on each MS of the subscriber involved in the call.
Benefits
Talker identification is a supplementary function of GSM Digital Trunking services, which enables the MSs involved in a VGCS call to display the information regarding the talker such as telephone number, subscriber name, and priority within the group. In this way, the group members can obtain the real-time information of the current talker and determine whether to initiate PTT preemption within the group.
Description
Like the function of Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP), talker identification allows the information of the current talker to be displayed in real time on the MSs in the VGCS/VBS. The information includes telephone number (subscriber name in the phonebook) and priority. During a VGCS/VBS call, the network side periodically broadcasts the talk information including the MSISDN of the talker and the priorities of group members in the cell within the coverage area. After receiving the information, the MSs of other subscribers display the information of the current talker, including the MSISDN (or subscriber name in the phonebook) and priority in the group. After the talker terminates the conversation, the network side broadcasts the information periodically without the content of the talker and then other group members remove the information displayed on the MSs.
Enhancement
None.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 344 of 368
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature complies with Huawei private protocol and should be supported by the MSC/VLR, HLR, and MS.
2.39.5 GBFD-10307 Group Call EMLPP

Availability
Summary
Group call eMLPP ensures timely service for the VGCS/VBS/point-to-point call subscribers with high eMLPP priority by means of service/resource preemption.
Benefits
This feature allows operators to provide the VGCS on different levels, thus improving the user satisfaction. This feature enables operators to quickly respond to requirements during emergencies, thereby guaranteeing the communications services, and fulfilling their social responsibility.
Description
The eMLPP feature allows the network to use different policies such as queuing, preemption, and directed retry according to the calls with different priorities when the network resources are seized. Group call eMLPP are categorized into seven priorities: A, B, and 0-4. A: highest, for network internal use B: for network internal use 0: for subscription 1: for subscription 2: for subscription 3: for subscription 4: lowest, for subscription
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 345 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description A and B are the highest priorities, which are used for the network maintenance. When defining subscribers, operators must define the eMLPP priorities of the subscribers and the VGCS group respectively. Group call eMLPP consists of service preemption and resource preemption.
Service preemption During a VGCS call or point-to-point call, the MS determines whether to accept the new call (including a paging to the MS or a VGCS/VBS call) based on the priorities of these two calls. If the MS supports service preemption, the MS determines whether to join a call with high priority. Resource preemption If network resources (such as processing capability, signaling channels, and traffic channels) are insufficient, calls with high priorities do not release network resources. In this case, new calls with high priorities can queue or even preempt the resources seized by the calls with low priorities. For details, see the description of GBFD-5001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP).
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.39.6 GBFD-10308 Fast Group Call Setup

Availability
Summary
Fast group call setup can shorten the time of VGCS/VBS establishment by optimizing the signaling process for establishing VGCS/VBS calls and the related data configurations.
Benefits
Fast group call setup ensures the VGCS/VBS scheduling efficiency on some special occasions and meets the requirements of the VGCS/VBS subscribers.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 346 of 368
Description
On some special occasions, the time of VGCS/VBS establishment needs to be shortened to ensure the VGCS/VBS scheduling efficiency. To shorten the time of setting up group calls, the signaling process for establishing VGCS/VBS calls and the related data configurations are optimized. Immediate assignment optimization: If the fast group call setup mode is adopted, the SABM frame contains the IMMEDIA T E SETUP message when an MS originates a VGCS call. Thus, the subsequent SETUP process can be omitted and the time of setting up VGCS calls is shortened. The BSS optimizes the channel assignment procedure by using the "Immediate TCH Assignment" and "Immediate Assignment Optimization" signaling procedures. In addition, the signaling interworking process between the BSC and the BTS is simplified, before the BSS sends the immediate assignment command to the MS. At the same time, the bandwidth of the TCH is far greater than that of the SDCCH. Hence, the MS sets up a link on the TCH quickly and easily. NCH block number optimization: Configuring a large number of blocks occupied by the NCH in a cell ensures message are sent on the Um interface quickly and speeds up the VGCS call establishment. Other procedure optimization: Omitting some procedures such as authentication, ciphering, or TMSI reassignment can speed up the group call establishment.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.39.7 GBFD-10309 Group Call Reliability Enhancing

Availability
Summary
When the BTS is disconnected from the network, the BTS still supports the VGCS/VBS calls for specified fixed group numbers within the coverage area.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 347 of 368
Benefits
Based on this feature, when the BTS is disconnected from the network due to accident or disaster, operators can still provide VGCS/VBS service in the area covered by the BTS, thus enhancing user experience and brand image of the product.
Description
In addition to the system-specific reliability mechanisms such as active/standby switchover and resource pool, Huawei GBSS VGCS/VBS also provides fail soft capability for the VGCS/VBS feature to improve its reliability. After the BTS is disconnected from the network, the BTS works in fail soft mode and supports the VGCS/VBS within the coverage area. A single cell or several cells can be configured under a BTS. The BTS automatically switches to normal working mode after the transmission recovers In fail soft mode, Huawei GBSS supports the regular call initiation. The BTS initiates a VGCS call that is fixedly configured once the transmission is disrupted. Then, the subscribers can seize the uplink to talk to the subscribers in other groups within the coverage area of the BTS. The VGCS call, however, cannot be stopped so that the calls with high priority can be set up automatically once the transmission is disrupted.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BTS hardware This feature should be supported by the BTS. Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs None.
2.40 Public Voice Broadcast Service

2.40.1 GBFD-10302 Public Voice Broadcast Service
Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 348 of 368
Summary
Public voice broadcast service (VBS) adopts the simplex mode and provides point-to-multipoint voice services for a group of pre-defined MSs in a pre-defined area.
Benefits
This feature enables operators to provide a new broadcast-based voice service for the subscribers and thus increases the revenue.
Description
VBS is a special kind of VGCS. After the network side determines the VBS call number, group members, and coverage area, the MS who has the authority can dial the call number to initiate a VBS call. All the group members within the coverage area can be informed to join the VBS call. Only the originator can talk during a VBS call. The originator can talk without pressing PTT during the call and other members can hear the voice of the originator. After the conversation is complete, the originator terminates the VBS call by pressing the on-hook key and then all the group members exit. In addition, the VBS provides dispatcher service. The dispatcher is a special subscriber of the fixed network or the mobile network defined by the network side. The dispatcher can originate and terminate a VBS call authorized by the network side. If the dispatcher is not the originator of the VBS call, no one can talk during the call.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
2.40.2 GBFD-10304 Late Broadcast Channel Assignment

Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 349 of 368
Summary
After a VBS call is established, if no group member involved in the call is in the cell within the pre-defined coverage area, the VBS traffic channel is not assigned. If a group member accesses the cell during the VBS call, then the network side assigns a VBS traffic channel for the call.
Benefits
This feature effectively saves the radio channel resources when operators promote VBS-based services.
Description
During a VBS call, the voice of the originator is sent to other group members through the VBS channel of the cell. If no group member involved in the call is in the cell within the coverage area, the VBS channel is actually idle. With this feature, the network side sends a VBS call notice periodically in each cell within the coverage area and the cell in which group members exist receives the response of the MS. Then, the network side assigns the VBS channel for the cell and notifies the group members to join the VBS call. VBS Channel is not assigned to the cells that do not respond. In addition, the network side periodically detects the MSs of all the cells within the coverage area during a VBS call. If no group member involved in the VBS call exists in a cell due to some reason, for example, outgoing cell handover, the network side releases the VGCS channel assigned to the cell.
Dependency
2.41 Handover
2.41.1 GBFD-10501 HUAWEI II Handover
Availability
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 350 of 368
Summary
HUAWEI II handover algorithm is optimized from HUAWEI I handover algorithm. HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes all results of handover decisions into account, thus obtaining more accurate results of handover decisions.
Benefits
This feature improves the accuracy of the handover decision and increases the handover success rate. This feature enhances the network quality and improves the network KPIs.
Description
HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes account all results of handover decisions and candidate cell list, and then generates the handover execution policy. HUAWEI II handover algorithm is categorized into three handover algorithms: emergency handover (directed retry, frequency offset handover, bad quality handover, TA handover, and edge handover), intra-cell handover (interference handover, BCCH tight frequency multiplexing in concentric cell, AMR handover), inter-cell handover (better cell handover, enhanced dual band network handover, fast-moving handover, and 2G/3G inter-RA T handover). All handover decisions are traversed in the handover decision phase. Unlike common handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm is not performed immediately if the triggering condition of a handover is met during the traverse. But only the candidate target cell lists with handover decision type are generated independently. After all handover decisions are traversed, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes the intersection from the candidate target cell lists corresponding to the handovers that meet the triggering condition, and then generates the final target cell list for the handover. Compared with common handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes all results of handover decisions into account, thus obtaining more accurate results of handover decisions.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 351 of 368
2.41.2 GBFD-10502 Handover Re-establishment

Availability
Summary
On receiving the Error Indication message from the BTS during the handover process, the BSC does not regard it as a call drop directly and attempts to re-establish a call on the old channel.
Benefits
Handover re-establishment provides the following benefits:

Reduces the call drop rate and improving user satisfaction. Improves network KPIs.
Description
In the handover process, the BSC sends the Handover Command message to the MS. Then, if the BSC does not receive any response from the MS but receives an Error Indication message from the BTS, the BSC regards it as a call drop. After handover re-establishment is applied, the BSC indicates that the BTS can re-establish a call on the old link over the Um interface after the BSC receives an Error Indication message on the old link. If the call re-establishment is successful, the MS makes calls on the old channel and no call drop occurs.
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Impacts on the BSC hardware None. Impacts on the BTS hardware None. Dependency on other features of the GBSS None. Dependency on other NEs This feature should be supported by the BTS.
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 352 of 368
2.42 RAN Sharing

2.42.1 GBFD-8701 RAN Sharing
Availability
Summary
On the condition that independency of CNs of multiple operators is maintained, RAN Sharing enables multiple operators to share one GBSS network so that they can use the resources (including the BSC, BTS, antenna system, transmission, and so on) in the GBSS network simultaneous ly.
Benefits
The GBSS equipment sharing enables new operators to access the network easily and implement the network coverage quickly. Operators can fully utilize the network resources and increase the revenue by sharing the equipment on the existing network. This feature reduces the comprehensive operation cost of operators. Each operator carries out radio services independently so that they can maintain the independence of business development from the network planning.
Description
RAN Sharing supports a maximum of four operators. Each operator has an independent CN (MSC and SGSN). The shared GBSS uses a uniform network management system, which implements comprehensive management of all the resources in the GBSS. The OSS can connect to the NMSs of multiple operators through the NMS interface. Then, operators can set cell-specific parameters independently to support the activation and deactivation, performance management, log management, and alarm management. The setting of the non-cell parameters and performance management can be implemented by the network management system. The shared services in the GBSS are CS services and PS services. For processing these services, the GBSS routes them to the specific CN to which the cell belongs. In addition, RAN Sharing supports the coexistence of shared resources and non-shared resources in the BSS. For example, some resources in the BSS, such as all the resources under one BTS belong to a specific operator. Thus, other operators cannot use these resources. The resources under other BTSs in the GBSS can be shared by multiple operators. The network structure of RAN Sharing is shown as follows:
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 353 of 368
Operator A CN
Operator B CN
Operator A NMS
Operator B NMS
BSC iManage M2000
A interface
Um interface BTS
Shared Master OSS
Operator A Operator A Operator B Cell3 Cell1 Cell2
Shared GBSS
Enhancement
None.
Dependency
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 354 of 368
3
Acronyms and Abbreviations 3G 3GPP2 8PSK AAL AB AbisPC ACCH ACS AEC AFC AGCH AGT AICP ALC ALM AMR AMRFS AMRHS ANR APM
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 3-1 Acronyms and abbreviations: Full Spelling 3 rd Generation Mobile Communication System 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 8 Phase Shift Keying ATM Adaptation Layer Access Burst Abis interface Port Control Associated Control CHannel Active Codec Set Acoustic Echo Cancellation Automatic Frequency Correction Access Grant CHannel Agent A Interface Common Procedure Automatic Level Control Alarm Adaptive Multi Rate Adaptive Multi Rate Full Speed Adaptive Multi Rate Half Speed Automatic Noise Restraint Advanced Power Module
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 355 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations APN APP APS ARP ARQ ATM ATT BA BAM BBU BCCH BEP BER BFD BG BIU BKP BM BMACT BMRC BOM BQ BR BSC BSCOM BSIC BSSAP BSSAP+ BSSGP BTS Full Spelling Access Point Name Application Automatic Protection Switchback Address Resolution Protocol Automatic ReQuest for retransmission Asynchronous Transfer Mode Attach-Detach allowed BCCH Allocation Back Administration Module Baseband Control Unit Broadcast Control CHannel Bit Error Probability Bit Error Rate Bidirectional Forwarding Detection Border Gateway Base station Interface Unit Backplane Board Basic Module Basic Module Active Codec Type BM Resource Control Bill Of Materials Bad Quality Backward Reporting Base Station Controller BSC O&M Base Station Identity Code Base Station Subsystem Application Part Base Station Subsystem Application Part Plus Base Station System GPRS Protocol Base Transceiver Station
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 356 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations BTSCP BTSOM BTSTRC BVC BVCI CACS CAPEX CBC CBCH CBE CBIP CBSC CCB CCCH CCU CDB CDU CECCM CECHM CEGPRS CELP CESP CGI CHR CI CI CIC CIU CM CMI Full Spelling BTS Common Processing BTS O&M BTS Transmission Resource Control BSSGP Virtual Connection BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier Common Active Codec Set Capital expenditures Cell Broadcast Center Cell Broadcast CHannel Cell Broadcast Entity Cell Broadcast Interface Process CDMA2000 BaseStation Controller Call Control Block Common Control Channel Channel Codec Unit Cell Broadcast Database Combining and Distribution Unit CEll CCM process CEll Channel Management Cell GPRS Processing Code-Excited LPC Cell Service Process Cell Global Identifier Call History Record Cell Identify Cell Identity Circuit Identity Code Circuit Interface Unit Configuration Manage Codec Mode Indication
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 357 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations CMR CPRI CPUX CRC CRDLC CS CSD CV CW DACS DBAPI DBG DBMI DBUS DCS 1800MHz DHCP Diffserv DOPRA DPU DRFU DRX DSCP DSPC DSPI DSPOM DSPOM_AGT DSPP DT DTAP DTCB Full Spelling Codec Mode Request Common Protocol Radio Interface xpu CPU eXtended Cyclic Redundancy Check Call Radio Link Control Coding Scheme Circuit Switched Data Countdown Value Call Wait Distant Active Codec Set DataBase API Debug DataBase Management Interface Data-BUS Digital Cellular System 1800MHz Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Differentiated Services Distributed Object-oriented Programmable Realtime Architecture Data Process Unit Double Radio Filter Unit Discontinuous Reception DiffServ Code Point DSP for transCoder DSP for Integrated DSP O&M DSP OM Agent DSP for Pcu Debug Terminal Direct Transfer Application Part Distance To Cell Board
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 358 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations DTM DTM DTMF DTX ECSD ECT EDA EFR EFR E-GSM EICC EML EM-layer eMLPP EMR ES ESL ESR ETHERNET OAM ETRAU FACCH FAI FBI FCS FDR FE FEC FER FER Full Spelling Dual Transfer Mode Dual Transfer Mode Dual-Tone Multi-frequency Discontinuous Transmission Enhanced Circuit Switched Data Explicit Call Transfer Extended Dynamic Allocation Enhanced Full Rate Enhanced Full Rate Extended GSM-900 Band (includes Standard GSM-900 band) Enhanced Interference Counteract Combining Extended Operation and Maintenance Link Element Management-layer enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption service Enhanced Measurement Report Errored Second Extend Signaling Link Errored Second Ratio ETHERNET OAM EGPRS TRAU Fast Associated Control CHannel Final Ack Indicator Final Block Indicator Frame Check Sequence Frequency Domain Reflectometer Fast Ethernet Forward Error Correction Frame Erase Ratio Frame Erase Ratio
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 359 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations FH FIR Flex Abis FM FN FR FR FR AMR FS FTP FTPS FUC Gb GBSC GBSS GDPUC GDPUX GE GEHUB GEIUB GEPUG GFGUA GFGUB GFGUG GGCU GGOUA GGOUB GMSK GOMU GPRS Full Spelling Frequency Hopping Finite Input Response Flex Abis Forward Monitoring Frame Number Frame Relay Full Rate Full Rate AMR Full Speed FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL FTP Over SSL Frame Unit Controller Gb interface GSM BaseStation Controller GSM Base Station Subsystems GDPU for transCoder GDPU for eXtensible use Gigabit Ethernet GSM E1/T1 High level Data Link Control Unit for aBis GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for aBis GSM E1/T1 Packet Unit for Gb GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for A GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for Abis GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for Gb GSM General Clock Unit GSM GE optical interface Unit for A GSM GE optical interface Unit for Abis Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (modulation) GSM Operation and Maintenance Unit General Packet Radio Service
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 360 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations GPS GRFU GRLM GRRM GSCU GSM-R GSN GTMU GTNU GTRAU GTRAUE GTRAUIP GUI GXPUM HDLC HLR HMC HR HR AMR HS HSCSD HTTP HubBTS IACS IBCA ICB ICC ICMP IDC IMEI Full Spelling Global Position System GSM Radio Frequency Unit GPRS Radio Link Management GPRS Radio Resource management GSM Switching and Control Unit Railways Global System for Mobile Communication Gigabyte System Network GSM Timing and Main control Unit GSM TDM switching Network Unit GPRS TRAU GPRS TRAU Enhancement GPRS TRAU IP transmission Graphical User Interface GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Main service High-Level Data Link Control Home Location Register High Multislot Classes Half Rate Half Rate AMR Half Speed High Speed Circuit Switched Data HyperText Transfer Protocol Hub Base Transceiver Station Immediate Active Codec Set Interference Based Channel Allocation Inner Combiner bypass Interference Rejection Combining Internet Control Messages Protocol Instance Distribution Control International Mobile Equipment Identity
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 361 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations IMSI IP IR ISI IWF KPI L3IF LA LAC LACS LAI LAN LAPD LLC LMT LRM M3UA MA MAC MACS MAIO MCS MGW MML MNC MOS MPTY MR MSC MSIC Full Spelling International Mobile Subscriber Identity Internet Protocol Incremental redundancy Inter-Symbol Interference Interworking Function Key Performance Index Layer-3 Interface Link adaptation Location Area Code Local Active Codec Set Location Area Identity Local Area Network Link Access Protocol on D channel Logic Link Control Local Maintenance Terminal Local Resource Management MTP3 User Adaptation Layer Mobile Allocation Medium Access Control Maximum number of Codes Modes in the Active Codec Set Mobile Allocation Index Offset Modulation and Coding Scheme Media Gateway Man-Machine Language Mobile Network Code Mean Opinion Scores MultiParty Measurement Report Main Switching Center MS Instance Control
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 362 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations MSIP MSISDN MTBF MTLS MTP2 MTP3 MTSS NACC NAT NCH NLN NM NMS NRI NS NSE NSEI NSS NSVC OACS OMC OML OPEX PACCH PAGCH PARC Pb PBCCH PBGT Full Spelling MS Instance Processing Mobile Station International ISDN Number Mean Time Between Failures Mapping and Transfer between LAPD entity and Service entity Message Transfer Part 2 Message Transfer Part 3 Mapping and Transfer between SCCP entity and Service entity Network Assisted Cell Change Network Address Translation Notification Channel Notification List Number Network Management Network Management System Network Resource Identifier Network Service Network Service Entity Network Service Entity Identifier Network Subsystem Network Service Virtual Connection Optimized Active Codec Set Operations & Maintenance Centre Operation and Maintenance Link Operating Expense Packet Associated Control CHannel Packet Access Grant CHannel Platform of Advanced Radio Controller PCU-BSC interface link Packet Broadcast Control CHannel Power Budget Handover
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 363 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations PBIP PBT PCCCH PCH PCM PCS 1900MHz PCU PDCH PDH PDTCH PDU PGC P-GSM PIU PLMN PMU PoC PPCH PQ PRACH PS PSI PSU PT PTCCH P-TMSI PTP PTRAU PTT PTU Full Spelling Pb Interface Processing Power Boost Technology Packet Common Control CHannel Paging CHannel Pulse Code Modulation Personal Communications Service 1900MHz Packet Control Unit Packet Data CHannel Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Packet Data Traffic CHannel Power Distribution Unit Paging Control Primary GSM-900 Band Packet Interface Unit Public Land Mobile Network Power Management Unit Push to Talk over Cellular Packet Paging CHannel Priority Queue Packet Random Access CHannel Packet Switch Domain Packet SI Status Power Supply Unit Payload Type Packet Timing Advanced Control CHannel Packet-Temporary Mobile Station Identity Point-To-Point Packet Transcoder/Rate Adaptor Unit Push-To-Talk Packet Transmission Unit
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 364 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations PVC QoS QTRU RACH RC RFC RFU RIM RLC RNC RPE-LTP RQI RR RRBP RSL RTCP RTP RX SACCH SAIC SAPI SCCP SCH SCTP SCU SDH SESR SGSN SID SIGTRAN Full Spelling Permanent Virtual Connection Quality of Service Quadruple Transmission Receiver Unit Random Access CHannel Resource control & Common procedure Request for Comments Radio Frequency Unit Reference Information Manager Radio Link Control WCDMA Radio Network Controller Regular Pulse Excitation-Long Term Prediction Radio Quality Indicator Radio Resources Relative Reserved Block Period Radio Signaling Link Real-time Transport Control Protocol Real-time Transport Protocol Reception Slow Associated Control CHannel Single Antenna Interference Cancellation Service Access Point Identifier Signaling Connection Control Part Synchronization CHannel Stream Control Transmission Protocol Switch Control Unit Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Severely Errored Second Ratio Serving GPRS Support Node Silence Descriptor Signaling Transport
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 365 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations SMC SMLC SMS SMSCB SONET SP SPHY SSL STP TA TBF TC TCEC TCH TCHF TCP/IP TD-SCDMA TEI TFI TFO TGPU THP TLLI TLS TMN TMSI TMU TNU TOP TPEC Full Spelling Short Message Centre Serving Mobile Location Center Short Message Service Short Message Service Cell Broadcast Synchronous Optical Network Service Provider Single PHY Security Socket Layer Signaling Transfer Point Timing Advanced Temporary Block Flow TransCoder The TRAN Circuit Emulation Card Traffic CHannel Traffic CHannel Full rate Transfer Control Protocol /Internet Protocol Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access Terminal Endpoint Identifier Temporary Block Flow Identifier Tandem Free Operation TRAN GBTS Package Process Unit Traffic handle Priority Temporary link level identity Transport Layer Security Telecommunication Management Network Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identifier Timing/transmission and Management Unit TDM switching Network Unit TDM Over Packet The TRAN Packet over E1/T1 Card
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 366 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations TRAU TRAUE TRAUIP TRC TrFO TRM TRU TRX TSU TSYN UDP UMTS UOIP UOP USCU USF VAD VBS VGCS VISP VLAN VLR VoIP VPN VQI WAN WBBP WCDMA WFQ WMPT Full Spelling Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit TRAU Enhancement TRAU IP transmission Trace Transcoder Free Operation Transport Resource Management Transmission Receiver Unit Transceiver TDM Switching network Unit TRAU Synchronization Unit User Datagram Protocol Universal Mobile Telecommunications System User traffic Data Over IP User Traffic Data Over Packet Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit Uplink Status Flag
Voice Activity Detector Voice Broadcast Service Voice Group Call Service Versatile IP and Secure Platform Virtual LAN Visitor Location Register Voice over IP Virtual Private Network Voice Quality Index Wide Area Network WCDMA Baseband Processing unit Wideband CDMA Weighted Fair Queuing WCDMA Main Processing Transmission unit
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 367 of 368
GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description Acronyms and Abbreviations WRED WRR XPUX Full Spelling Weighted Random Early Detection Weighted Round Robin XPU eXtended
Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)
Page 368 of 368

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description V2.6 (20091009)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description V2.6 (20091009)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Doc.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

2 Optional Feature........................................................................................................................ 152

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

3 Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................. 355

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

This feature description is about the BSC6000V900R008C12.

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

1.1.2 GBFD-0102 900 MHz Frequency Band

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

1.1.3 GBFD-0103 1800 MHz Frequency Band

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

1.1.4 GBFD-0104 1900 MHz Frequency Band

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1.2.2 GBFD-0202 Emergency Call Service (TS12)

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GBSS8.1 BSC6000 Feature Description

1.2.3 GBFD-0203 Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22)

Issue V2.5 (2009-04-24)